Home

Promise Technology VTrak E630FD

1. o VTrak RAID _ gt subsystem N VTrak JBOD unit RAID controller 1 connects to RAID controller 2 connects to e Both FC switches e Both FC switches One JBOD I O module The other JBOD I O module The VTrak RAID subsystem is shown with SFP transceivers installed Management Path To establish the management path 1 Connect an Ethernet cable between the Management port on each RAID controller and the network switch See page 33 Figure 16 2 Connect an Ethernet cable between the network port on each host PC or server and the network switch 32 Chapter 2 Installation If you have multiple VTrak subsystems repeat steps 1 and 2 as required Figure 16 FC SAN NSPF management connections s Network connector motherboard or HBA D a D cy Network switch TE 2999000000000000 9922888990922999 m 2999999990999999 9900299990000999 Host PCs or Servers Management port on controller 1 Management port on controller 2 VTrak RAID subsystem The VTrak RAID subsystem is shown with SFP transceivers installed JBOD Expansion JBOD connections are the same for all FC SAN and DAS configurations See Fibre Channel with JBOD Expansion on page 30 33 VTrak E Class
2. The next time the Administrator logs in use the default password password For more information see Logging into WebPAM PROe on page 69 and Logging Into the CLI on page 208 Important PROMISE recommends that you change the Administrator s default password immediately after reset See Changing User Passwords on page 105 or page 288 330 Chapter 7 Technology Background This chapter covers the following topics e Disk Arrays below e Logical Drives page 333 e Spare Drives page 355 e RAID Controllers page 361 iSCSI Management page 366 Internet Protocols page 373 Disk Arrays Disk array technology includes e Media Patrol page 331 PDM page 331 e Power Management page 332 Media Patrol Media Patrol is a routine maintenance procedure that checks the magnetic media on each disk drive Media Patrol checks all physical drives assigned to disk arrays and spare drives Media Patrol does not check unconfigured drives Media Patrol checks are enabled by default on all disk arrays and spare drives You can disable Media Patrol in the disk array and spare drive settings however that action is not recommended Unlike Synchronization and Redundancy Check Media Patrol is concerned with the condition of the media itself not the data recorded on the media If Media Patrol encounters a critical error it triggers PDM if PDM is e
3. 349 VTrak E Class Product Manual RAID 5 A RAID 5 Source logical drive can migrate to the following Target logical drives Target Requirements RAID 0 None RAID 1E None RAID 5 Add physical drives 32 maximum RAID 6 4 physical drives minimum 32 maximum If existing physical drives have no unused space add 1 or more physical drives RAID 10 4 physical drives minimum Even number of physical drives If existing physical drives have no unused space add 1 or more physical drives RAID 50 6 physical drives minimum 32 per axle maximum If existing physical drives have no unused space add 1 or more physical drives RAID 60 8 physical drives minimum 32 per axle maximum If existing physical drives have no unused space add 1 or more physical drives RAID 6 A RAID 6 Source logical drive can migrate to the following Target logical drives Target Requirements RAID 6 Add physical drives 32 maximum RAID 60 8 physical drives minimum 32 per axle maximum If existing physical drives have no unused space add 1 or more physical drives 350 Chapter 7 Technology Background RAID 10 A RAID 10 Source logical drive can migrate to the following Target logical drives Target Requirements RAID 0 None RAID 1E None RAID 5 3 physical drives minimum 32 maximum RAID 10 must have less than 16 physical drives RAID 6 4 physic
4. VTrak RAID subsystem The VTrak RAID subsystem is shown with SFP transceivers installed 26 Chapter 2 Installation Management Path To establish the management path 1 Connect Ethernet cables between the Management ports on both RAID controllers and the network switch See Figure 12 2 Connect Ethernet cables between the network ports on both host PCs or servers and the network switch If you have multiple VTrak subsystems repeat steps 1 and 2 as required Figure 12 FC SAN management connections Host PCs or servers Network connector motherboard or HBA S ert OSS gt T Network switch Tits ioe payeee Management pt on controller 1 lt Management port Le on controller 2 VTrak RAID subsystem The VTrak RAID subsystem is shown with SFP transceivers installed 27 VTrak E Class Product Manual Fibre Channel DAS Important For a list of supported HBAs switches and SFP transceivers download the latest compatibility list from PROMISE support http Awww promise com support Note For multipathing MPIO applications see e Appendix B Multipathing on Windows on page 363 e Appendix C Multipathing on Linux on page 385 Fibre Channel direct attached storage DAS requires e An FC HBA card in the host PC or server e An SFP tr
5. Recommended Applications for RAID 5 File and Application servers e WWW E mail and News servers e Intranet servers 338 Chapter 7 Technology Background RAID 6 Block and Double Parity Stripe RAID level 6 stores dual parity data is rotated across the physical drives along with the block data A RAID 6 logical drive can continue to accept I O requests when any two physical drives fail Figure 5 RAID 6 stripes all drives with data and dual parity Data Double Distributed Wide space Q Q Parity B B z Hy 9 O Physical Drives Hence a RAID 6 logical drive with 7 100 GB physical drives has a capacity of 500 GB A RAID 6 logical drive with 4 100 GB physical drives has a capacity of 200 GB RAID 6 becomes more capacity efficient in terms of physical drives as the number of physical drives increases RAID 6 provides double fault tolerance Your logical drive remains available when up to two physical drives fail RAID 6 is generally considered to be the safest RAID level A RAID 6 on VTrak consists of 4 to 32 physical drives Advantages Disadvantages e High Read data transaction rate High disk overhead equivalent e Medium Write data transaction of two drives used for parity rate Slightly lower performance than Good aggregate transfer rate RAID 5 e Safest RAID level except for RAID 60 Recommended Applications for RAID 6 e Accounting and Financial e
6. 60 Chapter 3 Setup Important PROMISE recommends that you change the Administrator s default password immediately after setup is completed See Changing User Passwords on page 105 or page 288 Note Make a Bookmark Firefox or set a Favorite Internet Explorer of the Login Screen so you can access it easily next time After log in the WebPAM PROe opens with the Dashboard tab See page 61 Figure 5 Figure 5 WebPAM PROe Dashboard tab C hatp 182 168 10_ard DashboadProc x j http 19216810 85 xcreen php BaseFolder dashboard DashbosrdProc PROMISE TECHNOLOGY INC gt Model VTrak 6201 Enclosure Type SBB SAS JU 168ay Event information Dever Severity Time Description Crit hi jan 22 2011 11 17 25 The system is started 61 VTrak E Class Product Manual Creating Disk Arrays and Logical Drives On a newly activated RAID system there are no disk arrays or logical drives The term disk array includes arrays composed of solid state drives To create your disk arrays and logical drives 1 Click the Storage tab then click the Wizard option Or click Disk Array under System Status The Wizard screen appears with three creation alternatives e Optimal Configurations See below e Automatic See page 63 e Express See page 63 e Advanced See page 64 2 Click one of these buttons to continue Figure 6 The configuration wizard O hatp 192
7. 286 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU User Privileges Level Meaning View Allows the user to see all status and settings but not to make any changes Maintenance Allows the user to perform maintenance tasks including Rebuilding PDM Media Patrol and Redundancy Check Power Allows the user to create but not delete disk arrays and logical drives change RAID levels change stripe size change settings of components such as disk arrays logical drives physical drives and the controller Super Allows the user full access to all functions including create and delete users and changing the settings of other users and delete disk arrays and logical drives The default administrator account is a Super User Changing Another User s Settings The Administrator or a Super User can change other users settings To change user settings 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight User Management and press Enter Highlight the User whose settings you want to change and press Enter Highlight Privilege and press the space bar to toggle though the options See the Table above Highlight Status and press the space bar to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Highlight the items you want and press the backspace key to erase the current value then type the new value e User name e Email address Press Control A to save the
8. Maintenance Allows the user to perform maintenance tasks including Rebuilding PDM Media Patrol and Redundancy Check Power Allows the user to create but not delete disk arrays and logical drives change RAID levels change stripe size change settings of components such as disk arrays logical drives physical drives and the controller Super Allows the user full access to all functions including create and delete users and changing the settings of other users and delete disk arrays and logical drives The default administrator account is a Super User Making Role Map Settings To make role map settings 1 of Oh Click the Administration tab Click the User Management icon Click the LDAP Settings button Click the Role Mapping button Click a Role Map in the list under LDAP Role and Subsystem Privilege and click the Settings button From the Subsystem Privilege dropdown menu choose a privilege level See the table above Click the Submit button 112 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Deleting a Role Map To delete a role map 1 OF RO Click the Administration tab Click the User Management icon Click the LDAP Settings button Click the Role Mapping button Click a Role Map in the list under LDAP Role and Subsystem Privilege and click the Delete button Click the Confirm button The Role Map is deleted from the list 113 VTrak E Class P
9. VTrak Unit Screws for physical drives Left and right mounting rails for VTraks that ship without e RJ11 to DB9 serial data cable anes 1 5m 4 9 ft Power cords 2 Warning The electronic components within the VTrak enclosure are sensitive to damage from Electro Static Discharge ESD Observe appropriate precautions at all times when handling the VTrak or its subassemblies Cautions There is a risk of explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions 15 VTrak E Class Product Manual Important Existing VTrak J330s J630s or J830s JBOD expansion units require two critical updates to support the VTrak E630f i and E830f i RAID subsystems Ifyou have SATA physical drives replace the existing AMUX adapters with the new SAS to SATA adapters available from PROMISE Technology at http www promise com e Download the latest firmware image file available from PROMISE support http www promise com support and flash your existing VTrak JBOD units Follow the instructions in Chapter 6 Maintenance on page 315 16 Chapter 2 Installation Mounting VTrak in a Rack Cautions e Do not install the VTrak unit into a rack without rails to support the subsystem e Do not lay one VTrak unit on top of another Mount each enclosure supported by its own set of rails e Only a qualified technician who is familiar with the i
10. 1 2 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI Targets and press Enter The list of iSCSI Targets displays Highlight Create New Target and press Enter Optional Highlight TargetAlias and type an alias into the field provided Highlight each item and press the Spacebar to toggle between Enable and Disable HeaderDigest Adds a header digest CRC e DataDigest Adds a data digest CRC e UniCHAPAuthen Enables uni directional peer CHAP authentication BiCHAPAuthen Enables bi directional local CHAP authentication Authentication requires a pre existing CHAP Highlight Save Settings and Continue and press Enter The Add Portals screen appears Highlight each portal that you want to assign to the new target and press the Spacebar to mark it When you have maked the portals you want highlight Save Settings and press Enter The new target appears in the list Note Header digest and data digest work best with initiators equipped with a TCP Offload Engine TOE Refer to your iSCSI HBA user manual for more information Making iSCSI Target Settings To make target settings 1 2 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI Targets and press Enter The list of iSCSI Targets displays Highlight the target you want to change and press Enter The target information screen displays Highlight iSCSI Target Settings and pr
11. Making SLP Settings To change SLP service settings 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the SLP service and click the Settings button 4 Choose a startup type e Automatic default Starts and runs with the subsystem e Manual You start the service when you need it 5 Click the Save button 6 Click the Confirm button Webserver Service Webserver service connects the WebPAM PROe interface to the RAID subsystem though your browser Stopping Webserver Service To stop the Webserver service 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the Webserver service and click the Stop button 126 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe 4 Click the Confirm button To start the Webserver service after stopping it 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the Webserver service and click the Start button Restarting Webserver Service 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the Webserver service and click the Restart button Making Webserver Settings To change Webserver service settings 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the Webserver service and click the Settings button 4 Make settings changes as required e Choose a startup type e Automatic default Starts and runs with the subsystem e Manual You start the service when you need it e
12. Model name of the UPS Battery Capacity Backup capacity expressed as a percentage Loading Ratio Actual output of UPS as a percentage of the rated output See the Note below Remaining Minutes Number of minutes the UPS is expected to power your system in the event of a power failure Note The maximum recommended Loading Ratio varies among models of UPS units The general range is 60 to 80 If the reported Loading Ratio exceeds the recommended value for your UPS unit e Have fewer subsystems or peripherals connected to this UPS unit e Add more UPS units or use a higher capacity UPS unit to protect your RAID systems 96 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Making UPS Settings These settings control how the VTrak subsystem detects the UPS unit and responds to data reported by the UPS unit To make UPS settings 1 2 3 4 Click the Device tab Click the UPS icon Click the UPS Settings button Perform the following actions as required e Verify the Current UPS Communication method See Note 1 e SNMP Network connection e Serial Serial connection e Unknown No connection e Choose a Detection Setting from the dropdown menu e Automatic Default If a UPS is detected when the subsystem boots the settings changes to Enable e Enable Monitors UPS Settings changes reports warnings and logs events e Disable Monitors UPS only e Type values into the T
13. Number of minutes the UPS is expected to power your system in the event of a power failure Loading Ratio Actual output of UPS as a percentage of the rated output See the Note below Temperature Reported temperature of the UPS unit 98 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Note The maximum recommended Loading Ratio varies among models of UPS units The general range is 60 to 80 If the reported Loading Ratio exceeds the recommended value for your UPS unit Have fewer subsystems or peripherals connected to this UPS unit Add more UPS units or use a higher capacity UPS unit to protect your RAID systems 99 VTrak E Class Product Manual Managing Network Connections Network Connections Management includes the following functions Making Virtual Management Port Settings page 100 e Making Maintenance Mode Settings page 100 Making Virtual Management Port Settings The VTrak subsystem has a virtual management port enabling you to log into a VTrak with dual controllers using one IP address Before you change settings please see About IP Addresses on page 45 You initially made these settings during subsystem setup You can change them later as required Caution Changing virtual management port settings can interrupt your WebPAM PROe connection and require you to log in again To make virtual management port settings 1 Click the Device tab 2 Click the Network Man
14. Subsystem is shut down or its network connection is lost See page 493 Figure 2 Tap a subsystem to go to the Summary screen Component Level Monitoring The Summary screen displays the status of all components in a VTrak subsystem One of these icons appears beside each component e Green check icon Component is OK Yellow amp icon Component is critical e Red X icon Component is offline Tap a component to go to the Configuration screen 495 VTrak E Class Product Manual Additional Actions To view a list of a each type of component tap the corresponding component icon at the top of the screen To view more information about a single component tap the component in the list To locate the component in the VTrak subsystem tap the Locate button beside that component The LEDs for that component blink for one minute See pages 377 through 379 Diagnosing a Subsystem To diagnose a problem on a VTrak subsystem Click the Home fal icon to go to the Home screen At the Home screen check the icon for each VTrak subsystem e Green check g icon All components are OK e Yellow v icon One or more components in Critical status Red J icon One or more components in Offline status No icon Subsystem is shut down or its network connection is lost Tap the VTrak subsystem with the Yellow w icon or Red g icon to go to the Summary screen On the Summary screen tap the
15. This action requires Administrator or Super User privileges To delete a disk array 1 Click the Storage tab 2 Click the Disk Array icon 3 Click the disk array you want then click the Delete button 4 In the Confirmation box type the word confirm in the field provided and click the Confirm button 156 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Making Disk Array Settings To make disk array settings 1 2 Click the Storage tab Click the Disk Array icon The list of disk arrays appears Click the disk array you want then click the Settings button Make settings changes as required e Enter change or delete the alias in the Alias field Maximum of 32 characters letters numbers space between characters and underline e Media Patrol Check to enable uncheck to disable on this array e PDM Check to enable uncheck to disable on this array Power Management Check to enable uncheck to disable on this array Click the Save button 157 VTrak E Class Product Manual Notes You can also enable or disable Media Patrol for the entire RAID system See Making Media Patrol Settings on page 118 e HDD Power Saving must be enabled on the RAID controller for the Power Management settings to be effective See Making Controller Settings on page 86 Power Management functions are limited to the features your HDDs actually support Locating a Disk Array
16. e Target ID ID number of the target logical drive where the CHAP is used N A means that no target is assigned Adding iSCSI CHAPs To add an iSCSI CHAP 1 OF Po GOD Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the CHAP tab Click the Create CHAP button Make your choices and inputs as required Enter a name in the Name field e Choose a CHAP type 201 VTrak E Class Product Manual 6 e Peer is one way or uni directional e Local is two way or bi directional e Enter a secret of 12 to 99 characters in the Secret field Enter the secret again in the Retype Secret field Click the Submit button The new CHAP is added to the list Making iSCSI CHAP Settings When you change CHAP settings you must change the secret You cannot change the type peer or local To make iSCSI CHAP settings 1 1 OOS 6 Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the CHAP tab Click the CHAP you want then click the Settings button Make settings changes are required e Enter a name in the Name field e Enter the current secret in the Current Secret field e Enter a new secret of 12 or more characters in the Secret field e Enter the new secret again in the Retype Secret field Click the Submit button Deleting iSCSI CHAPs To delete an iSCSI CHAP 1 ORs Ge 9 Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the CHAP tab Click the C
17. Click the Spare Drive icon Click the spare drive you want then click the Settings button For each of the following items accept the default or change the settings as required Inthe Revertible dropdown menu choose Yes or No e Check the Media Patrol box to enable Media Patrol on this spare drive Uncheck to disable e Inthe Spare Type dropdown menu choose Global or Dedicated e Ifyou use chose a Dedicated spare check the box beside the disk array to which this spare drive is assigned Click the Save button Locating a Spare Drive Spare drives are located the same as individual physical drives To locate a spare drive 1 2 Click the Storage tab Click the Spare Drive icon The list of spare drives appears In the spare drive list identify the physical drive ID number Click the Device tab Click the Physical Drive icon The list of physical drives appears 174 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe 6 Click the physical drive with the matching ID number and click the Locate button The drive carrier LED blinks for one minute Green LEDs flash Running Spare Check Spare Check verifies the status of your spare drives To run spare check 1 2 Click the Storage tab Click the Spare Drive icon The list of spare drives appears Click the spare drive you want then click the Spare Check button Click the Confirm button After the Spare Check
18. Enable LUN Affinity See Making Controller Settings on page 86 or page 216 On subsystems with two RAID controllers when Cache Mirroring is disabled LUN Affinity is enabled automatically ALUA VTrak supports Asymmetric Logical Unit Access ALUA on Linux OSes ALUA is a multhipathing tool It enables an initiator your host PC or server to discover target port groups that provide a common failover failoack behavior for your LUNs ALUA enables the host to see which paths are in an optimal state and which are not To use ALUA you must e Have two RAID controllers in the subsystem e Set the redundancy type to Active Active See Making Subsystem Settings on page 77 or page 211 e Enable LUN Affinity and ALUA See Making Controller Settings on page 86 or page 216 For more information see Appendix C Multipathing on Linux on page 471 361 VTrak E Class Product Manual Cache Policy As it is used with VTrak the term cache refers to any of several kinds of high speed volatile memory that hold data moving from your computer to the physical drives or vice versa Cache is important because it can read and write data much faster than a physical drive There are read caches which hold data as it is read from a physical drive and write caches which hold data as it is written to a physical drive In order to tune the cache for best performance in different applications user adjustable settings are
19. From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI Portals and press Enter The list of portals displays Highlight the portal you want to change and press Enter The portal information screen displays Highlight iSCSI Portal Settings and press Enter Make changes as needed e DHCP Enabled or disabled DHCP is currently supported only for IPv4 e ProtocolFamily Pv4 or IPv6 e PrimarylP Primary IP address of this portal e PrimarylPMask Subnet mask of this portal e VlanTag VLAN tag number 0 to 4094 for portals associated with a VLAN e Trunkld Trunk ID number 1 to 8 for portals associated with a trunk Highlight Save Settings and press Enter Press Y to acknowledge possible interruption of iSCSI services Press Y again to confirm the changes Highlight Return to Previous Menu and press Enter to return to the portal list Deleting iSCSI Portals To delete an iSCSI portal 1 2 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI Portals and press Enter The list of iSCSI portals displays Highlight the portal you want to delete and press the Spacebar to mark it Highlight Delete Marked Targets and press Enter Press Y to confirm deletion 265 VTrak E Class Product Manual 6 Press Y again to acknowledge possible interruption of iSCSI services The portal is removed from the list Viewing a List of iSCSI Sessions To view
20. Highlight Software Management and press Enter Highlight Netsend and press Enter Highlight Message Recipients and press Enter Highlight the recipient you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark it The mark is an asterisk to the left of the listing 6 Highlight Delete Marked Entries and press Enter CoP Oh 302 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Flashing through TFTP Use this function to flash update the firmware on the VTrak See page 317 for the procedure 303 VTrak E Class Product Manual Viewing Flash Image Information Flash image information refers to the package of firmware components running on your VTrak controller or controllers To view flash image information 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter 2 Highlight Flash Image Version Info and press Enter The flash image information displays on the screen Enclosure Number 1 one is the Head Unit Other numbers are cascaded or expanded subsystems Running Image Info Firmware currently running on the controllers Flashed Image Info Firmware flashed to memory Image Type A specific component Controller ID 1 or 2 Version number Build date Flash installation date If the Running and Flashed Images do not match the VTrak has not restarted since the firmware was last updated Restart the VTrak to run the Flashed firmware package See Restarting the Subsystem
21. Making iSCSI Port Settings To make port settings 1 2 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI Ports and press Enter The list of ports appears with controller and port numbers Highlight the port you want to change and press Enter The target port information screen displays Highlight iSCSI Port Settings and press Enter Highlight each item and press the Spacebar to toggle between Enable and Disable as needed e PortEnable Enables and disables the iSCSI port JumboFrame Enables and disables jumbo frame support Highlight Save Settings and press Enter Press Y to acknowledge possible interruption of iSCSI services 262 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU 8 9 Press Y again to confirm the changes Highlight Return to Previous Menu and press Enter to return to the target port information screen Viewing a List of iSCSI Portals A portal is the interface between an iSCSI port and the iSCSI network To view a list of iSCSI portals From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI Portals and press Enter The list of iSCSI Portals displays 1 2 Portalld Portal number Starts at 0 Ctrlld RAID controller ID 1 or 2 Portld Physical port on the RAID controller 1 to 4 Trunkld Trunk ID 1 to 8 Refers to portals associated with a trunk link aggregation N A means this portal is not assciated with a trunk
22. No action is required Logical drive has been placed online Possible data loss Logical drive has been set to critical Logical drive has been set to degrade Check the state of the physical drives replace any bad drives Rebuild logical drive Rebuild marks the logical drive synchronized upon rebuild completion Logical drive settings has been changed through a user command One of the error tables of a logical drive has been cleared by the user Logical drive axle has been placed online No action is required Media Patrol Media patrol is started Media patrol is in progress Media patrol is completed No action is required Media patrol is paused Resume Media Patrol when ready Media patrol is resumed No action is required Media patrol is stopped If this action was not intentional check the logical drive s status Media patrol is aborted due to an internal error Reduce system load on the VTrak Media patrol is queued Media patrol is stopped internally No action is required Online Capacity Expansion Online capacity expansion has started Online capacity expansion has completed No action is required Online capacity expansion has paused Resume OCE when ready 419 VTrak E Class Product Manual Reported Event Corrective Action Online capacity expansion has resumed No act
23. Or click the lt lt button to assign all logical drives to an initiator or port The logical drive moves to the Initiator Port or Target list with a default LUN of 0 Type the LUN you want to assign to this initiator from 0 to 255 Each logical drive can have only one unique LUN Click the Next button The final LUN Mapping screen appears showing the initiator or port and LUN map Click the Submit button The new LUN map is created 181 VTrak E Class Product Manual Editing a LUN Map Editing a LUN map is the action of assigning a logical drive or LUN to an initiator By changing the assignment you change the initiator s access To edit a LUN map 1 2 7 Click the Storage tab Click the LUN Mapping amp Masking icon The list of LUN maps appears Click the LUN map you want then click the Setting button Beside Active LUN Mapping Type e FC subsystems choose the Initiator or Port option iSCSI subsystems choose the Initiator or Target option If you change the LUN Mapping Type in the popup message type confirm and click the Confirm button Drag a logical drive from the Logical Drive list and drop it onto the Initiator list Click the Next button The LUN Mapping screen shows the edited LUN map Click the Submit button Deleting a LUN Map Deleting a LUN map prevents the initiator from accessing the LUN while LUN masking is enabled To delete a LUN map 1 2 Click
24. Telnet Connection page 309 Starting up the VTrak SSH Connection page 309 Starting up the VTrak Serial Connection page 310 Starting up the VTrak Telnet Connection Important If you have a JBOD Expansion always power on the JBOD subsystems first Then power on the RAID subsystem To start the RAID subsystem 1 2 3 4 Manually turn on the power supply switches on the back of the subsystem Wait about two minutes Establish a Telnet connection to the VTrak See Making a Telnet Connection on page 207 If you cannot log in wait 30 seconds and try again Type menu and press Enter to open the CLU Starting up the VTrak SSH Connection Important If you have a JBOD Expansion always power on the JBOD subsystems first Then power on the RAID subsystem To start the RAID subsystem 1 2 3 Manually turn on the power supply switches on the back of the subsystem Wait about two minutes Establish a SSH connection to the VTrak See Making a SSH Connection on page 207 If you cannot log in wait 30 seconds and try again Type menu and press Enter to open the CLU 309 VTrak E Class Product Manual Starting up the VTrak Serial Connection Important If you have a JBOD Expansion always power on the JBOD subsystems first Then power on the RAID subsystem To start the RAID subsystem 1 Manually turn on the power supply switches on the back of the subsys
25. Unconfigured or unused capacity on the physical drives e Media Patrol Enabled or disabled on this array e No of Logical Drives The number of logical drives on this array Viewing Disk Array Information To view disk array information 1 Click the Storage tab 2 Click the Disk Array icon 148 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe The list of disk arrays appears Click the disk array you want then click the View button Array information displays including e ID DAO DA1 DA2 etc e Alias If assigned e Operational Status OK is normal e Media Patrol Enabled or disabled on this array e PDM Enabled or disabled on this array e Total Capacity Data capacity of the array e Configurable Capacity Maximum usable capacity of the array e Free Capacity Unconfigured or unused capacity on the physical drives Number of Physical Drives The number of physical drives in this array Number of Logical Drives The number of logical drives on this array e Max Contiguous Free Capacity Unconfigured or unused capacity in contiguous sectors on the physical drives e Available RAID Levels RAID levels you can specify on this array Disk Array Operational Status OK This is the normal state of a logical drive When a logical drive is Functional it is ready for immediate use For RAID Levels other than RAID 0 Striping the logical drive has full redundancy Synchronizing Th
26. 38 iSCSI cont CHAPs add 201 269 delete 202 270 list 201 268 settings 202 269 data connections 35 37 global settings 189 258 initiator add 178 list 177 278 iSNS information 200 268 settings 201 268 NIC 35 37 ping a server 202 270 portals add 194 264 delete 195 265 information 193 263 list 192 263 settings 194 265 ports information 196 262 list 195 261 settings 196 262 sessions delete 200 266 information 199 267 list 198 266 settings 200 266 targets 278 add 190 259 delete 191 261 information 189 258 list 189 258 settings 191 260 Index iSCSI cont trunks add 197 271 delete 198 272 list 197 270 settings 198 271 unassign portal from target 192 261 ISNS iSCSI information 200 268 settings 201 268 J JBOD expansion 224 JBOD reported events 418 L LDAP information 108 290 privileges 292 settings 291 testing 111 293 LDAP role maps add 111 293 delete 113 294 list 111 293 settings 112 294 LED controller 41 377 dirty cache 379 398 disk status 43 378 FRU status 41 377 379 heartbeat 41 377 logical drive 41 377 Management Port 406 power 41 377 power activity 43 378 red or amber 377 locate controller 88 217 disk array 158 238 enclosure 93 223 logical drive 167 246 physical drive 228 power supply 219 221 spare drive 174 lock releasing 78 212 renewing 77 212 setting 77 212 status 77 212 subsystem 77 212 log in CLI 44 39
27. Choose a trap filter event severity level See the table on the next page Click the Add button 7 Click the Confirm button PORON 130 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Event Severity Levels Level Description Fatal Non recoverable error or failure has occurred Critical Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are serious Major Action is needed now Minor Action is needed but the condition is not a serious at this time Warning User can decide whether or not action is required Information Information only no action is required Deleting an SNMP Trap Sink To delete a trap sink 1 OF eR GO 6 7 Click the Administration tab Click the Services icon Click the SNMP service and click the Settings button In the Trap Sink list and click the Trap Sink you want to delete Click the Trash icon The trap sink is deleted Click the Save button Click the Confirm button CIM Service The Common Information Model CIM service provides a database for information about computer systems and network devices Stopping CIM Service To stop the CIM service Po Ne Click the Administration tab Click the Services icon Click the CIM service and click the Stop button Click the Confirm button To start the CIM service after stopping it 1 2 3 Click the Administration tab Click the Services icon Click the CIM service and click
28. Disk Array and Logical Drive are marked Critical with a yellow icon RAID 6 and 60 logical drives are marked 400 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Degraded with a yellow icon when ONE physical drive is offline e Critical with a yellow icon when TWO physical drives are offline RAID 0 logical drives show Offline status and a red X icon If there is no spare drive or unconfigured drive in the RAID system you must provide the replacement drive See Installing Physical Drives on page 21 Administration tab Depending on your settings and availability of a replacement drive your system automatically rebuilds the degraded disk array See Rebuilding a Disk Array on page 402 The system sends an Email message about the incident to subscribing users depending on user settings See Setting User Event Subscriptions on page 103 Disk Array Offline Logical Drive Offline Disk arrays are made up of physical drives Logical drives are created on the disk array When a disk array and its logical drives go Offline the data stored in the logical drives is no longer accessible RAID 0 logical drives go Offline when ONE physical drive is removed or fails RAID 1 1E 5 10 and 50 logical drives go Offline when TWO physical drives are removed or fail RAID 6 and 60 logical drives go Offline when THREE physical drives are removed or fail WebPAM PROe reports these conditions in the following places
29. If you are creating a PHY or VLAN association choose e Controller ID 1 or 2 from the dropdown menu Choose a Port ID 1 to 4 from the dropdown menu If you are creating a Trunk association choose a Trunk ID 1 to 8 from the dropdown menu Type the IP address of the portal in the field provided Type the subnet mask of the portal in the field provided If you are creating a VLAN association enter a VLAN tag 0 to 4094 in the field provided From the IP Type dropdown menu choose IPv4 or IPv6 DHCP is currently supported only for IPv4 Click the Submit button The new portal is added to the list To assign a portal to a target see Assigning a Portal to an iSCSI Target on page 159 Making iSCSI Portal Settings To make iSCSI portal settings Click the Device tab 1 194 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe OF BPN 6 Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Portal tab Click the portal you want then click the Settings button Make settings changes as needed e Ifyou have a Trunk association choose a Trunk ID 1 to 8 from the dropdown menu Type the IP address of the portal in the field provided e Type the subnet mask of the portal in the field provided e Ifyou have a VLAN association enter a VLAN tag 0 to 4094 in the field provided e From the IP Type dropdown menu choose IPv4 or IPv6 DHCP is currently supported only for IPv4 Click the Submit button Deleti
30. Migration on page 120 RAID Levels on page 333 and RAID Level Migration on page 347 Migrating a Logical Drive To migrate a logical drive 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Background Activities icon The list of background activities appears 3 Mouse over Migrate and click the Start button 4 Inthe Select Disk Array dropdown menu choose the source disk array 5 Inthe Select Physical Drives diagram click the drives to add them to your array The ID numbers of the chosen drives appear in the field below the diagram 6 Click the Next button 7 Check the box next to the logical drive you want to modify 8 From the dropdown menu choose a target RAID level The choice of RAID levels depends the number of physical drives in the disk array See the Note below 169 VTrak E Class Product Manual 9 Inthe Capacity field accept the current capacity Or check the Expand Capacity box and enter a greater capacity and size in MB GB or TB If there is capacity remaining you can create an additional logical drive 10 Click the Next button The logical drive ID numbers with the original and target RAID levels and Capacities are shown 11 To accept the proposed target values click the Confirm button Note When you add physical drives to a RAID 10 array it becomes a RAID 1E array by default If you are adding an even number of physical drives to a RAID 10 array and you want the target a
31. NVRAM Events A list of and information about the most important events over multiple subsystem startups NVRAM events are stored in non volatile memory Event Severity Levels Level Description Fatal Non recoverable error or failure has occurred Critical Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are serious Major Action is needed now Minor Action is needed but the condition is not a serious at this time Warning User can decide whether or not action is required Information Information only no action is required Viewing Runtime Events To display Runtime Events 1 2 Click the Administration tab Click the Events icon The log of Runtime Events appears Events are added to the top of the list Each item includes Index number Begins with 0 at system startup e Device Disk Array Logical Drive Physical Drive by its ID number e Event ID Hexadecimal code for the specific event e Severity See the Table above 135 VTrak E Class Product Manual 3 e Timestamp Date and time the event happened e Description A description of the event in plain language Press the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the log Saving Runtime Events This feature saves a plain text file of runtime events to your host PC or server using your browser To save the Runtime Events log 1 2 3 4 Click the Administration tab Clic
32. Press Y again to acknowledge possible interruption of iSCSI services The target is removed from the list Viewing a List of iSCSI Ports An iSCSI port is the physical iSCSI connection on the VTrak There are four iSCSI ports on each RAID controller for a total of eight per subsystem To view a list of iSCSI ports 261 VTrak E Class Product Manual 1 2 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI Ports and press Enter The list of ports appears with controller and port numbers Viewing iSCSI Port Information To view information for an iSCSI target port 1 2 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI Ports and press Enter The list of ports appears with controller and port numbers Highlight the port you want to see and press Enter The target port information screen displays Information includes e Ctrlid Controller ID 1 or 2 e PortStatus Port status enabled or disabled JumboFrame Jumbo frames enabled or disabled e LinkStatus Link status up or down Active or Inactive MACAddress MAC address of the target port e MaxSupportedSpeed Maximum speed supported 1 Gb s e CurrentSpeed Current or actual speed of the target port e RelativePortals The portals corresponding to this target port Items marked with an asterisk are adjustable under Making iSCSI Port Settings below
33. Session Time Out Default is 24 minutes 5 Click the Save button 6 Click the Confirm button Telnet Service Telnet service enables you to access the RAID subsystem s Command Line Interface CLI through a network connection Stopping Telnet Service To stop the Telnet service 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the Telnet service and click the Stop button 4 Click the Confirm button To start the Telnet service after stopping it 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 127 VTrak E Class Product Manual 3 Click the Telnet service and click the Start button Restarting Telnet Service To restart the Telnet service 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the Telnet service and click the Restart button Making Telnet Settings To change Telnet service settings 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the Telnet service and click the Settings button 4 Make settings changes as required e Choose a startup type e Automatic default Starts and runs with the subsystem e Manual You start the service when you need it e Port number Default is 2300 Max Number of Concurrent Connections Default is 4 Maximum number is 4 Session Time Out Default is 24 minutes 5 Click the Save button 6 Click the Confirm button SSH Service Secure Shell SSH service en
34. Subsystem Management includes the following functions Making Subsystem Settings page 211 Running Media Patrol page 211 Locking or Unlocking the Subsystem page 212 Setting Subsystem Date and Time page 212 Making NTP Settings page 213 Synchronizing with a NTP Server page 214 Making Subsystem Settings An alias is optional To set an Alias for this subsystem 1 2 3 4 From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter Highlight Subsystem Settings and press Enter Make changes as required e Type and alias into the Alias field Maximum of 48 characters Use letters numbers space between words and underscore e Highlight Redundancy Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Active Active and Active Standby Active Active Both RAID controllers are active and can share the load Active Standby One RAID controller is in standby mode and goes active if the other fails e Highlight Cache Mirroring and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Press Control A to save your settings Running Media Patrol Media Patrol is a routine maintenance procedure that checks the magnetic media on each disk drive Media Patrol checks all physical drives assigned to disk arrays and spare drives It does not check unconfigured drives To start stop pause or resume Media Patrol 1 2 3 4 From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter Highligh
35. The SSH default port number is 22 207 VTrak E Class Product Manual 3 Press Enter once to launch the CLI Linux To start the Linux SSH program 1 Click the terminal icon 2 Type ssh 192 168 1 56 22 and press Enter The IP address above is only an example Use the Management port IP address of your VTrak The SSH default port number is 22 3 Press Enter once to launch the CLI Logging Into the CLI 1 Atthe Login prompt type the user name and press Enter The default user name is administrator 2 Atthe Password prompt type the password and press Enter The default password is password The CLI screen appears 3 Atthe administrator cli gt prompt type menu and press Enter The CLU Main Menu appears Figure 3 CLU main menu Hox File Edit View Call Transfer Help CLU Main Menu Subsystem Management Physical Drive Management Disk Array Management Spare Drive Management Logical Drive Management Network Management Fibre Channel Management Background Activities Event Viewer Additional Info and Management Buzzer Return to CLI ARROWS TAB Navigate ENTER Selec eturn CTRL E Help Connected 7 12 57 ANSIW 1152008 N 1 SCROLL caps uum Capture 208 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Quick Setup A sequence of four steps to setup system date and time Management port and RAID configuration See Setting up VTrak with the CLU on page 55 Subsystem M
36. Viewing Enclosure Information To view enclosure information 1 Click the Device tab 2 Click the Component List icon 3 Click the Enclosure and click the View button Enclosure information includes e Enclosure ID e Enclosure Type e Enclosure Warning Temperature Threshold e Enclosure Critical Temperature Threshold e Controller Warning Temperature Threshold e Controller Critical Temperature Threshold e Max Number of Controllers e Max Number of Physical Drive Slots e Max Number of Fans e Max Number of Blowers e Max Number of Temperature Sensors e Max Number of Power Supply Units e Max Number of Batteries e Max Number of Voltage Sensors For information on Enclosure problems see Diagnosing an Enclosure Problem on page 391 Making Enclosure Settings To make Enclosure settings 1 Click the Device tab 2 Click the Component List icon 3 Click the Enclosure and click the Settings button 93 VTrak E Class Product Manual 5 Enclosure settings include Enclosure Warning Temperature Threshold e Enclosure Critical Temperature Threshold e Controller Warning Temperature Threshold e Controller Critical Temperature Threshold In the field provided type the temperature in degrees C for each threshold value Click the Save button Viewing FRU VPD Information FRU VPD refers to Vital Product Data VPD information about Field Replaceable Units FRU in the enclosure The number and type
37. Viewing Physical Drive Statistics To view the statistics for the selected physical drive 1 2 3 From the Main Menu highlight Physical Drive Management and press Enter Highlight the physical drive you want and press Enter Highlight Physical Drive Statistics and press Enter Clearing Statistics To clear physical drive statistics see Clearing Statistics on page 305 226 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Setting an Alias An alias is optional To set an Alias for a physical drive 1 4 From the Main Menu highlight Physical Drive Management and press Enter Highlight the physical drive you want and press Enter Type an alias into the field provided Maximum of 32 characters Use letters numbers space between words and underscore Press Control A to save your settings Clearing Stale and PFA Conditions The Clear Stale and Clear PFA functions only appear when those conditions exist on the physical drive To clear a Stale or PFA condition on a physical drive 1 From the Main Menu highlight Physical Drive Management and press Enter Highlight the physical drive you want and press Enter Highlight Clear Stale or Clear PFA and press Enter If a physical drive is still online and shows a PFA error but Clear PFA does not appear use PDM to copy the data to a new physical drive See Running PDM on a Disk Array on page 237 If a physical drive is offline and shows a PFA er
38. Write Cache Enabled or disabled e Write Cache Support Yes or No Enable Read Look Ahead Support Yes or No e Read Look Ahead Cache Enabled or disabled Command Queuing Enabled or disabled Command Queuing Support Yes or No WWN Worldwide Number e Port 1 Negotiated Physical Drive Speed e Port 1 SAS Address e Port 2 Negotiated Physical Drive Speed e Port 2 SAS Address e Drive Temperature in C e Drive Reference Temperature in C e Power Saving Level Enabled or disabled e Medium Error Threshold e SAS SATA Bridge Firmware Version e SAS SATA Bridge Boot Loader Version Making Global Physical Drive Settings To make global physical drive settings 1 2 3 4 Click the Device tab Click the Physical Drive icon Click the Global Physical Drive Settings button Check the boxes to enable uncheck to disable For SATA drives e Enable Write Cache e Enable Read Look Ahead Cache Enable Command Queuing For SAS drives e Enable Write Cache e Enable Read Look Ahead Cache 143 VTrak E Class Product Manual 5 Enable Read Cache Click the Save button Making Individual Physical Drive Settings To make individual physical drive settings 1 2 3 4 6 Click the Device tab Click the Physical Drive icon Click the physical drive you want then click the Settings button On the Settings tab e Enter change or delete the alias in the Alias field
39. e Highlight Name and press the backspace key to erase the current value then type the new value e Highlight New Secret and type a secret of 12 to 99 characters e Highlight Retype New Secret and type the secret again to verify Highlight Save CHAP Record and press Enter 269 VTrak E Class Product Manual The edited CHAP appears in the list Deleting iSCSI CHAPs To delete an iSCSI CHAP 1 Oh GS From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI CHAPs and press Enter Highlight the CHAP you want to delete and press Enter to mark it Highlight Delete Marked Entries and press Enter Press Y to confirm the deletion Pinging a Host or Server on the iSCSI Network This function enables you to ping other network nodes through any one of the VTrak s iSCSI ports To ping a host or server on the network 1 2 3 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight Ping and press Enter Enter information as required e Highlight IP address and type the IP address you want to ping e Highlight Packet Count and enter the number of packets you want to send e Highlight Ping Through Controller ID and choose a controller 1 or 2 e Highlight Ping Through Port ID and choose a port number 1 to 4 To change a value highlight the item press Backspace to delete the current value and type a new value Highlight Ping and press Enter The results of the ping are d
40. 00 01 55 30 65 E9 DNS 0 0 0 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 Ctrlld 2 Port 1 ProtocolFamily IPv6 Disabled DHCP Disabled IP 2001 3 PMask ffff MAC 00 01 55 30 65 D7 DNS Gateway 52 Chapter 3 Setup 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 above but change c 1 controller 1 to c 2 controller 2 Making Maintenance Mode Settings Manually under IPv6 You make these settings for one controller at a time To make maintenance mode settings 1 At the command prompt type net a enable f ipv6 m c 1 and press Enter to enable IPv6 After a moment the comand prompt reappears indicating that your setting was successful administrator cli gt At the command prompt type net a mod m c 1 s followed by e primaryip and the IP address primaryipmask and the subnet mask e primarydns and the DNS server IP address e gateway and the Gateway server IP address and press Enter Example administrator cli gt iscsi a mod t portal s primaryip 2001 0db8 85a3 0000 0000 8a2e 0370 7336 primaryipmask 2001 0db8 fedc ba98 7654 3210 0246 8acf primarydns 2001 0db8 85a3 0000 0000 8a2e 0370 7001 gateway 2001 0db8 85a3 0000 0000 8a2e 0370 7002 After a moment the comand prompt reappears indicating that your setting was successful administrator cli gt To verify the settings at the command prompt type net a list m and press Enter The following information displays administrator
41. 2 Click the Image Version icon 3 Click the Enclosure you want to see and click the triangular button Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe RAID subsystems have the following components in their flash image Kernel BIOS Firmware 6G Expander Software e System Libraries Ramdisk e Applications SEP Firmware e Mount Scripts OEM Customization PLX EEPROM Image Running The version that is currently running on the subsystem or expansion unit Flashed This version was updated but does not run until the subsystem restarts See Updating Firmware on a RAID Subsystem on page 89 JBOD expansion units have only one component in their flash image SEP firmware It only appears as running Updating Firmware on a RAID Subsystem Use this function to flash update the firmware on the VTrak See page 315 for the procedure Viewing Battery Information Batteries maintain power to the controller cache in the event of a power failure thus protecting any data that has not been written to a physical drive To view battery information Click the Device tab Click the Component List icon Click the battery you want then click the View button Battery information includes 1 2 3 Battery ID Operational status Fully charged recondition means a reconditioning is in process Battery chemistry LION etc Remaining capacity Battery capacity as a percentage Battery cell type Number of cel
42. 272 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Managing Background Activity Background activity refers to any of several functions that take place in the background while normal operation of the VTrak continues Background activities work in conjunction with disk arrays and logical drives See Managing Disk Arrays on page 229 and Managing Logical Drives on page 242 for more information about how and when to use background activities Background Activity Management includes the following functions Viewing Current Background Activities page 273 Making Background Activity Settings page 273 Viewing Current Background Activities From the Main Menu highlight Background Activities and press Enter A count of current background activities appears including Rebuild PDM Predictive Data Migration Synchronization Redundancy Check Migration Transition Initialization Media Patrol Making Background Activity Settings 1 2 3 From the Main Menu highlight Background Activities and press Enter Highlight Background Activity Settings and press Enter Highlight following and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and Disabled e Media Patrol Checks the magnetic media on physical drives e Auto Rebuild When enabled and no spare drive is available the disk array begins to rebuild as soon as you replace the failed physical drive with an unconfigured physical drive of equal or greater size Highl
43. 383 VTrak E Class Product Manual Restore Settings CTRL R Return to Previous Menu From this screen e Highlight Physical Drives in the Array and press Enter to identify the failed disk drive e Highlight Rebuild and press Enter to rebuild the array after you replace the failed disk drive For more information see Enclosure Problems on page 391 384 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting WebPAM PROe Reports a Problem WebPAM PROe reports these conditions in the header and all four tabs Header The Header displays popup messages per your configuration Dashboard Tab e System Status Za System Status This system has errors Controller Voltage Temperature Power Supply Unit Yellow and red X icons identify components that need attention Cooling Unit Disk Array a a l Logical Drive Physical Drive E Spare Drive cooe ccc Ssc S 385 VTrak E Class Product Manual Event Information Event Information io a Device Severity Time Description LD0 Info Jun 22 2011 12 29 01 Logical drive has been deleted PSU 1 Enc 1 info Jun 22 2011 12 29 01 PSU temperature returned to normal PSU 1 Enc 1 aa Jun 22 2011 12 25 06 PSU temperature is above the warning threshold PSU 1 Enc 1 Critical Jun 22 2011 12 22 06 PSU temperature is above the critical threshold Ctrl 1 Info Jun 22 2011 11 17 25 The controller parameter s are changed by user PD 2 Major Jun 21 201
44. 5 0 2 0 X30PERF1 QLogic Fibre Channel Adapter 4 0 2 0 QLogic Fibre Channel Adapter 6 0 3 0 Operating System Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise Version 6 1 7600 N A Manufacturer Microsoft Corporation En z E Promise VTrak E630 Mutt Path Disk Device LUNO 200 TB Fail Over Quitting PerfectPath View To quit the PerfectPath View application do one of the following actions e From the System menu choose Exit e Click the Close X icon on the PerfectPath View window 453 VTrak E Class Product Manual Monitoring Your LUNs and Paths Monitoring your LUNs and Paths includes these functions e Viewing LUN Properties page 454 e Viewing Path Properties page 455 e Viewing LUN Performance Statistics page 456 e Viewing Path Performance Statistics page 457 e Viewing Events page 459 e Clearing Path Statistics page 459 Viewing LUN Properties To view a list of all LUNs Click a Server amp in Tree View 2 Click the Properties tab The Properties tab reports e System Name OS type and version LUNs Name size serial number and load balance policy Properties Perfomance Events X30PERF1 Operating Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise Version 2 6 1 7600 N A Manufacturer Microsoft Corporation Ki m LUN ID Size Load Balance Pol 5 Promise VTrak E630 Mutti Path Disk Device LUNO 2 00 TB Fail Over 454 Monitoring
45. Click the LUN Mapping amp Masking icon Check the box to enable LUN Masking Or uncheck the box to disable LUN Masking LUN Masking starts or stops as soon as you make your setting 183 VTrak E Class Product Manual Managing Fibre Channel Connections Fibre Channel management includes Viewing FC Node Information below Viewing FC Port Information page 184 Making FC Port Settings page 185 Viewing FC Port Statistics page 186 Viewing a List of FC Initiators on the Fabric page 186 Viewing a List of FC Logged in Devices page 186 Viewing a List of FC SFPs page 186 Also see Adding an FC Initiator on page 177 and Deleting an FC Initiator on page 178 Viewing FC Node Information To view Fibre Channel node information 1 2 3 Click the Device tab Click the FC Management icon Click the Node tab Node information includes e Worldwide Node Number WWNN e Maximum Frame Size e Supported FC Class e Supported speeds Viewing FC Port Information To view Fibre Channel port information 1 2 3 4 Click the Device tab Click the FC Management icon Click the Port tab Mouse over an FC port to access and click the View button Port information includes FC Port ID number e Controller ID number e Identifier hexadecimal e Link status Hard ALPA 184 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe e Worldwide Port Number WWPN Making FC Port Settings
46. Dashboard tab Ared X icon appears beside the disk arrays logical drives and physical drives under System Status Major event for the logical drive under Event Information Warning event for the physical drive under Event Information Device tab On Front View and Physical Drive View physical drives are shown Dead Offline or Missing Storage tab Disk array and logical drives are marked with a red X icon Administration tab 401 VTrak E Class Product Manual Under Background Activities no Rebuild takes place See Repairing below The system sends an Email message about the incident to subscribing users depending on user settings See Setting User Event Subscriptions on page 103 Repairing an Offline Disk Array or Logical Drive RAID 1 1E 5 6 10 50 and 60 Logical Drives If a fault tolerant logical drive RAID 1 1E 5 6 10 50 and 60 goes Offline it may be possible to recover your data Warning Take no further corrective action until you have consulted with Technical Support See page 435 RAID 0 Logical Drives If a logical drive based on a non fault tolerant disk array RAID 0 goes offline all of the data on the logical drive is lost To recreate your logical drive 1 5 Identify the failed physical drive See Locating a Physical Drive on page 146 Replace the failed drive See Installing Physical Drives on page 21 If the disk array had more than one physi
47. Model WWN World Wide Number Serial number Part number Revision number Number of JBOD expansion units connected Maximum number of JBOD expansion units supported Number of controllers present Maximum number of controllers supported Redundancy status Redundancy type System date and time 76 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Making Subsystem Settings To make subsystem settings 1 2 3 4 5 Click the Administration tab Click the Subsystem Information icon Click the Settings button Make changes as required Enter an alias or change the existing alias in the field provided e Choose a redundancy type from the dropdown menu The choices are Active Active and Active Standby e Check the box to enable Cache Mirroring Click the Save button Locking or Unlocking the Subsystem The lock prevents other sessions including sessions with the same user from making a configuration change to the controller until the lock expires or a forced unlock is done When the user who locked the controller logs out the lock is automatically released Setting the Lock To set the lock 1 2 3 4 5 Click the Administration tab Click the Subsystem Information icon Click the Lock Unlock button In the Lock Time field type a lock time in minutes 1440 minutes 24 hours Click the Lock button Resetting the Lock To reset the lock with a new time 1 2 3 4 Click the Administrat
48. The Subsystem is stopped Subsystem parameter s are changed by user System is set to Redundant mode No action is required System is set to Critical mode Check controller operation System is set to Non Redundant mode If your system has two controllers check controller operation 426 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Reported Event Corrective Action Transition Transition is started Transition is completed No action is required Transition is paused Resume transition when ready Transition is resumed No action is required Transition is stopped If this action was not intentional check the disk array s status Transition was switched to rebuild Replace the dead physical drive or reinstall the missing drive Unknown Unknown priority reason is detected If this message appears repeatedly contact Tech Support Zoning Zoning permission settings with the expander has been reset to defaults Zoning expander has been rebooted No action is required Zoning permission settings with the expander different than expected Settings have been updated correctly No action is required 427 VTrak E Class Product Manual 428 Chapter 9 Support This chapter contains the following topics Frequently Asked Questions below Contacting Technical Support page 435 Limited Warranty page 44
49. Then do the following actions 1 Change your terminal emulation program settings to match the following specifications e Bits per second 115200 e Data bits 8 e Parity None e Stop bits 1 Flow control none Start your PC s terminal VT100 or ANSI emulation program 206 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU 3 Press Enter once to launch the CLI Making a Telnet Connection A Telnet connection requires a network connection between the Host PC and the Management Ethernet port on the VTrak controller Figure 2 Management port on the RAID controller Management port To start the telnet program 1 Go to the command line prompt Windows or click the terminal icon Linux 2 Type telnet 192 168 1 56 2300 and press Enter The IP address above is only an example Use the Management port IP address of your VTrak The Telnet default port number is 2300 3 Press Enter once to launch the CLI Making a SSH Connection A Secure Shell SSH connection requires a network connection between the Host PC and the Management Ethernet port on the VTrak controller See above Figure 2 Windows PCs require you to install a SSH application on the PC Windows To start the Windows SSH program 1 Open the SSH application from the Start menu 2 Enter the IP address and SSH port number of the VTrak in the fields provided
50. Wait no less than two minutes 2 Click Logout in the WebPAM PROe Header then log in again If you cannot log in wait 30 seconds and try again 3 In your browser click Logout in the WebPAM PROe Header then log in again If you cannot log in immediately wait 30 seconds and try again 316 Chapter 6 Maintenance Updating with the CLU Download the latest firmware image file from PROMISE support http www promise com support and save it to your Host PC or TFTP server Important Verify that no background activities are running on the RAID subsystem To update the firmware on the RAID subsystem and JBOD expansion units 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight Flash through TFTP and press Enter Highlight TFTP Server and type the IP address of your TFTP server in the field provided Highlight Port Number and press the backspace key to erase the current value then type the new value 69 is the default A list of the current users appears Highlight File Name and type the file name of the firmware image file in the field provided Highlight Flash Method and press the spacebar to toggle between e Disruptive Updates the RAID controllers and I O modules simultaneously I O operations stop during the firmware update e Non Disruptive NDIU Updates the RAID controllers and I O modules one at a time enabling I O operations continue during the firmwa
51. Warning User can decide whether or not action is required Information Information only no action is required Deleting a Trap Sink To delete a trap sink 1 OV PL ON 6 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight Software Management and press Enter Highlight SNMP and press Enter Highlight Trap Sinks and press Enter Highlight the trap sink you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark it The mark is an asterisk to the left of the listing Highlight Delete Marked Entries and press Enter Making CIM Settings By default Common Information Model CIM service is set to Automatic and its normal status is Started 299 VTrak E Class Product Manual To make CIM service settings From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight Software Management and press Enter Highlight CIM and press Enter Enter information or change settings as required 1 5 6 Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic and Manual To use a HTTP connection highlight HTTP and press the spacebar to toggle to Enabled and accept the 5988 is the default port number or highlight HTTP Port press the backspace key to erase type new value To use a HTTPS connection highlight HTTPS and press the spacebar to toggle to Enabled accept the 5989 is the default port number or highlight HTTPS Port press
52. When the CD is chosen for installation immediately type linux mpath Copy the PROMISE supplied multipath conf file to the ete directory cp multipath conf vtrak alua rhel5 4 etc multipath conf Install the appropriate scsi_dh_alua driver module e i386 cd usr src redhat RPM i 386 rpm ivh scsi_dh_alua VTrak 1 1 1386 rpm e x86_64 cd usr src redhat RPM x86_ 64 rpm ivh scsi_dh_alua VTrak 1 1 x86_64 rpm Check the multipath configuration Multipath 11 multipath v4 Kernel with XEN or PAE support To support ALUA within RHEL 5 4 using kernel with XEN or PAE support 1 2 Install RHEL 5 4 When the CD is chosen for installation immediately type linux mpath Copy the PROMISE supplied multipath conf file to the ete directory cp multipath conf vtrak alua rhel5 4 etc multipath conf 481 VTrak E Class Product Manual 3 Install this patched alua_dh_scsi source module rpm ivh scsi_dh_alua VTrak 1 l src rpm Make your own rpm cd usr src redhat SPEC rpmbuild ba scsi dh_alau spec Determine your system architecture x86_64 or i386 uname a Install the appropriate scsi_dh_alua driver module e i386 cd usr src redhat RPM i 386 rpm ivh scsi_dh_alua_VTrak 1 1 1386 rpm e x86_64 cd usr src redhat RPM x86_ 64 rpm ivh scsi_dh_alua VTrak 1 1 x 86_64 rpm Check the multipath configuration Multipath 11 multipath v4 RedHat Linux RHEL 5 5 Default Kernel To support ALUA within RHEL 5
53. all disk arrays or Dedicated to specified disk arrays e Dedicated to Array The array to which a dedicated spare is assigned For more information see Spare Drives on page 355 Creating a Spare Drive Only unconfigured physical drives can be used to make spares Check your available drives under Physical Drive Management See Managing Physical Drives on page 225 1 2 From the Main Menu highlight Spare Drive Management and press Enter Highlight Create New Spare Drive and press Enter A default physical drive is shown with possible alternative choices To choose different drive highlight the drive press the backspace key to remove the current number then type a new number Highlight Revertible and press the spacebar to toggle between Yes and No A revertible drive can be returned to spare status after you replace the failed drive in a disk array See Transition on page 356 for more information 239 VTrak E Class Product Manual 6 Highlight Spare Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Dedicated and Global Dedicated means this spare drive can only be used with the specified disk arrays Global means this spare drive can be used by any disk array If you chose Dedicated a default disk array is shown with possible alternative choices To choose different array highlight the array and press the backspace key to erase the current number then type the new number Press Control
54. data it contains at one point in time Use a LUN clone as a backup or to migrate a LUN from one system to another Important The action of creating a LUN momentarily takes the original LUN or logical drive offline meaning nobody can read or write to it ALUN clone has the same capacity stripe size read and write policies as the orignal LUN However the LUN clone can be a different RAID level The choice of RAID levels depends on the disk array And if you have multiple disk arrays you can create the LUN clone on a different disk array than the original LUN This action requires Super User or Power User privileges To create a LUN clone of a logical drive 1 From the Main Menu highlight Logical Drive Management and press Enter Highlight the logical drive you want to clone and press Enter Highlight LUN Clone and press Enter Highlight the RAID Level of Copies field type the RAID level you want Highlight Save Settings and Continue and press Enter Highlight the disk array you want to use and press the Spacebar to mark it Highlight Save Settings and Continue and press Enter Highlight the Number of Copies field and type the number of LUN clones you want to create PNAAR OP You can create up to 8 clones of a LUN ata time 9 Highlight Start and press enter to begin the cloning process 10 Press eny key to continue 11 Press Y to confirm LUN clone creation The cloning progress bar displays Note the Target Lo
55. e Refreshing the Objects on page 465 Viewing LUN Performance Statistics To view performance statistics for a LUN 1 Click the LUN 1 in Tree View 2 Click the Performance tab The Performance tab reports the state and cumulative counts for each path to that LUN 456 Monitoring Your LUNs and Paths 11728390 Y QLogic Fibre Cha 52885558 9985756 856323020 35367916 Y QLogic Fibre Cha Active 51219217 9190033 777826810 34954782 Yy QLogic Fibre Cha 53344445 10179887 860763923 38744962 Move the scroll bar or expand the window to see all of the reported statistics The Performance tab reports the following data for each path Path ID e Bytes Written e State Active or not Non lO Requests Read Requests Queue Depth e Write Requests e Retries Count e Bytes Read e Failure Count An Active state indicates this path is available to handle I O requests If Active does not appear the path is designated as Standby Active and Standby states are determined by Load Balance Policy See also e Viewing Path Performance Statistics on page 457 e Load Balance Policy on page 461 Viewing Path Performance Statistics To view performance statistics for a Path 1 Click a Path X in Tree View 2 Click the Performance tab 457 VTrak E Class Product Manual The Performance tab reports the state and cumulative counts for a specific path P QLogic Fibre Cha Mo
56. e Jumbo Frames Enabled or disabled e Link Status Up or down active or inactive MAC Address MAC address of the target port e Max Supported Speed Maximum speed supported 1 Gb s e Current Speed Current or actual speed of the target port e Relative Portals The portals corresponding to this target port Items marked with an asterisk are adjustable under Making iSCSI Port Settings on page 196 Making iSCSI Port Settings To make iSCSI port settings 1 akon Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Port tab Click the port you want then click the Settings button Make settings changes as required e Enable Port Check to enable this port Uncheck to disable e Jumbo Frames Check to enable jumbo frame support on this port Uncheck to disable Click the Submit button 196 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Viewing a List of iSCSI Trunks A trunk is the aggregation of two or more iSCSI ports to increase bandwidth To view a list of trunks 1 2 3 Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Trunk tab Trunk information includes e Trunk ID ID number of the trunk Controller ID ID of the RAID controller 1 or 2 Master Port ID of the master port Slave Ports IDs of the slave ports Failed Ports IDs of any ports that are not working e State Optimal Sub Optimal or Fai
57. support promise com Web site http Awww promise com apple Belguim Apple Pre Sales Toll Free Phone 0830 to 1700 0800 71915 Apple Support Toll Free Phone 0830 to 1700 0800 71915 Apple Support Toll Free Phone After Hours English only 0800 71915 Apple Sales Email apple promise com Technical Support E Support https support promise com Web site http www promise com apple 437 VTrak E Class Product Manual Luxembourg Apple Pre Sales Toll Free Phone 0830 to 1700 0800 26425 Apple Support Toll Free Phone 0830 to 1700 0800 26425 Apple Support Toll Free Phone After Hours English only 0800 26425 Apple Sales Email apple promise com Technical Support E Support https support promise com Web site http www promise com apple United Kingdom Apple Pre Sales Toll Free Phone 0830 to 1700 0800 587 1068 Apple Support Toll Free Phone 0830 to 1700 0800 587 1068 Apple Support Toll Free Phone After Hours English only 0800 587 1068 Apple Sales Email apple promise com Technical Support E Support htips support promise com Web site http www promise com apple Taiwan Apple Pre Sales Toll Free 24x7 English only 008 0113 6030 Apple Support Phone Toll Free 24x7 English only 008 0113 6030 Apple Sales Email apple promise com Technical Support E Support htips support promise com Web site http www promise com apple China Room 1108 West Wing Shi Chuang Plaza 22 Information
58. 0 0 0 0 cee eee 96 Managing Network Connections 0 20000 ee aee 100 Managing Users gerrie waune t aea ea deblay dee Wneei wae wes 102 Managing LDAP aranin eth bagi hades war dese AE enti 108 VTrak E Class Product Manual Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe cont Managing Background Activities 00 02 Managing Storage Services 006 0a eee eee Working with the Event Viewer 0 0 0c ce eee eee eee Monitoring Performance 00 0 e eee ee Managing Physical Drives 0 0000 e ee eee Managing Disk ArrayS 0 0 e eee Managing Logical Drives 0 e ee eee Managing Spare Drives 00 0 e cence eee Managing Initiators qacan ae E ee Managing LUNS errer ratia eaer beled tk evened oleate es Managing Fibre Channel Connections 44 Managing iSCSI Connections 000 eee eee Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Initial Connection 0 0 00 ccs Managing the Subsystem 0020 cece eee eee Managing the RAID Controllers 00002 eee aes Managing the Enclosure 0 0 eee eee Managing Physical Drives 0 00 eee Managing Disk ArrayS 0 0 c eee Managing Spare Drives 00 cee eee eens Managing Logical Drives 0 0 eee Managing the Network Connection 0000e eee Managing Fibre Channel Connections 20005 Managing
59. 168 10 storageDabistProc j http 192 168 10 85 screen php BareF older storage WizardProc PROMISE TECHNOLOGY INC gt i amp Wizard The configuration can be done in one of the following ways 3 Dat Arey A Logeatne amp soeone E ray folowing a Getas set ot Ry LUN tasoina amp testing ye arrangement You can not modify A You drectiy specify al parameters for a new disk array 40 spare arve 62 Chapter 3 Setup Optimal Configurations When you choose the Optimal Configurations option you choose a script designed to set up your disk arrays logical drives and spare drives for a specific target application Each script requires a specific model of RAID subsystem And most scripts require a specific model and number of JBOD expansion units You cannot cannot modify these scripts Automatic When you choose the Automatic option the following parameters appear on the screen e Disk Arrays The number of logical drives number of physical drives ID of each physical drive configurable capacity and the media type hard disk drives or solid state drives Logical Drives The ID numbers of the logical drives their RAID levels capacity sector size and stripe size e Spare Drives The ID numbers of the logical drives type global or dedicated revertible option enabled or disabled and media type A hot spare drive is created for all RAID levels except RAID 0 when five
60. 4 From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter Highlight Locate Enclosure and press Enter The LEDs on the front of the VTrak blink for one minute Viewing Enclosure Topology This feature displays the connection topology of the VTrak subsystem Topology refers to the manner in which the data paths among the enclosures are connected There are three methods Individual Subsystem A single subsystem JBOD Expansion Managed through one subsystem or head unit RAID Subsystem Cascading Managed through one subsystem or head unit 223 VTrak E Class Product Manual For more information about connections see Making Management and Data Connections on page 25 To view enclosure topology 1 From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter 2 Highlight Enclosure Topology and press Enter The following information applies to the Head Unit Enclosure number 1 Controller number 1 or 2 Port number Status OK is normal N C is not connected Link Width The following information applies to RAID cascaded units or JBOD expansion units Connected EnclWWN The subsystem identified by its World Wide Number WWN Connected Encl Cirl Port The subsystem s enclosure controller and port numbers where the data connection was made If there is no connection the
61. 5 using the default kernel without XEN or PAE support 1 Install RHEL 5 5 When the CD is chosen for installation immediately type linux mpath 2 Copy the PROMISE supplied multipath conf file to the ete directory cp multipath conf alua rhel5 5 etc multipath conf 3 Install this patched scsi_dh_alua driver module e i386 cd usr src redhat RPM i 386 rpm ivh scsi_dh_alua_ VTrak 2 1 1386 rpm e x86_64 cd usr src redhat RPM x86_ 64 rpm ivh scsi_dh_alua_VTrak 2 1 x86_64 rpm 4 Check the multipath configuration Multipath 11 multipath v4 482 Task 5 Setting up ALUA Kernel with XEN or PAE support To support ALUA within RHEL 5 5 using kernel with XEN or PAE support 1 Install RHEL 5 5 When the CD is chosen for installation immediately type linux mpath 2 Copy the PROMISE supplied multipath conf file to the ete directory cp multipath conf alua rhel5 5 etc multipath conf 3 Install this patched alua_dh_scsi driver module rpm ivh scsi_dh_alua VTrak 2 1 src rpm 4 Make your own rpm cd usr src redhat SPEC rpmbuild ba scsi_dh_alau spec 5 Determine your system architecture x86_64 or i386 uname a 6 Install the appropriate scsi_dh_alua driver module e i386 cd usr src redhat RPM i 386 rpm ivh scsi_dh_alua_VTrak 2 1 1386 rpm e x86_64 cd Jusr srcj redhat RPM x86_ 64 rpm ivh scsi_dh_alua_ VTrak 2 1 x86_64 rpm 7 Check the multipath configuration Multipath 11 multipath v4
62. 60 A RAID 60 Source logical drive can migrate to the following Target logical drives Target Requirements RAID 6 32 physical drives maximum RAID 60 must have less than 32 physical drives If existing physical drives have no unused space add 1 or more physical drives RAID 60 Add physical drives 32 per axle maximum You can add physical drives to a RAID 60 array but you cannot change the number of axles 352 Chapter 7 Technology Background Stripe Size Stripe Size also called Stripe Block Size refers to the size of the data blocks written to and read from the physical drives Stripe Size is specified when you create a logical drive You can choose Stripe Size directly when you use the Wizard Advanced Configuration function to create a logical drive You cannot change the Stripe Size of an existing logical drive You must delete the logical drive and create a new one The available Stripe Sizes are 64 KB 128 KB 256 KB 512 KB and 1 MB 64 KB is the default There are two issues to consider when choosing the Stripe Size e You should choose a Stripe Size equal to or smaller than the smallest cache buffer found on any physical drive in the disk array Selecting a larger value slows read write performance because physical drives with smaller cache buffers need more time for multiple accesses to fill their buffers e If your data retrieval consists of fixed data blocks such as with som
63. Ahead Cache On the VTrak subsystem you can set the logical drive read cache policy to Forced Read Ahead an enable the aggressive pre fetch feature 362 Chapter 7 Technology Background The Forced Read Ahead cache policy setting provides predictive pre fetching of data requests allowing the controller to aggressively buffer large chunks of data in cache memory to prevent frame drops on high bandwidth video playback Not normally enabled for non video applications Adaptive Writeback Cache On the VTrak subsystem you can set the logical drive write cache policy to Write Thru or Write Back If you set the write cache policy to Write Back your data is first written to the controller cache and later to the logical drive This action improves performance To preserve the data in the cache in the event of a power failure the subsystem has a backup battery that powers the cache To see an estimate of how long the battery can power the cache see Viewing Battery Information on page 89 or Viewing Battery Information on page 222 The Adaptive Writeback Cache feature protects your data by changing the write cache settings while the cache backup battery is offline When all of the following conditions occur e The logical drive write policy is set to Write Back e The Adaptive Writeback Cache feature is enabled e The cache backup battery goes offline The write policy automatically changes to Write Thru When the b
64. Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe e Inconsistent Block Inconsistent blocks for this logical drive Mirror data for RAID Levels 1 1E and 10 or Parity data for RAID Levels 5 6 50 and 60 Identified by the Redundancy Check The Check Table lists Entry Number A number assigned to each block of entry Table Type Read Check Write Check or Inconsistent Block e Start Logical Block Address LBA of the first block for this entry e Count Number of errors or continuous blocks starting from this LBA To clear the check tables see Clearing Statistics on page 79 Creating a Logical Drive Manually This feature creates a logical drive only You can also use the Wizard to create a disk array with logical drives and spare drives at the same time See Creating a Disk Array with the Wizard on page 151 This action requires Super User or Power User privileges To create a logical drive manually 1 2 3 4 Click the Storage tab Click the Logical Drive icon Click the Create Logical Drive button Click the option button of the disk array you want to use and click the Next button Optional Enter an alias in the Alias field Maximum of 32 characters letters numbers space between characters and underline Choose a RAID level The choice of RAID levels depends the number of physical drives in the disk array RAID 50 and 60 only Specify the number of axles for your array In
65. Check the box to enable or uncheck to disable e SMART Polling Interval Enter a value into the field 1 to 1440 minutes 86 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe e HDD Power Saving Choose time periods from the dropdown menus After an HDD has been idle for the set period of time Power Saving Idle Time Parks the read write heads e Power Saving Standby Time Lowers disk rotation speed e Power Saving Stopped Time Spins down the disk stops rotation e Coercion Check the box to enable or uncheck to disable Coercion Method Choose a method from the dropdown menu e GBTruncate e 10GBTruncate e GrpRounding e TableRounding Write Back Cache Flush Interval Enter a value into the field 1 to 12 seconds e Enclosure Polling Interval 15 to 255 seconds e Adaptive Writeback Cache Check the box to enable or uncheck to disable See Adaptive Writeback Cache on page 363 e Host Cache Flushing Check the box to enable or uncheck to disable See Host Cache Flushing on page 363 Forced Read Ahead cache Check the box to enable or uncheck to disable See Forced Read Ahead Cache on page 362 Click the Save button Notes Power Management must be enabled on the disk array for the HDD Power Saving settings to be effective See Making Disk Array Settings on page 157 e Power Management functions are limited to the features your HDDs actually supp
66. Configuration icon to go to the Configuration screen On the Configuration screen check the icon for each component Green check icon Component is OK Yellow amp icon Component is critical Red X icon Component is offline Gray amp icon Component is not present or no information is available Tap the component with the Yellow icon or Red X amp icon to view more information its condition Also see Chapter 8 Troubleshooting on page 375 496 Viewing Information Viewing Information Devices To view device information 1 From the Summary screen tap the Device icon to view e Enclosure front view e Disk arrays e Physical drives 2 Touch and slide the Enclosure to the left to view e Enclosure external rear view e Controllers e Power supply units Fans 3 Touch and slide the Enclosure to the left again to view e Enclosure internal rear view e Temperature sensors e Batteries To see more information about a particular device tap the device itself Events On the Summary screen the Events icon displays a badge with the number of critical events recorded in the last 24 hours right After you view the event information the event badge disappears until the next critical event is recorded From the Summary screen tap the Events icon to view runtime event information Runtime events are recorded from the moment that the VTrak subsystem is
67. Connect the SAS expansion port on the left controller of the RAID subsystem to the SAS data IN port on the left I O module of the first JBOD unit See Figure 14 Connect the SAS expansion port on the right controller of the RAID subsystem to the SAS data IN port on the right I O module of the first JBOD unit Connect the SAS data OUT port on left I O module of the first JBOD unit to the SAS data IN port on the left I O module of the second JBOD unit Connect the SAS data OUT port on right I O module of the first JBOD unit to the SAS data IN port on the right I O module of the second JBOD unit Connect the remaining JBOD units in the same manner e Keep your data paths organized to ensure redundancy e JBOD expansion supports up to nine 9 JBOD units Figure 14 FC JBOD expansion connections controller SAS expansion port RAID 3 SAS cable sas IN port SAS OUT port SAS IN port VTrak JBOD unit 30 Chapter 2 Installation Fibre Channel SAN No Single Point of Failure Important For a list of supported HBAs switches and SFP transceivers download the latest compatibility list from PROMISE support http Awww promise com support Note For multipathing MPIO applications see e Appendix B Multipathing on Windows on page 363
68. Corrective Action PSU 12V 5V 3 3V power is within the normal range No action is required PSU is critical This may cause instability of the system Check the power to the PSU Verify that the correct PSU is installed PSU Fans PSU fan or blower has turned on PSU fan or blower has turned off PSU fan or blower speed is increased PSU fan or blower speed is decreased No action is required PSU fan or blower is malfunctioning Replace the power supply PSU fan or blower is inserted PSU fan or blower is functioning normally No action is required PSU fan or blower is NOT installed Check fans or blowers PSU fan status is unknown Check for proper installation and turn on the power supply If the condition persists replace the power supply RAID Level Migration RAID level migration is started RAID migration is in progress RAID level migration is completed No action is required RAID level migration is paused Resume migration when ready RAID level migration is resumed No action is required RAID level migration is stopped If this action was not intentional check the logical drive s status RAID level migration has encountered a physical disk error Check the disk drive check table after migration and replace disk drive as needed RAID level migration is aborted due to an internal error Reduce system load o
69. Data in the Controller Cache The dirty cache LED marked with the A icon informs you that there is data in the cache that has not been saved to non volatile memory Such data is sometimes called dirty not to suggest it is corrupted in some way but because it has not been saved to a physical drive Figure 6 Dirty cache LEDs Dirty cache LED Mgmt 10101 gt SAS EXP sG o o z L o E j Oo o w 3 Jae o bnd E FC RAID controller Dirty cache LED ups Mgmt lO101 gt SAS EXP a N eee o_ O E iSCSI RAID controller Caution If there is unsaved data in the controller s cache the dirty cache LED shines amber During this time do NOT power down the VTrak Wait until the LED goes dark 398 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Physical Drive Problems Physical drives are the foundation of data storage A physical drive problem can affect your entire RAID system When a yellow icon ora red X icon appears beside a physical drive check the drive s operational status 1 Click the Device tab 2 Click the Physical Drive icon 3 Click the physical drive you want then click the View button Look under Operational Status for the condition of the physical drive e Offline Check the drive
70. Database servers e Any application requiring very high availability 339 VTrak E Class Product Manual RAID 10 Mirror Stripe Mirror Stripe combines both of the RAID 1 and RAID 0 logical drive types RAID 10 can increase performance by reading and writing data in parallel or striping and duplicating the data or mirroring PROMISE implements RAID 10 by creating a data stripe over one pair of disk drives then mirroring the stripe over a second pair of disk drives Some applications refer to this method as RAID 0 1 Figure 6 PROMISE RAID 10 starts with a data stripe then mirrors it 1 Data Stripe m 2 Data Mirror Disk Drives The data capacity RAID 10 logical drive equals the capacity of the smallest physical drive times the number of physical drives divided by two In some cases RAID 10 offers double fault tolerance depending on which physical drives fail RAID 10 arrays require an even number of physical drives and a minimum of four For RAID 10 characteristics using an odd number of physical drives choose RAID 1E 340 Chapter 7 Technology Background Advantages Disadvantages e Implemented as a mirrored disk array whose segments are RAID 0 disk arrays e High I O rates are achieved thanks to multiple stripe segments Very high disk overhead uses only 50 of total capacity Recommended Applications for RAID 10 e Imaging applications e Da
71. Disk array and logical drive problems include e Disk Array Degraded Logical Drive Critical page 400 e Disk Array Offline Logical Drive Offline page 401 e Repairing an Offline Disk Array or Logical Drive page 402 e Rebuilding a Disk Array page 402 e Incomplete Array page 403 Disk array problems typically result from a physical drive failure The most common problem is a degraded disk array The RAID controller can rebuild a degraded disk array See Rebuilding a Disk Array on page 402 Disk Array Degraded Logical Drive Critical Disk arrays are made up of physical drives Logical drives are created on the disk array When one of the physical drives in a disk array fails e The operational status of the disk array becomes Critical e The operational status of the logical drives becomes Critical or Degraded e The operational status of the physical drive becomes Dead or Offline WebPAM PROe reports these conditions in the following places e Dashboard tab A yellow icon beside the disk arrays logical drives and physical drives under System Status Major event for the logical drive under Event Information Warning event for the physical drive under Event Information e Device tab Front View Physical drives are shown Dead or Offline and marked with a red X icon or Missing Physical Drive View Physical drives are shown Dead or Offline and marked with a red X icon or Missing Storage tab
72. E Support htips support promise com Web site http www promise com apple Germany Europaplatz 9 44269 Dortmund Germany Apple Pre Sales Toll Free Phone 0830 to 1700 0800 187 3557 Apple Support Toll Free Phone 0830 to 1700 0800 187 3557 Apple Support Toll Free Phone After Hours English only 0800 187 3557 Apple Sales Email apple promise com Technical Support E Support htips support promise com Web site http Awww promise com apple 436 Chapter 9 Support Sweden Apple Pre Sales Toll Free Phone 0830 to 1700 020 797 720 Apple Support Toll Free Phone 0830 to 1700 020 797 720 Apple Support Toll Free Phone After Hours English only 020 797 720 Apple Sales Email apple promise com Technical Support E Support https support promise com Web site http www promise com apple Switzerland ITF Apple Pre Sales Toll Free Phone 0830 to 1700 0800 562 898 Apple Support Toll Free Phone 0830 to 1700 0800 562 898 Apple Support Toll Free Phone After Hours English only 0800 562 898 Apple Sales Email apple promise com Technical Support E Support htips support promise com Web site http www promise com apple Norway ITF Apple Pre Sales Toll Free Phone 0830 to 1700 0800 15406 Apple Support Toll Free Phone 0830 to 1700 0800 15406 Apple Support Toll Free Phone After Hours English only 0800 15406 Apple Sales Email apple promise com Technical Support E Support htips
73. Enter Oh RO GOL At the Password prompt type password and press Enter The screen displays login as administrator administrator vtrak s password Promise VTrak Command Line Interface CLI Utility Version 4 01 0000 xx Build Date Mar 22 2011 Type help or to display all the available commands Type menu to enter Menu Driven Configuration Utility administrator cli gt To see the full set of CLI commands at the administrator cli gt prompt type help and press Enter To see full information about a specific command at the administrator cli gt prompt type help followed by the command then press Enter administrator cli gt help net 44 Chapter 3 Setup About IP Addresses e VTrak Default IP Addresses page 45 e Choosing DHCP or a Static IP Address page 45 e Accessing the MAC Address in the CLI page 46 e Accessing the MAC Address in the CLU page 46 Choosing the appropriate IP addresses is essential to manage your VTrak subsystem over a network You must change the VTrak s default IP addresses as required for your environment VTrak Default IP Addresses The default virtual management port IP addresses are set to e IPv4 10 0 0 1 e IPv6 2001 1 The virtual management port IP address works with either RAID controller enabling you to access a dual controller VTrak over your network using a single IP address The default physical management port IP addresses are set to e Contro
74. Host PC as a compressed HTML file 3 Double click the downloaded file to decompress it 4 Double click the report to open it in your default browser The Service Report includes the following topics About Report utility Battery Info Cache backup batteries BBM Info Bad Block Manager BGA Summary Status and settings The Service Report includes the following topics continued BGA Schedules Scheduled activities Buzzer Info Controller Info Debug Syslog Diagnostic information Disk Array Info ID alias and capacities only Disk Array Dump Info Diagnostic information Disk Array Verbose Info All disk array information Enclosure Info Error Table Info Read check write check and inconsistent blocks Event Info NVRAM List of NVRAM events Event Info Runtime List of Runtime events FC Node Info FC Device Info FC Initiator Info FC Port Info FC SFP Info FC Stats Info Flash Image Version Info iSCSI Info LDAP Info LogDrive Info Basic logical drive information LogDrive Dump Info Diagnostic information Logical Drive Verbose Info Full logical drive information 80 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Lunmap Info LUN map type LUN masking status and LUN entries Network Info Virtual port Network Maintenance Info Maintenance mode ports Phydriv Info Basic physical drive information Phydriv Verbose Info Full physical drive informa
75. IPv4 To make maintenance mode IPv4 manual settings 1 OV eRe GO From the CLU Main Menu highlight Network Management and press Enter Highlight Maintenance Mode Network Configuration and press Enter Highlight the controller you want and press Enter Highlight DHCP and press the spacebar to toggle to Disabled Highlight each of the following and press the backspace key to erase the current value then type the new value e IP address Subnet Mask e Default Gateway IP address e DNS Server IP address Press Control A to save your settings and move to the Maintenance Mode IPv6 settings screen Making Maintenance Mode Settings Manually under IPv6 To make maintenance mode IPv6 manual settings 1 CP ON From the CLU Main Menu highlight Network Management and press Enter Highlight Maintenance Mode Network Configuration and press Enter Highlight the controller you want and press Enter Highlight DHCP and press the spacebar to toggle to Disabled Highlight each of the following and press the backspace key to erase the current value then type the new value e IP address Subnet Mask e Default Gateway IP address e DNS Server IP address Press Control A to save your settings and e If you made settings for Controller 1 move to the Maintenance Mode settings for Controller 2 58 Chapter 3 Setup e Ifyou made settings for Controller 2 move to the RAID Configuration menu Note If you want
76. Making Virtual Management Port Settings Manually under IPv4 To make IPv4 settings manually on the management port 1 At the command prompt type net a mod f ipv4 s followed by primaryip and the IP address primaryipmask and the subnet mask e primarydns and the DNS server IP address e gateway and the Gateway server IP address and press Enter Example administrator cli gt net a mod f ipv4 s primaryip 192 168 10 85 primaryipmask 255 255 255 0 primarydns 192 168 10 11 gateway 19 2 168 10 1 After a moment the comand prompt reappears indicating that your setting was successful administrator cli gt To verify the settings at the command prompt type net a list v and press Enter The following information displays administrator cli gt net a list v ActiveCtrild 1 Port 1 48 Chapter 3 Setup MaxSupportedSpeed 1000Mbps ProtocolFamily Pv4 Enabled LinkStatus Up DHCP Disabled IP 192 168 10 85 IPMask 255 255 255 0 MAC 00 01 55 61 18 65 DNS 192 168 10 11 Gateway 192 168 10 1 ProtocolFamily Pv6 Disabled IP 2001 1 PMask ffff MAC 00 01 55 61 18 65 DNS Gateway DHCP Disabled Making Virtual Management Port Settings Manually under IPv6 To make IPv6 settings manually on the management port 1 At the command prompt type net a enable f ipv6 and press Enter to enable IPv6 on the VTrak After a moment the comand prompt rea
77. Manual Mounting rails are included with the VTrak To install the VTrak subsystem into your rack 1 Attach the mounting rail assemblies to the rack posts using screws and nuts from your rack system e The rail halves are riveted together and use no adjustment screws e The front left and front right mounting rail ends are labeled Figure 1 Installing the rails onto your rack Front left label o o o 9 PL Support flange on the front end of each rail Guide pins on the rails align with the holes in the rack post e All rail ends front and rear attach at the outside of the rack posts e The guide pins at the rail ends align with the holes in the rack posts e Tighten the screws and nuts according to instructions for your rack system 18 Chapter 2 Installation Figure 2 Rail ends attach to the outside of each post 0 o o o o o F o o o o o o o o 3 o o Rail ends attach on the outside of the front and rear rack posts 2 Place the VTrak subsystem onto the rails e Atleast two persons are required to safely lift the VTrak e Lift the VTrak subsystem itself Do not lift the VTrak by its brackets Figure 3 Placing the VTrak subsystem onto the rack rails Brackets VTrak subsystem Rails installed and tightened 3 Secure the VTrak subsystem to the rack e The VTrak attaches to the rack posts using the included screws and flange nuts e U
78. Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter 2 Highlight LUN Mapping and press Enter 3 Highlight LUN Mapping Initiators and press Enter A list of the current initiators appears Adding an Initiator You must add an initiator to the VTrak s initiator list in order to use the initiator to create a LUN To add an initiator to the VTrak s list 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight LUN Mapping and press Enter Highlight LUN Mapping Initiators and press Enter Highlight Create New Initiator and press Enter OBS Type a name for the initiator in the field provided Fibre Channel A Fibre Channel initiator name is the World Wide Port Name of the device and is composed of a series of eight two digit hexadecimal numbers Example 10 00 00 00 c9 73 2e 8b e iSCSI An iSCSI initiator name is the iSCSI name of the initiator device and is composed of a single text string Example iqn 1991 05 com microsoft promise 29353b7 278 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Obtain the initiator name from the initiator utility on your host system Note that the initiator name you input must match exactly in order for the connection to work 6 Highlight Save Initiator and press enter The new initiator appears in the list Deleting an Initiator Caution If you delete an initiator you delete the LUN map associated with that initiator Verify that
79. Option and press the spacebar to display Restart Highlight Submit and press Enter A warning message appears Press Y to continue 311 VTrak E Class Product Manual Close your SSH session Wait about two minutes Re establish your SSH connection to the VTrak CLU See Making a SSH Connection on page 207 If you cannot re establish a connection wait 30 seconds and try again Restarting VTrak Serial Connection To restart the RAID subsystem 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter Highlight Option and press the spacebar to display Restart Highlight Submit and press Enter A warning message appears Press Y to continue The screen displays shutdown and startup functions When the Login prompt appears log into the CLU again 312 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Buzzer Making Buzzer Settings The buzzer sounds to inform you that the VTrak needs attention See VTrak is Beeping on page 375 for more information To make buzzer settings 1 From the Main Menu highlight Buzzer and press Enter A list of Controllers appears with the current buzzer setting and status 2 Highlight the Controller whose buzzer you want to set and press Enter 3 Highlight Enabled and press the spacebar to toggle between Yes and No 4 Press Control A to save your settings Silencing the Buzzer Caution This acti
80. RAID controller 2 VTrak RAID subsystem 36 Chapter 2 Installation iSCSI Direct Attached Storage DAS Important For a list of supported HBAs and switches download the latest compatibility list from PROMISE support http www promise com support Note For multipathing MPIO applications see e Appendix B Multipathing on Windows on page 363 e Appendix C Multipathing on Linux on page 385 This arrangement requires e An iSCSI HBA network interface card NIC in the host PC or server e A standard network switch Data Path Each VTrak RAID controller has four 4 RJ45 iSCSI data port connectors See page 34 Figure 17 To establish the data path 1 Connect an Ethernet cable between the iSCSI NIC in the host PC or server and an iSCSI data port on one of the RAID controller See page 38 Figure 20 2 Connect an Ethernet cable between the iSCSI NIC in the host PC or server and an iSCSI data port on the other RAID controller Management Path Each VTrak RAID controller has one 1 Ethernet RJU 45 management port connector See page 34 Figure 17 To establish the management path 1 Connect an Ethernet cable between the network connector on the host PC or server and the standard network switch See page 38 Figure 20 2 Connect Ethernet cables between the standard netw
81. Road Shangdi IT Park Haidian District Beijing 100085 Apple Pre Sales Toll Free 86 10 8857 8085 8095 Apple Support Phone Toll Free 86 10 8857 8085 8095 Fax 86 10 8857 8015 Apple Sales Email apple promise com Technical Support E Support htips support promise com Web site http www promise com apple 438 Chapter 9 Support Korea Apple Pre Sales Toll Free 24x7 English only 00798 14 800 7784 Apple Support Phone Toll Free 24x7 English only 00798 14 800 7784 Apple Sales Email apple promise com Technical Support E Support htips support promise com Web site http Awww promise com apple Hong Kong Apple Pre Sales Toll Free Phone 24x7 English only 800 933 480 Apple Support Toll Free Phone 24x7 English only 800 933 480 Apple Sales Email apple promise com Technical Support E Support https support promise com Web site http Awww promise com apple Singapore Apple Pre Sales Toll Free Phone 24x7 English only 800 492 2153 Apple Support Toll Free Phone 24x7 English only 800 492 2153 Apple Sales Email apple promise com Technical Support E Support htips support promise com Web site http www promise com apple Japan 3F Mura Matsu Bldg 3 8 5 Hongo Bunkyo ku Tokyo 113 0033 Japan Apple Pre Sales Toll Free Phone 24x7 English only 0066 3384 9021 Apple Support Toll Free Phone 24x7 English only 0066 3384 9021 Apple Sales Email apple promise com Technical Support E Support htips supp
82. SuSE Linux SLES 10 SP3 To support ALUA within SLES10 SP3 1 Determine your system architecture i586 or x86_64 gt uname a 2 Doone of the following actions e Remove the currently installed multipath tool rpm ev multipath tools Install the appropriate new multipath tool RPM package i586 rpm ivh multipath tools 0 4 7 34 50 10 ass fix i586 rpm x86_64 rpm ivh multipath tools 0 4 7 34 50 10 ass fix x86 64 rpm 483 VTrak E Class Product Manual e Force install the appropriate new multipath tool RPM package i586 gt rpm ivh force multipath tools 0 4 7 34 50 10 ass fix i586 rpm x86_64 gt rpm ivh force multipath tools 0 4 7 34 50 10 a5s fix x86 64 rpm 3 Copy the PROMISE supplied multipath conf file to the ete directory gt cp multipath conf vtrak alua slesl0 sp3 etc multipath conf 4 Check the multipath configuration chkconfig multipathd on chkconfig multipathd shows the status of multipathd chkconfig boot multipath on chkconfig boot multipath shows the status of boot multipath 5 Reboot the VTrak 6 Check the multipath configuration Multipath 11 multipath v4 SuSE Linux SLES 11 To support ALUA within SLES 11 1 Determine your system architecture i586 or x86_64 gt uname a 2 Install the appropriate path priority tool library e i586 gt rpm ivh multipath promise susell 0 4 8 1 1586 rpm e x86_64 gt rpm ivh multipath promise susell 0 4 8
83. The controller status LED blinks green in half second intervals USB ports Controller status LED Mgmt I10IOI SAS EXP WY Lo oo SD m 20 o o o u0 40 o o o 9 80 ke mo lt z oE y o E pi FC RAID controller USB ports Controller status LED TTI iSCSI RAID controller 2 Wait until the controller activity LED stops blinking green and displays steady green 3 Remove the USB flash device 4 Insert the USB flash device into a USB port on your PC 5 On the USB flash device open the OPAX_xxxxxx folder to obtain the report and log 390 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Enclosure Problems Enclosure Problems include e Diagnosing an Enclosure Problem below e Overheating page 393 e Power Supplies page 393 e Batteries page 394 Diagnosing an Enclosure Problem Check System Status on the Dashboard tab If a yellow or red x appears in the System Status box 1 Click the name link of the component with the red X icon This system has errors Controller Click the link beside the red i Voltage X icon CS Temperature Ps apse Disk Array Logical Drive Physical Drive Spare Drive b E a a e eecececoeoees The Components List of the Device tab displays 2 Mouse over Enclosure with the red X ico
84. This permits the smaller drive to be used Without capacity coercion the controller does not permit the use of a replacement physical drive that is slightly smaller than the remaining working drives 365 VTrak E Class Product Manual iSCSI Management iSCSI management uses the following terms e Basic iSCSI page 366 iSCSI on a VLAN page 368 e Initiator page 369 e Target page 370 e Portal page 371 e Port page 371 e Trunk page 372 e Session page 372 ISNS page 372 e CHAP page 372 e Ping page 373 Also see Managing iSCSI Connections on page 188 or page 257 A detailed explanation of iSCSI functions and how to best use them is beyond the scope of this document For more information contact the Internet Engineering Task Force at http Awww ietf org Basic iSCSI See the diagram on page 333 Figure 1 To set up the data connections on a VTrak iSCSI subsystem 1 Add anew portal See Adding iSCSI Portals on page 194 or page 264 Note which iSCSI port you chose for the portal 2 Add anew target See Adding iSCSI Targets on page 190 or page 259 3 Assign the new portal to the target See Assigning a Portal to an iSCSI Target on page 192 The CLU assigns portals when you add the target See page 259 4 Map the target to a LUN See Adding a LUN Map on page 180 or page 280 5 Connect your iSCSI data cable to the iSCSI port you chose for the new po
85. This feature causes the drive carrier LEDs to flash for one minute to assist you in locating the physical drives that make up this disk array To locate a disk array 1 Click the Storage tab 2 Click the Disk Array icon The list of disk arrays appears 3 Click the disk array you want then click the Locate button The drive carrier status LEDs flash for one minute Figure 5 Drive carrier status LED Green LED flashes fe Running Media Patrol on a Disk Array Media Patrol is a routine maintenance procedure that checks the magnetic media on each disk drive If Media Patrol encounters a critical error it triggers PDM if PDM is enabled on the disk array For more information see Media Patrol on page 118 and page 331 Also see PDM on page 121 and page 331 Running Media Patrol To run Media Patrol 1 Click the Administration tab 158 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe 2 3 Click the Background Activities icon The list of background activities appears Mouse over Media Patrol and click the Start button Stopping Pausing or Resuming Media Patrol To stop pause or resume Media Patrol 1 2 3 Click the Administration tab Click the Background Activities icon The list of background appears Mouse over Media Patrol and click the Stop Pause or Resume button Running PDM on a Disk Array Predictive Data Migration PDM is the migration of data from the suspect disk drive to
86. To launch VTrak Monitor on the iPad or iPhone desktop tap the VTrak ES Monitor icon right Trak Monitor Adding a VTrak Subsystem To monitor a VTrak subsystem you must add it to VTrak Monitor When you add a subsystem you log into it at the same time On any Network To add a VTrak subsystem on any network 1 Tap the button at the top right corner of the screen right 2 Tap the Add Device icon in the dropdown menu 3 In the Add Device dialog box type e IP address of the VTrak e Your username e Your password 4 Tap the Login button The VTrak subsystem appears on the Home screen See page 493 Figure 2 491 VTrak E Class Product Manual With Bonjour Discovery To use Bonjour discovery the subsystem must be on the current Wi Fi network See Choosing a Wi Fi Network on page 495 To add a VTrak subsystem using Bonjour 1 Tap the button at the top right corner of the screen right 2 Tap the Search Device icon in the dropdown menu EEE search Device The Bonjour dialog box displays a list of available BE Aco Device subsystems identified by model and IPv6 address See Figure 1 Figure 1 Bonjour dialog box focal Promise VTrak E1301 2000 0001 5561 1865 y _ Already added Promise VTrak E1301 2000 0001 5561 1865 v Promisa VTrak E6101 2000 0001 8535 6082 Not added yet Promise VTrak E630 2000 0001 5500 141 Promise VTrak E6301 2000 0001 5500 141f
87. VlanTag VLAN Tag 0 to 4094 Refers to portals associated with a Virtual Local Area Network VLAN N A means this portal is not assciated with a VLAN IP IP address of the portal Viewing iSCSI Portal Information To view information for an iSCSI target port From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI Portals and press Enter The list of portals appears 1 2 Highlight the port you want to see and press Enter The portal information screen displays Information includes PortallD Portal number Starts at 0 TcpPort TCP port number 3260 is the default and recommended number DHCP Enabled or disabled DHCP is currently supported only for IPv4 AssociatedType PHY VLAN or Trunk ControllerID RAID controller ID 1 or 2 PortID Physical port on the RAID controller 1 to 4 InterfaceName eth2 263 VTrak E Class Product Manual e ProtocolFamily IPv4 or IPv6 e PrimarylP Primary IP address of this portal e PrimarylPMask Subnet mask of this portal e AssignedTarget 0 is the default target The number of targets available depends on how many targets you create See Adding iSCSI Targets on page 259 Items marked with an asterisk are adjustable under Making iSCSI Portal Settings on page 265 Adding iSCSI Portals VTrak supports up to 32 iSCSI portals per iSCSI port Each iSCSI portal can belong to a diffe
88. You can also enable or disable Media Patrol on individual disk arrays Redundancy Check Redundancy Check is a routine maintenance procedure for fault tolerant disk arrays those with redundancy that ensures all the data matches exactly Redundancy Check can also correct inconsistencies See Redundancy Check on a Logical Drive on page 168 Making Redundancy Check Settings To make Redundancy Check settings 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Background Activities icon The list of background activities appears 118 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe 3 4 5 Click the Settings button Click the Redundancy Check Rate dropdown menu and choose a rate Low Fewer system resources to Redundancy Check more to data read write operations Medium Balances system resources between Redundancy Check and data read write operations High More system resources to Redundancy Check fewer to data read write operations Click the Confirm button Initialization Technically speaking Initialization is a foreground activity as you cannot access a logical drive while it is initiating Initialization is normally done to logical drives after they are created from a disk array Initialization sets all data bits in the logical drive to zero The action is useful because there may be residual data on the logical drives left behind from earlier configurations For this reason Initialization is recommended
89. Your LUNs and Paths Move the scroll bar or expand the window to see all of the reported information To view a single LUN and all of its Paths 1 2 Click the LUN 1 in Tree View Click the Properties tab The Properties tab reports LUNs Name size and load balance policy e Paths Path ID state and adapter name Properties Perfomance Events 3 Promise YTrak E630f Multi Path Disk Device LUN 0 Size 1 019 75 MB Load Balance Policy Round Robin Available Paths E zi Path ID State Adaptor Name Y QLogic Fibre Channel Adapter 1 0 Active QLogic Fibre Channel Adapter Y QLogic Fibre Channel Adapter 2 0 Active QLogic Fibre Channel Adapter Move the scroll bar or expand the window to see all of the reported information See also Load Balance Policy on page 461 Refreshing the Objects on page 465 Viewing Path Properties To view Path properties i 2 Click a Path Y in Tree View Click the Properties tab The Properties tab reports SCSI Port number e SCSI Path ID SCSI Target SCSI LUN 455 VTrak E Class Product Manual Properties Performance Events UW QLogic Fibre Channel Adapter 7 0 2 0 Ready SCSI Location SCSI Port No 7 Path ID 0 Target ID 2 SCS Lun 0 Adaptor Name QLogic Fibre Channel Adapter Adaptor Location PCI Bus No 8 Device No 0 Function No 1 See also e Load Balance Policy on page 461
90. a spare disk drive For more information PDM on page 121 and page 331 Running PDM To run PDM on a disk array ik 2 6 Click the Administration tab Click the Background Activities icon The list of background activities appears Mouse over PDM and click the Start button From the Source Physical Drive dropdown menu choose a Source disk array and physical drive From the Target Physical Drive dropdown menu choose a Target physical drive Click the Confirm button Stopping Pausing or Resuming PDM To stop pause or resume PDM 1 2 3 Click the Administration tab Click the Background Activities icon The list of background activities appears Mouse over PDM and click the Stop Pause or Resume button You can also enable or disable PDM on individual disk arrays See Making Disk Array Settings on page 157 159 VTrak E Class Product Manual Preparing a Disk Array for Transport This feature prepares the physical drives that make up the disk array to be removed from the enclosure and installed in a different location To prepare a disk array for transport 1 2 Click the Storage tab Click the Disk Array icon The list of disk arrays appears Click the disk array you want then click the Transport button Click the Confirm button The status changes to Transport Ready Remove the physical drives and install them in their new location For more information see I
91. and press Enter A list of logical drives displays In the LUN field press the backspace key to erase the current value then type the LUN you want to assign to this target from 0 to 255 Each logical drive can have only one LUN and must have a unique LUN If you make a error press Control AR to restore the current LUN Press Control A to save the LUN map Editing a LUN Map Editing a LUN map is the action of assigning a logical drive or LUN to an initiator By changing the assignment you change the initiator s access To edit a LUN map 1 5 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight LUN Mapping and press Enter Do one of the following actions e Highlight LUN Mapping Initiators and press Enter Then highlight an initiator and press Enter e Highlight LUN Mapping Ports and press Enter Then highlight a port and press Enter e Highlight LUN Mapping Targets and press Enter Then highlight a target and press Enter A list of logical drives displays In the LUN field press the backspace key to erase the current value then type the LUN you want to assign to this initiator from 0 to 255 Each logical drive can have only one LUN and must have a unique LUN If you make a error press Control AR to restore the current LUN Press Control A to save the LUN map Deleting a LUN Map Deleting a LUN map prevents the initiator from accessing the LUN while LUN masking i
92. associated with all portals on the subsystem To view a list of iSCSI targets 1 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter 2 Highlight iSCSI Targets and press Enter The list of iSCSI Targets displays e Id Target number 0 is the default target Alias User assigned name of the target e AssignedPortals iSCSI portals assigned to the target Viewing iSCSI Target Information To view information for an iSCSI target 1 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter 2 Highlight iSCSI Targets and press Enter The list of iSCSI Targets displays 3 Highlight the target you want to change and press Enter The target information screen displays Information includes e TargetName iSCSI qualified name iqn of this target 258 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU TargetAlias Maximum of 32 characters Use letters numbers space between words and underscore An alias is optional TargetStatus Up or down ErrorRecovLevel Error recovery level supported ImmediateData Enables the initiator to send unsolicited data with the iSCSI command PDU MaxConnection Maximum number of connections DataPDUInOrder Enables placement of data in PDU order InitialR2T Allows initiator to begin sending data to a target without receiving a ready to transfer command DataSeqInOrder Enables placement of data in sequential order OutStandingR2T Maximum number of R
93. bead A poe Rae AERE 331 Logical Drives esere raeo cele hatha a ae od Bae eee See 333 Spare DriveS iaoa k dee e el ekg eae led ga head 355 RAID Controllers 0000 eee tees 361 iSCSI Management 00 ccc eee 366 Internet Protocols seriea dnd aides S dad Ges eget Sig eee eaves 373 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 200e ee eee eee eens 375 VTrak IS Beep sweat otetae es Hie bene ee Os Kepeta deers 375 LEDs Display Amber or Red 0000 e eee eee eee 377 CLU Reports a Problem 0 000 cence eens 382 WebPAM PROe Reports a Problem 2 0 000005 385 USB Support Reports a Problem 20 00000 ee 390 Enclosure Problems 0 02 eee eee eee eee eee 391 RAID Controller Problems 20000 eee eee aeee 395 Physical Drive Problems 000 ee ee eee eee 399 Disk Array and Logical Drive Problems 400 Connection Problems 00 0c eee eens 405 Power Cycling the Subsystem 000 ceca eens 409 Event Notification Response 0 cece ee eee 410 Chapter 9 Support 0c eee 429 Frequently Asked Questions 00000 c eee eee eee 429 Contacting Technical Support 20 0c eeee 435 Limited Warranty os ceeeueoin esc huawei vee Meade ese ade 440 Returning the Product For Repair 000 eee eee 442 Appendix A Useful Information 00 00 cece eee eee 445 SNMP MIB FileS 3040 ana
94. button Click the Save button Follow your browser s procedure to save the event file to the desired location Clearing NVRAM Events To clear the Runtime Events log 1 2 3 4 Click the Administration tab Click the Events icon Click the Clear button In the Confirmation box type the word confirm in the field provided and click the Confirm button 137 VTrak E Class Product Manual Monitoring Performance Performance monitoring includes e Monitoring I O Performance below e Monitoring PSU Wattage page 139 Monitoring I O Performance The Performance Monitor displays real time performance statistics for logical drives physical drives and Fibre Channel or iSCSI data ports The vertical scale adjusts dynamically to accommodate the statistical data Because it reports performance in real time to see data in the monitor there must be I O data activity taking place between the VTrak subsystem and the Host To monitor performance 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Performance Monitor icon 3 Under Logical Drive choose the metric you want to see from the Measurement dropdown menu e Bandwidth in MB s e Cache usage by e Dirty cache usage by e Maximum latency in ms e Average latency in ms e Minimum latency in ms e I Os per second 4 Click the Select Logical Drives button and check the boxes for the logical drives you want to see e Total of all logical drive
95. can hot swap a controller while the subsystem is running Removing the Old Controller To remove a RAID controller 1 Disconnect all attached cables from the RAID controller e Fibre Channel cables Management port cables e iSCSI cables e Serial cable SAS expansion cables e UPS control cable 2 On the controller handle squeeze the release tab and pull the handle outward See page 327 Figure 4 3 Pull the RAID controller out of the subsystem enclosure 326 Chapter 6 Maintenance Figure 4 RAID controller release Release tab and handle Installing the New Controller To install the new RAID controller 1 Carefully slide the RAID controller into the enclosure 2 Gently swing the handle in and press the handle until it locks 3 Reconnect all cables that were attached to the RAID controller Fibre Channel cables Management port cables iSCSI cables Serial cable SAS expansion cables e UPS control cable If one of the controllers goes into maintenance mode see Maintenance Mode on page 395 Replacing a RAID Controller Single Controller The RAID controller monitors and manages the logical drives When the RAID controller is replaced all of your logical drive data and configurations remain intact because logical drive information is stored on the physical drives Caution The RAID controller is NOT hot swappable if y
96. cares about the environment VTrak products utilize environmentally friendly production methods and materials and are designed with high efficiency in mind Powered by 80Plus certified power supplies that offer up to 85 power efficiency all VTrak Ex30 products improve total cost of ownership by conserving power reducing heat output and improving cooling costs Additionally the PROMISE as GreenRAID story includes advanced power management support for hard disk drives providing up to 65 energy savings Service and Support Every VTrak Ex30 subsystem is backed by the PROMISE Three Year limited warranty with 24 hour 7 day telephone and e mail support In addition to our Architectural Description industry leading warranty PROMISE offers extended warranty and onsite parts replacement options with service levels with response times as low four hours Architectural Description The VTrak Ex30 series subsystems are suitable for Direct Attached Storage DAS Storage Area Network SAN and Expanded Storage Model RAID Drives Rack Controllers Supported Units VTE830fS VTE830iS 1 24 4U VTE830fD VTE830iD 2 24 4U VTE630fS VTE630iS 1 16 3U VTE630fD VTE630iD 2 16 3U Figure 1 VTrak E830f i front view Drive Carrier LEDs e e 8 e e e 8 8 e e 5 e e e 8 8 8 e e e e G e e e 2 e 8 Drive Carriers Power and Status LEDs VTrak E Cla
97. cli gt net a list m Ctrild 1 Port 1 ProtocolFamily Pv4 Enabled DHCP Disabled IP 192 168 10 101 IPMask 255 255 255 0 MAC 00 01 55 30 65 E9 DNS 192 168 1 1 Gateway 192 168 10 1 53 VTrak E Class Product Manual Ctrlld 1 Port 1 ProtocolFamily Pv6 Enabled DHCP Disabled IP 2001 0db8 85a3 0000 0000 8a2e 0370 7336 PMask 001 0db8 fedc ba98 7654 3210 0246 8acf MAC 00 01 55 30 65 E9 DNS 2001 0db8 85a3 0000 0000 8a2e 0370 7001 Gateway 2001 0db8 85a3 0000 0000 8a2e 0370 7002 Ctrild 2 Port 1 ProtocolFamily Pv4 Enabled DHCP Disabled IP 10 0 0 3 PMask 0 0 0 0 MAC 00 01 55 30 65 E9 DNS 0 0 0 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 Ctrlld 2 Port 1 ProtocolFamily IPv6 Disabled DHCP Disabled IP 2001 3 PMask ffff MAC 00 01 55 30 65 D7 DNS Gateway 4 Repeat steps 1 2 and 3 above but change c 1 controller 1 to c 2 controller 2 This completes management port and maintenance mode setup Go to Logging into WebPAM PROe on page 60 54 Chapter 3 Setup Setting up VTrak with the CLU Setting up the VTrak in the CLU includes these actions Accessing the CLU Quick Setup Menu page 55 Making Subsystem Date and Time Settings page 56 Virtual Management Port Settings page 56 Making Virtual Management Port Settings Automatically page 56 e Viewing Virtual Management Port Settings page 56 e Making Virtual Management Port Settings Man
98. contact Technical Support See page 435 Can I change my access rights Only the Administrator or a Super User can change user access rights See page 104 or page 287 Lock Person xyz set the lock and is not available How do I unlock it Ask your Administrator to release the lock Note The lock automatically releases after the set amount of time has passed Creating a Disk Array or Logical Drive Why can t I see all RAID Levels in RAID Level dropdown menu The selection of RAID Levels shown depends on number of physical drives available to the controller For example if there are only two physical drives then you cannot see RAID 10 which requires four physical drives or RAID 50 that requires at least six See RAID Levels on page 333 Why can t I create more than one logical drive on my disk array If your logical drive takes up the entire capacity of the disk array there is no room for another logical drive Backup your important data then delete the existing logical drive and create multiple smaller logical drives on the disk array See Deleting a Logical Drive on page 166 or page 243 and Creating a Logical Drive Manually on page 165 or page 242 Disk Array Degraded According to WebPAM PROe my disk array is degraded What am I supposed to do If the Auto Rebuild option is enabled and a hot spare drive is available your disk array begins rebuilding automatically Also see Disk Array Degraded Logica
99. data and how to avoid them Important An Important message calls attention to an essential step or point required to complete a task including things often missed VTrak E Class Product Manual Note A Note provides helpful information such as hints or alternative ways of doing a task VTrak Overview The PROMISE VTrak Ex30 series support for 6 Gb s SAS and SATA disks and a next generation embedded storage I O processing platform out to set a new performance standard while providing a reliable flexible and easy to manage RAID storage system The VTrak E830f and E630f are coupled with high speed 8 Gb s Fibre Channel host connectivity The VTrak E830i and E630i are coupled with high speed 1 Gb s iSCSI host connectivity Performance The PROMISE VTrak Ex30 series is built using the Intel s next generation storage platform the Intel Xeon processor C5500 C3500 series to keep pace with performance demands with four data ports per RAID controller and support for 6 Gb s SAS and SATA hard disk drives and solid state drives Delivered in a Storage Bridge Bay SBB 2 0 compliant package the Ex30f offers the full redundancy that is expected of an enterprise solution Dual active active controller modules with cache mirroring over a PCle Gen 2 link allow for redundant data paths to ensure data availability while dual power supply cooling units minimize downtime and any disruption to business continuity GreenRAID PROMISE
100. different go to Updating the Subsystem Firmware on page 315 e Ifthe firmware versions match contact PROMISE Technical Support for help installing the correct memory into the RAID controller 446 Installing a Second RAID Controller New Settings for Dual Controllers With the second controller successfully installed make the following settings e Redundancy Type Set to Active Active or Active Standby See Making Subsystem Settings on page 77 or page 211 LUN Affinity If you choose Active Active redundancy See Making Controller Settings on page 86 or page 216 Note The VTrak subsystem boots its RAID controllers sequentially With a second controller installed your subsystem takes about a minute longer to boot This condition is normal Dual Controllers and SATA Drives If your VTrak subsystem has SATA disk drives installed you must install a SAS to SATA adapter on each of the SATA drives Without the SAS to SATA adapter SATA drives display a red X icon and Not Usable status Obtain SAS to SATA adapters from PROMISE Technology at http www promise com SAS drives do not require adapters Also see Installing Disk Drives on page 15 and Contacting Technical Support on page 435 447 VTrak E Class Product Manual 448 Appendix B Multipathing on Windows The appendix covers the following topics Before You Begin below e Installing Perfec
101. drive slot numbering Install all of the drive carriers into the VTrak enclosure to ensure proper airflow even if you do not populate all the carriers with physical drives Installing Your Drives The VTrak drive carrier accommodates 2 5 inch and 3 5 inch drives with or without a SAS to SATA adapter Cautions Swing open the drive carrier handle before you insert the drive carrier into the enclosure e To avoid hand contact with an electrical hazard remove only one drive carrier a time Important SATA drives require a SAS to SATA adapter available from PROMISE Technology at http Awww promise com SAS drives do not require adapters 22 Chapter 2 Installation 1 Press the drive carrier release button The handle springs open 2 Grasp the handle and gently pull the empty drive carrier out of the enclosure Figure 7 Drive carrier front view 3 If you are installing SATA drives attach a SAS to SATA adapter onto the power and data connectors of each drive oe te 4 Carefully lay the drive into the carrier with the power and data connectors facing away from the carrier handle 5 Position the drive in the carrier so the mounting holes line up e 2 5 inch drive mounting screws go through the bottom of the carrier e SAS to SATA adapter mounting screws go through the bottom of the carrier e 3 5 inch drive mounting screws go throu
102. for e PFA Condition Caused by a bad block or sector See Note 1 below e Stale Condition Caused by obsolete array information on the physical drive See Note 2 below e Not Usable This condition occurs when you have e Two controllers in your RAID subsystem and a SATA drive without a SAS to SATA adapter See Note 3 below e A missing or defective SAS cable between the RAID subsystem and a JBOD expansion unit e Drive Failed or Dead The physical drive cannot be repaired You must replace the failed drive See Note 4 below Note 1 Clear the error condition Then the physical drive is available See Clearing a Stale or a PFA Condition on page 147 Note 2 Identify the disk array to which the physical drive belongs Then delete the disk array If the error condition remains on the physical drive clear the error condition Note 3 Obtain SAS to SATA adapters though PROMISE Technology at http Awww promise com See Installing Physical Drives on page 21 for installation instructions Note 4 You can set the number of bad blocks tolerated before the controller marks a physical drive as Dead See Making PDM Settings on page 121 or Making Background Activity Settings on page 273 See also Media Patrol on page 331 and Disk Array Degraded Disk Array Degraded Logical Drive Critical on page 400 399 VTrak E Class Product Manual Disk Array and Logical Drive Problems
103. in any disk array Dedicated Replaces the failed drive only in the assigned disk array 65 VTrak E Class Product Manual 2 Click the enclosure graphic to view information about physical drives 3 Click a physical drive to select it for your spare drive The physical drive s ID number is added to the Selected list 4 Click the Next button to continue The Summary screen appears Step 4 Summary The Summary screen lists the disk arrays logical drives and spare drives that you specified If you accept these parameters click the Submit button If you do NOT accept these parameters review and modify your selections in the previous steps 66 Chapter 3 Setup Enabling LUN Mapping and Masking These features are optional for each logical drive The Enable LUN Mapping dialog box appears after you create a logical drive To enable LUN Mapping 1 Click the OK button in the Enable LUN Mapping dialog box The LUN Mapping amp Masking screen appears Check the Enable LUN Masking box to enable LUN Masking Click the LUN Mapping button to continue The initiator list screen displays Choose the initiators you want to use from the dropdown menu and click the Next button The screen displays a list of initiators and a list of logical drives Click and drag a logical drive from the logical drives list to the initiators list Click the Next button when you are done The screen displays a list of initi
104. includes information status settings and location To access Enclosure Management 1 2 From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter The following information is shown e Enclosure ID number e Enclosure Type e Operational Status e Status Description specific components in need of attention if any Viewing Enclosure Information To view enclosure information 1 2 3 From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter You can monitor power supplies cooling units enclosure temperatures and voltages and the battery 219 VTrak E Class Product Manual Adjustable items You can set or adjust the following items e Enclosure Warning and Critical temperature thresholds e Controller Warning and Critical temperature thresholds See Making Enclosure Settings below For information on Enclosure problems see Enclosure Problems on page 391 Making Enclosure Settings To make Enclosure settings From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter Highlight Enclosure Settings and press Enter Highlight the Temperature Warning threshold you want to change Press the backspace key to erase the current val
105. information includes e Slot 1 Memory Type e Slot 1 Memory Size e Slot 2 Memory Type Slot 2 Memory Size e LUN Affinity e ALUA e Controller Role e Flash Type e Flash Size NVRAM Type e NVRAM Size e Preferred Cache Line Size e Coercion e Coercion Method e SMART e SMART Polling Interval e Write Back Cache Flush e Enclosure Polling Interval Interval e Host Cache Flushing Adaptive Writeback Cache Power Saving Idle Time Forced Read Ahead cache Power Saving Stopped Time e Power Saving Standby Time Cache Line Size Items with an asterisk are adjustable under Controller Settings Making Controller Settings In a dual controller RAID subsystem settings made to one controller are applied to both controllers To make controller settings 1 2 3 4 Click the Device tab Click the Component List icon Click the controller you want then click the Settings button Make settings changes as required e Enter change or delete the alias in the Alias field e LUN Affinity Choose an enable disable option from the dropdown menu RAID controllers must be set to Active Active See Making Subsystem Settings on page 77 and LUN Affinity on page 361 e ALUA Choose an enable disable option from the dropdown menu RAID controllers must be set to Active Active See Making Subsystem Settings on page 77 and ALUA on page 361 e SMART Log
106. is not related to the VTrak or WebPAM PROe The problem is caused by your firewall or network connection protocol Contact your network administrator for help l tried to log into WebPAM PROe but my browser showed the message cannot be displayed What is the problem The browser decided prematurely that WebPAM PROe was not responding Click the browser s Refresh button This action usually brings up the login screen Timeouts WebPAM PROe was working OK But then it timed out What do do now WebPAM PROe times out when 24 minutes have passed with no user activity User activity means any action you do in WebPAM PROe to view or manage the subsystem This feature is included for security purposes Have your administrator change the timeout interval See page 126 Or to prevent WebPAM PROe from timing out periodically click the interface with your mouse Email Messages Why don t I receive email messages from WebPAM PROe Check your User Event Subscription and User Email settings See pages 103 and 104 If these are correct see your network administrator for assistance with the mail server setup email accounts and other issues User Management Why can t I create a new User Only the Administrator or a Super User can create a User 432 Chapter 9 Support If you are the Administrator or a Super User and cannot create a User be sure the user name is not already in use If you still cannot create a User
107. is started Front end expander firmware upgrade is completed No action is required Front end expander firmware upgrade failed Try the update again If this message repeats contact Tech Support Host Interface Host interface controller has detected bus reset If this message appears repeatedly contact Tech Support Host interface controller has encountered an unrecoverable error Restart the VTrak If this message appears repeatedly contact Tech Support Host interface controller has received an abort task command Host interface controller has received an abort task set command No action is required Host interface controller has received a clear ACA command If this message appears repeatedly contact Tech Support 416 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Reported Event Corrective Action Host interface controller has received a clear task set command Host interface controller has received a LUN reset command No action is required Host interface controller is informed that the initiator has detected an error Host interface controller has received illegal secondary identification Host interface controller has received a message parity error Host interface controller has received a bus reboot If this message appears repeatedly contact Tech Support Host interface link is up No action i
108. is the default LDAP Server Hostname or IP address of the LDAP server 127 0 0 1 is the default LDAP Port The port number of the LDAP server 389 is the default Server Type Choose a server type from the dropdown menu Windows Active Directory Mac Open directory or Unspecified UID Attribute Stores user s ID in LDAP server For Windows a typical value is sAMAccountName For Mac OS a typical value is uid Anonymous Bind Allows the system to bind to an LDAP server without providing Bind DN and password Bind DN Distinguished name used to authenticate communication between subsystem and LDAP server No default value Bind Password Password for Bind DN No default value 109 VTrak E Class Product Manual Email notification for Event Check the box to enable an email subscription for an LDAP authenticated user e Object Class For email notification The default is person Full Name Attribute Store user s full name in LDAP server displayName is the default Email Address Attribute Store user s email address in LDAP server mail is the default e Privilege for LDAP Users Choose Using Default Privilege or Using Role Mapping See the table below e Default Privilege Choose a level from the dropdown menu See the table on the previous page Base DN of Group The base DN for a group of users e Object Class of Group The object class for a group o
109. is the default value e UIDAttribute Windows Active Directory sets sAMAccountName 291 VTrak E Class Product Manual 8 Mac Open Directory and Unspecified set uid FullNameAttribute Store user s full name in LDAP server displayName is the default EmailAddrAttribute Store user s email address in LDAP server mail is the default Highlight each item and press the Spacebar to toggle through the options as needed e Server Type Windows Active Directory Mac Open directory or Unspecified e Role Policy Default or Explicit e Default Privilege Applies to Default Role Policy View Maintenance Power or Super See Table 3 below The following items apply to the Default Role Policy Highlight each item and press Backspace to erase the current value then type a new value as needed e BaseDNOfGroup Authenticates communication between subsystem and LDAP server No default value e ObjectClassOfGroup group is the default value e GroupIDAtiribute cn is the default To save your settings press Control A Table 3 User Privileges Level Meaning View Allows the user to see all status and settings but not to make any changes Maintenance Allows the user to perform maintenance tasks including Rebuilding PDM Media Patrol and Redundancy Check Power Allows the user to create but not delete disk arrays and logical drives change RAID levels c
110. limitation any warranties for fitness for any purpose quality merchantability non infringement or otherwise PROMISE makes no warranty or representation concerning the suitability of any product for use with any other item You assume full responsibility for selecting products and for ensuring that the products selected are compatible and appropriate for use with other goods with which they will be used 440 Chapter 9 Support PROMISE DOES NOT WARRANT that any product is free from errors or that it will interface without problems with your computer system It is your responsibility to back up or otherwise save important data before installing any product and continue to back up your important data regularly No other document statement or representation may be relied on to vary the terms of this limited warranty PROMISE s sole responsibility with respect to any product is to do one of the following a replace the product with a conforming unit of the same or superior product b repair the product PROMISE shall not be liable for the cost of procuring substitute goods services lost profits unrealized savings equipment damage costs of recovering reprogramming or reproducing of programs or data stored in or used with the products or for any other general special consequential indirect incidental or punitive damages whether in contract tort or otherwise notwithstanding the failure of the essential purpose
111. method of mapping a group of users to an LDAP server You must enable LDAP to use Role Mapping You do not have to enable LDAP to manage Role Mapping You must enable LDAP to use Role Mapping See Making LDAP Settings on page 109 You do not have to enable LDAP to manage Role Mapping To view a list of role maps 1 2 3 4 Click the Administration tab Click the User Management icon Click the LDAP Settings button Click the Role Mapping button The list of roles appears Role information includes External Group Enable and disables LDAP e Privilege Enables email subscription for the LDAP authenticated user Adding a Role Map To add a role map be a a a Click the Administration tab Click the User Management icon Click the LDAP Settings button Click the Role Mapping button Click the Add Role Mapping button From the LDAP Role dropdown menu choose a group name for your Role Map 111 VTrak E Class Product Manual Group names are for convenience only A group name does not impose any role or limitation upon the group it represents You can have multiple groups but each must have a different name 7 From the Subsystem Privilege dropdown menu choose a privilege level See the table below 8 Click the Submit button The new Role Map is added to the list User Privileges Level Meaning View Allows the user to see all status and settings but not to make any changes
112. of adequate capacity for your disk array To rebuild a disk array 1 2 3 4 6 From the Main Menu highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter Highlight Background Activities and press Enter Highlight Rebuild and press Enter Default source and target drives are shown with possible alternative choices To choose different drive highlight the drive press the backspace key to remove the current number then type a new number Highlight Start and press Enter For rebuild rate see Making Background Activity Settings on page 273 Running Media Patrol on a Disk Array Media Patrol is a routine maintenance procedure that checks the magnetic media on each disk drive If Media Patrol encounters a critical error it triggers PDM if PDM is enabled on the disk array 236 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU See Enabling Media Patrol PDM and Power Management on a Disk Array on page 235 For Media Patrol rate see Making Background Activity Settings on page 273 For more information see page 331 Running PDM on a Disk Array Predictive Data Migration PDM migrates data from the suspect physical drive to a spare drive before the physical drive fails Before you can run PDM you must have a replacement or target physical drive of adequate capacity for your disk array To run PDM on a disk array 1 From the Main Menu highlight Disk Ar
113. of FRU depends on the subsystem model To view FRU VPD information To make Enclosure settings 1 2 3 Click the Device tab Click the Component List icon Click the Enclosure and click the FRU VPD button Use this information when communicating with Technical Support and when ordering replacement units For contact information see Contacting Technical Support on page 435 Viewing Power Supply Status To view the status of the power supplies 1 2 3 4 Click the Device tab Click the Component List icon Click the Enclosure and click the View button Scroll down to view the power supplies The screen displays the operational and fan status of VTrak s two power supplies If any status differs from normal or the fan speed is below the Healthy Threshold value there is a fan power supply malfunction See Replacing a Power Supply on page 323 Viewing Fan Status The fans are located on the power supplies To view the status of the power supply fans 1 Click the Device tab 94 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Click the Component List icon Click the Enclosure and click the View button Scroll down to view the Fans The screen displays the status and speed of the fans on the power supplies If fan speed is below the Healthy Threshold there is a malfunction See Diagnosing an Enclosure Problem on page 391 Viewing Temperature Sensor Status To view the status of the
114. of frames received with an invalid CRC since last reset InitiatorlOCount I O Count on the initiator on the host side Clearing Statistics To clear statistics see Clearing Statistics on page 305 Viewing Fibre Channel Initiators LUN Mapping must be enabled in order for VTrak to recognize a Fibre Channel See Enabling LUN Mapping on page 277 255 VTrak E Class Product Manual To view Fibre Channel initiators 1 From the Main Menu highlight Fibre Channel Management and press Enter 2 Highlight Fibre Channel Initiators and press Enter A list of all currently logged in initiators appears on the screen 256 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Managing iSCSI Connections The iSCSI Management option appears only with VTrak iSCSI models iSCSI Management includes the following functions Making Global iSCSI Settings page 258 Viewing a List of iSCSI Targets page 258 Viewing iSCSI Target Information page 258 Adding iSCSI Targets page 259 Making iSCSI Target Settings page 260 Deleting iSCSI Targets page 261 Viewing a List of iSCSI Ports page 261 Viewing iSCSI Port Information page 262 Making iSCSI Port Settings page 262 Viewing a List of iSCSI Portals page 263 Viewing iSCSI Portal Information page 263 Adding iSCSI Portals page 264 Making iSCSI Portal Settings page 265 Deleting iSCSI Portals page 265 Viewing a List of iSCSI Sessions page 266 Making iSCSI Session
115. of the VTrak s audible alarm and any amber or red LEDs See VTrak is Beeping on page 375 and LEDs Display Amber or Red on page 377 for more information Check the event logs first Then check the reported component Viewing Runtime Events To display Runtime Events 1 From the Main Menu highlight Event Viewer and press Enter The log of Runtime Events appears Events are added to the top of the list Each item includes e Sequence number Begins with 0 at system startup e Device Disk Array Logical Drive Physical Drive by its ID number e Severity See the Table below e Timestamp Date and time the event happened e Description A description of the event in plain language 6 Press the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the log Event Severity Levels Level Description Fatal Non recoverable error or failure has occurred Critical Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are serious Major Action is needed now Minor Action is needed but the condition is not a serious at this time Warning User can decide whether or not action is required Information Information only no action is required Viewing NVRAM Events This screen displays a list of and information about 63 most important events over multiple subsystem startups To display NVRAM events 1 From the Main Menu highlight Event Viewer and press Enter 2 Highlight NVRAM Events an
116. on page 311 Note that all of these components are upgraded together in a package See Updating the Subsystem Firmware on page 315 304 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Clearing Statistics This function clears the statistical counts for the RAID controller Fibre Channel ports iSCSI ports physical drives and logical drives To clear statistics 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight Clear Statistics and press Enter Press Y to confirm the deletion 305 VTrak E Class Product Manual Restoring Factory Defaults This function restores the factory default settings to the firmware and software items you select on Caution Restoring default settings can disrupt your VTrak functions Use this feature only when necessary If you restore Management Network settings you lose your network connection to the VTrak Note To reset the Administrator s password to the factory default see Resetting the Default Password on page 330 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight Restore Factory Defaults and press Enter Highlight the setting groups you want to restore and press the spacebar to toggle between Yes and No Yes means this setting is restored to the default value No means the current setting remains untouched Highlight Restore Factory Defaults and press Enter Press Y t
117. or re initialize the loop NOSCount Not Operational Primitive Sequence This primitive sequence is used during link initialization between two N_Ports in the point to point topology or an N_Port and an F_Port in the fabric topology NOS is sent to indicate that the transmitting port has detected a link failure or is offline The expected response to a port sending NOS is the OLS primitive sequence ErrorFrames FC devices propagate handshake signals back and forth requesting and acknowledging each byte transferred FC transfers occur in one frame of data at a time In this case the value reflects the number of frames with errors DumpedFrames This field specifies the number of frames dumped due to a lack of host buffers LinkFailureCount Number of times the link has failed Can be caused by a disconnected link or a bad fiber element LossSyncCount Number of times a loss of sync has occurred since last reset PrimitiveSeqErrorCount An ordered set transmitted repeatedly and used to establish and maintain a link LR LRR NOS and OLS are primitive sequences used to establish an active link in a connection between two N_Ports or an N_Port and an F_Port LIP LPB and LPE are primitive sequences used in the Arbitrated Loop topology for initializing the loop and enabling or disabling an L_Port InvalidWordSentCount Number of invalid words sent since last reset InvalidCRCCount Invalid Cyclical Redundancy Count Number
118. page 279 Adding a LUN Map page 280 Editing a LUN Map page 281 Deleting a LUN Map page 281 Changing the Active LUN Mapping Type page 282 Enabling LUN Mapping LUN Mapping must be enabled in order for VTrak to recognize an initiator To enable LUN mapping 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight LUN Mapping and press Enter Highlight one of the following options and press Enter e LUN Mapping Intiators e LUN Mapping Ports e LUN Mapping Targets Highlight Enable LUN Mapping Currently DISABLED and press Enter A Logical drives may become invisible message appears Press any key to continue Press Y to confirm LUN mapping is enabled Viewing a List Ports To view a list of FC ports 1 2 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight LUN Mapping and press Enter 277 VTrak E Class Product Manual 3 Highlight LUN Mapping Ports and press Enter A list of ports appears Viewing a List Targets To view a list of iSCSI targets 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter 2 Highlight LUN Mapping and press Enter 3 Highlight LUN Mapping Ports and press Enter A list of ports appears Viewing a List of Initiators LUN Mapping must be enabled in order for VTrak to recognize an initiator To view a list of FC or iSCSI initiators 1 From the Main
119. perform a Manual Rebuild See Rebuilding a Disk Array on page 160 and page 402 and Spare Drives on page 355 Also see Disk Array Degraded Logical Drive Critical on page 400 and Disk Array Offline Logical Drive Offline on page 401 Making Rebuild Settings 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Background Activities icon The list of background activities appears 3 Click the Settings button 4 Click the Rebuild Rate dropdown menu and choose a rate e Low Fewer system resources to the Rebuild more to data read write operations e Medium Balances system resources between the Rebuild and data read write operations e High More system resources to the Rebuild fewer to data read write operations 5 Check the Enable Auto Rebuild box to enable Auto Rebuild rebuilds when you swap out the failed drive with a new one 6 Click the Confirm button Migration The term Migration means either or both of the following Change the RAID level of a logical drive Expand the storage capacity of a logical drive 120 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe See Migrating a Logical Drive s RAID Level on page 169 and RAID Level Migration on page 347 Making Migration Settings To make migration settings 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Background Activities icon The list of background activities appears 3 Click the Settings button 4 Click the Migration Ra
120. press Enter If you specified less than the full capacity for the logical drive in the previous screen and you want to add another logical drive now highlight Create New Logical Drive and press Enter If you do not agree with the logical drives highlight Return to Previous Screen and press Enter to begin the process again Deleting a Disk Array 4 5 Caution When you delete a disk array you delete all the logical drives and the data they contain Back up all important data before deleting a disk array From the Main Menu highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter Highlight the disk array you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark it The mark is an asterisk to the left of the listing Highlight Delete Marked Arrays and press Enter Press Y to confirm the deletion Press Y again to reconfirm Making Disk Array Settings To make disk array settings 1 From the Main Menu highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter 233 VTrak E Class Product Manual The list of disk arrays appears 2 Highlight the disk array you want and press the Enter 3 Make settings changes as required e Enter change or delete the alias in the Alias field Maximum of 32 characters letters numbers space between characters and underline e Media Patrol Highlight and press the spacebar to toggle between enable and disable e PDM Highlight and press the spacebar to toggle between enable and disa
121. results from e Fan failure e Inadequate air circulation around the enclosure Fan Failure In the Ex30 series VTrak subsystems the power supply fans are the Cooling Units for the enclosure When a power supply fan fails you must replace the power supply See Replacing a Power Supply on page 323 for more information Inadequate Air Circulation Air circulation around the VTrak enclosure might be a more complex problem Use the thermometer icons to help you locate the specific hot spot Check for these conditions e Accumulated dust or objects blocking the fans e Less than a minimum of 13 cm 5 inches space between the back of the enclosure and the wall or other object e Ambient temperature above 35 C 95 F where the subsystem is operating To cool down an enclosure Correct any problems identified above e Power it down and let it sit for an hour or longer See Shutting Down the Subsystem on page 83 Power Supplies VTrak subsystems are equipped with redundant power supplies The advantage of dual power supplies is that should one fail the other continues to power the subsystem until the faulty one can be replaced The subsystem is capable of operating on a single power supply The power supplies are hot swappable meaning you can leave the subsystem running when you replace the bad one Be careful however to remove the faulty power supply and not the good one or the subsystem comes to an immediate stop a
122. temperature sensors 1 2 3 4 Click the Device tab Click the Component List icon Click the Enclosure and click the View button Scroll down to view the Temperature Sensors If any temperature exceeds the Healthy Threshold value there is an overheat condition in the enclosure See Making Enclosure Settings on page 93 and See Diagnosing an Enclosure Problem on page 391 Viewing Voltage Sensor Status To view the status of the voltage sensors 1 2 3 4 Click the Device tab Click the Component List icon Click the Enclosure and click the View button Scroll down to view the Voltage Sensors If any voltage is outside the Healthy Threshold values there is a voltage malfunction in the enclosure See Diagnosing an Enclosure Problem on page 391 95 VTrak E Class Product Manual Managing UPS Units Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS Management includes the following functions Viewing a List of UPS Units below Making UPS Settings page 97 Viewing UPS Information page 98 Viewing a List of UPS Units To view a list of UPS units supporting the VTrak Click the Device tab Click the UPS icon Information in the UPS List includes 1 2 ID The ID number of the UPS Status OK means Normal On AC means the UPS is connected to a viable external AC power source On Battery means the external AC power source is offline and the UPS is running on battery power Model
123. the Capacity field accept the default maximum capacity or enter a lesser capacity and size in MB GB or TB Any remaining capacity is available for an additional logical drive For each of the following items accept the default or change the settings as required e Choose a Stripe size 64 KB 128 KB 256 KB 512 KB and 1 MB are available e Choose a Sector size 512 B 1 KB 2 KB and 4 KB are available 165 VTrak E Class Product Manual e Choose a Read cache Policy Read Cache Read Ahead and No Cache are available e Choose a Write cache Policy Write Back and Write Through Thru are available 10 Click the Add button 11 The new logical drive appears on the list at the right If there is capacity remaining you can create an additional logical drive When you are finished click the Submit button The new logical drive or drives appear in the logical drive list New logical drives are automatically synchronized See Synchronization on page 122 You can access the logical drive during synchronization Deleting a Logical Drive Caution If you delete a logical drive you also delete all the data in the logical drive Back up any important data before deleting the logical drive This action requires Administrator or Super User privileges To delete a logical drive 1 2 3 4 Click the Storage tab Click the Logical Drive icon Click the logical drive you want then click
124. the Delete button In the Confirmation box type the word confirm in the field provided and click the Confirm button Making Logical Drive Settings To make logical drive settings 1 2 Click the Storage tab Click the Logical Drive icon The list of logical drives appears Click the logical drive you want then click the Settings button Make settings changes as required e Enter change or delete the alias in the Alias field Maximum of 32 characters letters numbers space between characters and underline 166 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe e Choose a Read cache Policy Read Cache Read Ahead and No Cache are available e Choose a Write cache Policy Write Back and Write Through Thru are available 5 Click the Save button For more information see Cache Policy on page 362 Note The Write Cache is always set to WriteThru when Read Cache is set to NoCache Locating a Logical Drive This feature causes the drive carrier LEDs to flash for one minute to assist you in locating the physical drives that make up this logical drive To locate a logical drive 1 Click the Storage tab 2 Click the Logical Drive icon The list of logical drives appears 3 Click the logical drive you want then click the Locate button The drive carrier status LEDs flash for one minute Figure 6 Drive carrier status LED Green LED flashes Initializing a Logical Drive Initializati
125. the LUN map is no longer needed before deleting the initiator To delete an initiator 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter 2 Highlight LUN Mapping and press Enter 3 Highlight the initiator you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark it The mark is an asterisk to the left of the listing 4 Highlight Delete Marked Initiators and press Enter 5 Press Y to confirm the deletion Viewing a List of LUN Maps To view a list of LUN maps 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter 2 Highlight LUN Mapping and press Enter 3 Do one of the following actions e Highlight LUN Mapping Initiators and press Enter Then highlight an initiator and press Enter Highlight LUN Mapping Ports and press Enter Then highlight a port and press Enter e Highlight LUN Mapping Targets and press Enter Then highlight a target and press Enter The list of logical drives with corresponding LUN maps appears 279 VTrak E Class Product Manual Adding a LUN Map For FC systems you can set up an Initiator or Port type LUN map For iSCSI systems you can set up an Initiator or Target tyoe LUN map You can set up both LUN map types on the same subsystem but only one LUN map type can be active at a time A maximum of 1024 logical drives can be mapped to an FC initiator or port or to an iSCSI initiator or target To assign a LUN to an F
126. the Start button 131 VTrak E Class Product Manual Restarting CIM Service To restart the CIM service 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the CIM service and click the Restart button Making CIM Settings To change CIM service settings 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the CIM service and click the Settings button 4 Make settings changes as required e Choose a startup type e Automatic default Starts and runs with the subsystem e Manual You start the service when you need it e CIM HTTP Enabled Default is Yes e CIM HTTP Port number Default is 5988 e CIM HTTPS Enabled Default is No CIM HTTPS Port number Default is 5989 e CIM Authentication Default is No When CIM Authentication is Yes these fields appear e Change Password Default is No e CIM User Name Default is cim No changes are possible When Change Password is Yes these fields appear e Old User Password e New User Password e Retype new user Password 5 Click the Save button 6 Click the Confirm button Netsend Service Netsend service sends RAID subsystem events in the form of text messages to the Host PC and other networked PCs configured to receive Netsend event messages by setting up Netsend server accounts This service is set to Manual startup by default It does not run unless you start it manually or change the startup type to A
127. the backspace key to erase type new value To use CIM authentication highlight Authentication and press the spacebar to toggle to Enabled Enter the old password and a new password into the fields provided The default password is password There is only one user The default name is cim No changes are possible Press Control A to save your settings Press Y to confirm To start stop or restart the CIM service highlight Start Stop or Restart and press Enter 300 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Making Netsend Settings By default Netsend service is set to Manual and its normal status is Stopped To make Netsend service settings 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter 2 Highlight Software Management and press Enter 3 Highlight Netsend and press Enter 4 Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic and Manual 5 Press Control A to save your settings To start stop or restart the Netsend service highlight Start Stop or Restart and press Enter Managing Netsend Recipients VTrak s Netsend service sends VTrak subsystem events in the form of text messages to your Host PC and other networked PCs See Making Netsend Settings on page 301 Netsend Requirements In order to use Netsend NetSend must be running the VTrak e You must provide the IP address for each recipient PC e The Messenger service must be running on eac
128. to configure your RAID system now using the CLU see Managing Disk Arrays on page 229 for information about your choices Exiting the CLU To exit the CLU from the Quick Setup RAID Configuration menu 1 Highlight Skip the Step and Finish and press Enter 2 Highlight Return to CLI and press Enter This completes management port and maintenance mode setup Go to Logging into WebPAM PROe on page 60 59 VTrak E Class Product Manual Logging into WebPAM PROe 1 2 5 Launch your browser In the browser address field type in the virtual management port IP address of the VTrak subsystem Use the virtual management port IP address you set in the CLI page 47 or CLU page 55 Example e WebPAM PROe uses a secure HTTP connection https e Enter the IP address of the VTrak 192 168 10 85 Together your entry looks like this https 192 168 10 85 When the log in screen appears e Type administrator in the User Name field Type password in the Password field The User Name and Password are case sensitive Optional Choose a display language from the dropdown menu WebPAM PROe displays in English German French Italian Spanish Russian Japanese Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese and Korean Click the Login button Figure 4 WebPAM PROe log in screen ia ai i U M CEE mitps192 168 10 85 2 A D PROMISE TECHNOLOGY mC wesPam PROG
129. to the list 7 Click the Save button 8 Click the Confirm button Event Severity Levels Level Description Fatal Non recoverable error or failure has occurred Critical Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are serious Major Action is needed now Minor Action is needed but the condition is not a serious at this time Warning User can decide whether or not action is required Information Information only no action is required Deleting Netsend Server Accounts To delete a Netsend server account 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the Netsend service and click the Settings button 4 In the Message Event Severity Filter list and click the recipient server you want to delete 5 Click the Trash icon The recipient server is deleted 6 Click the Save button 7 Click the Confirm button 134 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Working with the Event Viewer Working with the Event Viewer includes the following functions Viewing Runtime Events page 135 Saving Runtime Events page 136 Clearing Runtime Events page 136 Viewing NVRAM Events page 136 Saving NVRAM Events page 137 Clearing NVRAM Events page 137 The Event Viewer displays log of subsystem events Events are classified as Runtime Events A list of and information about the 1023 most recent runtime events recorded since the subsystem was started
130. type of enclosure e System status e Event information Most recent NVRAM events e Storage overview Capacities number of devices Device tab Enclosure front and back views e Topology e Enclosure component list and settings e Physical drive management e UPS unlimited power supply management e Fibre Channel or iSCSI management Storage tab e Wizard Automatic Express or Advanced configuration e Disk array management e Logical drive management e Initiator management e LUN mapping and masking 72 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Administration tab Subsystem settings clearing statistics NTP and controller lock User management including LDAP and role mapping Software services Runtime and NVRAM event logs Background activity settings and schedules Firmware updates Image version Performance monitor PSU wattage monitor Restore factory default settings Import Export user database and configuration script Network management 73 VTrak E Class Product Manual Logging out of WebPAM PROe There are two ways to log out of WebPAM PROe e Close your browser window e Click Logout on the WebPAM PROe banner Figure 2 Clicking Logout on the WebPAM PROe banner X e 9 Google PAR E sY Save Service TE heip Contactus About Logout L A Clicking Logout brings you back to the Login Screen See page 70 After logging out you must enter your
131. value shows N A 224 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Managing Physical Drives Physical Drive Management includes the following functions Viewing a List of Physical Drives page 225 Making Global Physical Drive Settings page 225 Viewing Physical Drive Information page 226 Viewing Physical Drive Statistics page 226 Setting an Alias page 227 Clearing Stale and PFA Conditions page 227 Forcing a Physical Drive Offline page 227 Locating a Physical Drive page 228 Viewing a List of Physical Drives To view a list of physical drives From the Main Menu highlight Physical Drive Management and press Enter The list of physical drives displays Making Global Physical Drive Settings All physical drive settings are made globally except for setting an alias which applies to individual drives To make global physical drive settings 1 From the Main Menu highlight Physical Drive Management and press Enter Highlight Global Physical Drives Settings and press Enter Change the following settings as required For SATA drives e Highlight Write Cache and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and Disabled e Highlight Read Look Ahead Cache and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and Disabled e Highlight CmdQueuing and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and Disabled e Highlight MediumErrorThreshold and press the backspace key to remove the current value then type a ne
132. whenever you create a logical drive See Initializing a Logical Drive on page 167 and Initialization on page 354 Making Initialization Settings To make initialization settings Click the Administration tab Click the Background Activities icon Click the Settings button Click the Logical Drive Initialization Rate dropdown menu and choose a 1 2 3 4 rate Low Fewer system resources to Initialization more to data read write operations Medium Balances system resources between Initialization and data read write operations High More system resources to Initialization fewer to data read write operations Click the Confirm button 119 VTrak E Class Product Manual Rebuild When you rebuild a disk array you are actually rebuilding the data on one physical drive When a physical drive in a disk array fails and a spare drive of adequate capacity is available the disk array begins to rebuild automatically using the spare drive If there is no spare drive of adequate capacity but the Auto Rebuild function is ENABLED the disk array begins to rebuild automatically as soon as you remove the failed physical drive and install an unconfigured physical drive in the same slot See Making Rebuild Settings on page 120 If there is no spare drive of adequate capacity and the Auto Rebuild function is DISABLED you must replace the failed drive with an unconfigured physical drive then
133. 0 Returning the Product For Repair page 442 Frequently Asked Questions Physical Drives What kind of disk drives can I use with VTrak VTrak E Class supports e 3 5 inch and 2 5 inch form factor e Hard disk drives HDDs and solid state drives SSDs SAS 6 Gb s and 3 Gb s e SATA 6 Gb s and 3 Gb s e Supports any mix of SAS and SATA drives simultaneously in the same enclosure For a list of compatible drives go to PROMISE support http www promise com support VTrak E Class does not support Parallel ATA PATA disk drives Why are all the disk drives in my JBOD marked Dead This condition happens when the JBOD expansion subsystem is disconnected from the RAID subsystem powered off while the RAID subsystem is running or powered on after the RAID subsystem was powered on Use the force online function to restore the disk drives See Clearing a Stale or a PFA Condition on page 147 or page 227 See Making Settings on Making Webserver Settings on page 127 or page 296 With some RAID subsystems used a server s IP address to log in Why is VTrak E Class different VTrak E Class has the server software embedded With the E Class you point your browser directly to the VTrak subsystem WebPAM PROe is pre installed on the VTrak and launches automatically 429 VTrak E Class Product Manual I can access the VTrak over my company s intranet But can t access it from an outside Inter
134. 1 3 PMask ffff MAC 00 01 55 30 65 D7 DNS Gateway 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 above but change c 1 controller 1 to c 2 contoller 2 Making Maintenance Mode Settings Manually under IPv4 You make these settings for one controller at a time To make maintenance mode settings 1 Atthe command prompt type net a mod m c 1 s followed by primaryip and the IP address primaryipmask and the subnet mask primarydns and the DNS server IP address gateway and the Gateway server IP address and press Enter 51 VTrak E Class Product Manual Example administrator cli gt net a mod m c 1 primaryip 192 168 10 101 primaryipmask 255 255 255 0 primarydns 192 168 10 11 gateway 19 2 168 10 1 After a moment the comand prompt reappears indicating that your setting was successful administrator cli gt 2 To verify the settings changes at the command prompt type net a list m and press Enter The following information displays administrator cli gt net a list m Ctrild 1 Port 1 ProtocolFamily Pv4 Enabled DHCP Disabled IP 192 168 10 101 IPMask 255 255 255 0 MAC 00 01 55 30 65 E9 DNS 192 168 1 1 Gateway 192 168 10 1 Ctrild 1 Port 1 ProtocolFamily Pv6 Disabled DHCP Disabled IP 2001 2 PMask ffff MAC 00 01 55 30 65 E9 DNS Gateway Ctrild 2 Port 1 ProtocolFamily Pv4 Enabled DHCP Disabled IP 10 0 0 3 PMask 0 0 0 0 MAC
135. 1 14 04 45 Physical Disk is marked as DEAD Event Severity Levels Level Description Fatal Non recoverable error or failure has occurred Critical Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are serious Major Action is needed now Minor Action is needed but the condition is not a serious at this time Warning User can decide whether or not action is required Information Information only no action is required Device Tab e Front View showing the drive carrier icons Drive Rebuilding Drive Configured Drive os Au L Z Offline lh a o ee o ee LE O 386 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting e Rear View with Show Internal Components option Battery Failure Overheating Power Supply Offline e Physical Drive View physical drive shown dead or offline and marked with a red X icon Physical Drive Offline amp Physical Drive List Global Physical Drive Settings W Enclosure 1 SBB SAS 2U 12Bay Status Type Location Configuration Capacity 4 Offline SEAGATE ST95004305S SAS HDD Encl 1 Sot 4 Array0 SeqNo3 464 73 GB 5 o SEAGATE ST950043055 SAS HDD Encl 1 Sot 5 Unconfigured 464 73 GB SEAGATE ST950043055 SAS HDD Encl 1 Sot 7 464 73 GB SEAGATE ST350062055 SAS HDD Encl 1 Sot 8 Unconfigured 464 73 GB 10 o SEAGATE ST950043055 SAS HDD Encl 1 Sot 10 Unconfigured 464 73 GB 11 o SEAGATE ST950043055 SAS HDD Encl 1 Sot 11
136. 1 x86 64 rpm 3 Copy the PROMISE supplied multipath conf file to the ete directory gt cp multipath conf vtrak alua slesll etc multipath conf 4 Check the multipath configuration chkconfig multipathd on chkconfig multipathd shows the status of multipathd 5 Reboot the VTrak 6 Check the multipath configuration Multipath 11 multipath v4 484 Task 5 Setting up ALUA SuSE Linux SLES 11 SP1 Not updated with Novell SP1 patches If you did NOT update with Novell SLES 11 SP1 patches 1 Determine your system architecture i586 or x86_64 gt uname a 2 Install the appropriate patched scsi_dh_alua ko device handler e i586 gt rpm ivh force scsi_dh_alua slesllspl 2 1 1586 rpm e x86_64 gt rpm ivh force scsi_dh_alua slesllspl 2 1 x86 64 rpm 3 Copy the PROMISE supplied multipath conf file to the ete directory gt cp multipath conf alua slesllspl etc multipath conf 4 Check the multipath configuration chkconfig multipathd on chkconfig multipathd shows the status of multipathd 5 Reboot the VTrak 6 Check the multipath configuration Multipath 11 multipath v4 Updated with Novell SP1 patches If you updated with Novell SLES 11 SP1 patches 1 Copy the PROMISE supplied multipath conf file to the ete directory gt cp multipath conf alua sleslilspl etc multipath conf 2 Check the multipath configuration chkconfig multipathd on chkconfig multi pathd shows the status of mul
137. 10 55 The controller s heart beat has started 17 Ctrl 1 0x00040037 Info Nov 15 2010 14 10 55 Joining Fail Back is triggered on the controler 18 Ctrl 1 0x00040012 Info Nov 15 2010 14 10 58 The partner controller s heart beat has started 19 Ctri2 0x00040005 Info Nov 15 2010 14 10 28 The system is started Total Count 44 Current Page 2 5 Page Capacity 10 ay 4 gt ia Event Severity Levels Level Description Fatal Non recoverable error or failure has occurred Critical Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are serious Major Action is needed now Minor Action is needed but the condition is not a serious at this time Warning User can decide whether or not action is required Information Information only no action is required Also see these troubleshooting topics e Event Notification Response on page 410 e Enclosure Problems on page 391 e Frequently Asked Questions on page 429 389 VTrak E Class Product Manual USB Support Reports a Problem This procedure requires a USB flash device e Formatted to FAT 32 e Atleast 50 MB of free space Caution Verify that there is no firmware image file on the USB flash device If a firmware image file is present the RAID controller might attempt a firmware update See page 319 To collect a service report using the USB Support feature 1 Insert the USB flash device into one of the USB ports on one of the RAID controllers
138. 27 37 Fibre Channel 26 31 407 iSCSI data 35 37 366 368 power 41 RJ11 to DB9 15 40 206 SAS expansion 30 39 serial 15 40 206 405 UPS control 40 cache adaptive writeback 363 forced read ahead 363 read 362 reported events 411 settings 86 216 write thru 362 writeback 362 capacity coercion explained 364 setting 87 216 change RAID level 169 247 347 CHAPs iSCSI add 201 269 delete 202 270 list 201 268 settings 202 269 check table logical drive 164 244 CIM service 131 300 settings 131 299 clear PFA condition 147 227 stale condition 147 227 statistics 79 305 CLI 44 log in 208 log out 210 serial connection 44 206 501 VTrak E Class Product Manual CLU enter 208 exit 210 online help 209 problem reporting 382 Quick Setup 55 serial connection 44 206 SSH connection 207 Telnet connection 207 Command Line Interface see CLI Command Line Utility see CLU configuration script export 82 import 82 connection problems browser 408 Fibre Channel 406 management port 406 SAS 407 serial connection 405 connection power 41 controller alias 86 216 dual controllers and SATA drive 447 heartbeat LED 41 377 information 85 215 locate 88 217 maintenance mode 395 N A status 215 395 power saving 87 217 replace 326 327 reported events 412 414 settings 86 216 statistics 87 unsaved data in cache 398 CRC reported events 414 D date and time subsystem 47 56 212 dedicated spare drive 172 2
139. 273 You can specify the maximum levels for the reassigned and error blocks in PDM settings When the table fills to a specified value PDM triggers a migration of data from the suspect drive the disk drive with the bad sectors to a replacement physical drive During data migration you have access to your logical drives but they respond more slowly to read write tasks because of the additional operation The time required for data migration depends on the size of the physical drives PDM is enabled on all disk arrays by default You can disable PDM in the disk array settings however that action is not recommended See Running PDM on a Disk Array on page 159 or page 237 Power Management See Power Saving on page 364 332 Chapter 7 Technology Background Logical Drives Logical drive technology includes e RAID Levels page 333 e RAID Level Migration page 347 Stripe Size page 353 e Sector Size page 353 e Preferred Controller ID page 353 e Initialization page 354 Partition and Format page 354 RAID Levels RAID Redundant Array of Independent Disks allows multiple physical drives to be combined together in a disk array Then all or a portion of the disk array is formed into a logical drive The operating system sees the logical drive as a single storage device and treats it as such RAID 0 Stripe When a logical drive is striped the read and write blocks of data are interleave
140. 28 1097 Apple Sales Email apple promise com Technical Support E Support htips support promise com Web site http www promise com apple Australia Apple Pre Sales Toll Free 1800 149 746 Apple Support Phone Toll Free 1800 149 746 Apple Sales Email apple promise com Technical Support E Support https support promise com Web site http www promise com apple 435 VTrak E Class Product Manual EMEA Netherlands Science Park Eindhoven 5228 5692 EG Son The Netherlands Apple Pre Sales Toll Free Phone 0830 to 1700 0800 917 027 Apple Support Phone 0830 to 1700 Toll Free 0800 91 7 027 Apple Support Phone After Hours English only Toll Free 0800 91 7 027 Fax 31 0 40 256 9463 Apple Sales Email apple promise com Technical Support E Support https support promise com Web site http Awww promise com apple Austria Apple Pre Sales Toll Free Phone 0830 to 1700 0800 295 731 Apple Support Toll Free Phone 0830 to 1700 0800 295 731 Apple Support Toll Free Phone After Hours English only 0800 295 731 Apple Sales Email apple promise com Technical Support E Support htips support promise com Web site http www promise com apple France Apple Pre Sales Toll Free Phone 0830 to 1700 0800 917 027 Apple Support Toll Free Phone 0830 to 1700 0800 91 7 027 Apple Support Toll Free Phone After Hours English only 0800 91 7 027 Apple Sales Email apple promise com Technical Support
141. 2T PDUs the target can have outstanding for a single iSCSI command MaxBurstLen Maximum length of a solicited data sequence in bytes DefTimeToWait After a dropped connection the number of seconds to wait before attempting to reconnect DefTimeToRetain Number of seconds after time to wait above before reassigning outstanding commands HeaderDigest Enables the use of header digest CRC Enabled or disabled DataDigest Enables the use of a data digest CRC Enabled or disabled UniCHAPAuthen Uni directional peer CHAP authentication enabled or disabled BiCHAPAuthen Bi directional local CHAP authentication enabled or disabled FirstBurstLen First burst length in bytes AssignedPortals Portals assigned to this target Items marked with an asterisk are adjustable under Making iSCSI Target Settings on page 260 Adding iSCSI Targets If you plan to enable authentication on the new target create a CHAP first then add the target See Adding iSCSI CHAPs on page 269 Header and data digests work best with initiators equipped with a TCP Offload Engine TOE For more information see your iSCSI HBA user documentation VTrak supports a maximum 2048 iSCSI targets A maximum of 1024 logical drives can be mapped to a target 259 VTrak E Class Product Manual Using the CLU you must assign a portal to a target when you create the target To add an iSCSI target
142. 39 355 default settings restore 78 306 definitions FC properties 254 DHCP server changed IP address 408 dirty cache LED 379 Discovery tab 75 disk array alias 157 234 create options advanced 64 154 232 automatic 63 152 230 express 63 153 231 manual 150 optimal configurations 63 152 critical 400 delete 156 233 incomplete 403 information 148 234 list 229 locate 158 238 Media Patrol 158 236 operational status 149 234 PDM 159 237 rebuild 160 236 reported events 414 settings 157 233 transport 160 236 disk status LED 43 378 display language WebPAM PROe 70 DMA mode SATA drives 142 225 DNS server UPS unit 97 284 drive interface reported events 414 415 Index E email service setting 124 295 user setting 104 288 EMI statements 12 enclosure information 93 219 locate 93 223 reported events 415 settings 93 220 summary 92 219 temperature 219 topology 92 223 voltage 95 219 222 environmental standards 13 event log clear 136 137 276 NVRAM 136 276 382 reported events 415 runtime 135 275 382 save 136 137 VTrak Monitor 497 event notification response 410 427 severity 104 131 134 135 275 299 302 382 386 389 498 exit CLU 210 expand logical drive 169 247 export configuration script 82 user database 107 F Fibre Channel cable connections 25 32 connection problems 406 data connections 26 31 definitions 254 HBA card 26 28 31 Fibre Channel cont
143. 6 To make IPv6 settings manually on the management port 1 Press the arrow keys to highlight IP Address 2 Press the backspace key to erase the current IP address 3 Type the new Management Port IP address 4 Follow the same procedure to specify the Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address and DNS Server IP Address If you do not have a DNS server skip the DNS Server IP address 5 Press Control A to save your settings and move to the Maintenance Mode screens Maintenance Mode Settings For information on maintenance mode see page 395 You have the option to make maintenance mode settings at a later time in WebPAM PROe Under Quick Setup maintenance mode settings are made in the following sequence 1 Controller 1 IPv4 2 Controller 1 IPv6 3 Controller 2 IPv4 4 Controller 2 IPv6 Making Maintenance Mode Settings Automatically Automatic settings require a DHCP server on your network DHCP is currently supported on IPv4 only 57 VTrak E Class Product Manual To enable automatic maintenance mode settings 1 oP Oh From the CLU Main Menu highlight Network Management and press Enter Highlight Maintenance Mode Network Configuration and press Enter Highlight the controller you want and press Enter Highlight DHCP and press the spacebar to toggle to Enabled Press Control A to save your settings and move to the Maintenance Mode IPv6 settings screen Making Maintenance Mode Settings Manually under
144. 7 iSCSI with JBOD Expansion page 39 Fibre Channel SAN Important For a list of supported HBAs Switches and SFP transceivers download the latest compatibility list from PROMISE support http www promise com support For multipathing MPIO applications see Mi z e Appendix B Multipathing on Windows on page 363 e Appendix C Multipathing on Linux on page 385 Figure 10 FC data and management ports on the RAID controller Management port SAS expansion port UPS IOIOI A o Li 1 A son VTrak RAID subsystem 25 VTrak E Class Product Manual A Fibre Channel storage area network SAN requires An FC HBA card in each host PC or server An SFP transceiver for each connected FC port on the subsystem An FC switch A network switch Data Path To establish the data path 1 Connect FC cables between at least one FC data port on each RAID controller and the FC switch See Figure 11 Connect FC cables between the FC switch and the FC HBA cards in both host PCs or servers If you have multiple VTrak subsystems repeat steps 1 and 2 as required Figure 11 FC SAN data connections Host PCs or servers oe Law FC HBA cards m FC switch B FC port on FC port on controller 1 controller 2
145. 7 WebPAM PROe 60 69 log out CLI 210 WebPAM PROe 68 74 logged in devices Fibre Channel 252 logical drive check tables 164 244 create manually 165 242 delete 166 243 expand 169 247 information 163 244 initialize 168 245 LED 41 377 list 162 244 locate 167 246 LUN clone 170 248 migrate 169 247 Redundancy Check 168 246 reported events 418 419 settings 166 245 statistics 164 244 synchronization 122 274 LUN cloning 170 248 VTrak E Class Product Manual LUN map change map type 183 282 delete 182 281 edit 182 281 list 180 279 map LUN to initiator 181 182 280 map LUN to port 181 182 280 map LUN to target 181 182 280 LUN masking amp mapping enable 183 277 M MAC address 45 maintenance mode controller 395 settings 50 57 101 251 management port connection problems 406 default IP addresses 45 406 settings 100 250 manual rebuild 160 Media Patrol enable 235 reported events 419 run 211 running 158 236 settings 118 medium error threshold physical drives 225 migrate logical drive 169 247 reported events 423 424 settings 121 mixing SATA and SAS drives 231 monitoring with VTrak Monitor 495 N Netsend recipients 301 requirements 301 service 301 settings 132 301 NIC iSCSI 35 37 node Fibre Channel 184 252 NTP settings 213 synchronizing 214 NVRAM event log 136 276 382 O online capacity expansion defined 347 reported events 419 420 online help CLU 209 operati
146. 91 05 com microsoft promise 29353b7 Obtain the initiator name from the initiator utility on your host system Note that the initiator name you input must match exactly in order for the connection to work Click the Submit button The initiator is added to the list 179 VTrak E Class Product Manual Managing LUNs LUN management includes e Viewing a List of LUN Maps below e LUN Mapping and Masking page 180 Adding a LUN Map page 180 e Editing a LUN Map page 182 e Deleting a LUN Map page 182 e Changing the Active LUN Map Type page 182 e Enabling and Disabling LUN Masking page 183 Viewing a List of LUN Maps To view a list of LUN maps 1 Click the Storage tab 2 Click the LUN Mapping amp Masking icon The list of LUN maps appears LUN Mapping and Masking This feature applies to Fibre Channel and iSCSI subsystems and controls user access to storage resources LUN Mapping Maps LUNs to an initiators so that the initiator can only access only the specified LUNs e LUN Masking The process of applying a LUN Map To access LUN mapping 1 Click the Storage tab 2 Click the LUN Masking amp Mapping icon On this screen you can Add an FC or iSCSI initiator to the VTrak s initiator list e Enable LUN masking e Mapa LUN to one or more initiators targets or ports Adding a LUN Map For FC systems you can set up an Initiator or Port type LUN map For iSCSI systems you can s
147. A to save the spare drive Making Spare Drive Settings To change spare drive settings 1 4 5 6 From the Main Menu highlight Spare Drive Management and press Enter A list of the current spare drives appears including the following parameters Highlight the spare drive you want to change and press Enter Highlight the setting you want to change e Revertible A revertible drive can be returned to spare status after you replace the failed drive in a disk array See Transition on page 356 for more information e Type Dedicated means this spare drive can only be used with the specified disk arrays Global means this spare drive can be used by any disk array Press the spacebar to toggle between the choices For dedicated spares type the array number the spare is assigned to Press Control A to save your settings Running Spare Check To run Spare Check 1 From the Main Menu highlight Spare Drive Management and press Enter A list of the current spare drives appears Highlight the spare drive you want to check and press Enter Highlight Start Spare Check and press Enter The results appear next to Spare Check Status in the same window Healthy means normal 240 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Deleting a Spare Drive Caution If the spare drive you delete is the only spare the controller does not rebuild a critical array until you provide a new spare drive To delete a spare driv
148. AID subsystem export it and then import it to automatically configure your other VTrak RAID subsystems Caution Importing a user database overwrites the current users and user settings on your VTrak subsystem To import a user database 1 e Click the Administration tab Click the Import Export icon Click the Import option Choose User Database from the Type dropdown menu Click the Browse button and navigate to the user database file and click the OK button Click the Next button The system verifies that the file is a valid user database and displays any errors or warnings Click the Submit button to continue In the Confirmation box type the word confirm in the field provided and click the Confirm button The user database is imported and applied automatically 106 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Exporting a User Database You can save the user information and settings from one VTrak RAID subsystem export it and then import it to automatically configure your other VTrak RAID subsystems To export a user database Click the Administration tab Click the Import Export icon Click the Export option Choose User Database from the Type dropdown menu Click the Submit button In the Open dialog box click the Save File option then click the OK button The file is saved to your PC as User dat D Mi P oN gt Note The user database file is not designed to be open
149. AM PROe access in VTrak Monitor 499 access over the Internet 68 Discovery tab 75 interface 72 language 70 log in 60 69 log out 68 74 no browser connection 408 problem reporting 385 storage network 75 username and password 60 70 wizard 151 write thru cache 362 writeback cache 362 Z zoning reported events 427 511 VTrak E Class Product Manual 512
150. Assign Portal to Target button In the Assign Portal to Target list click the portal you want to un assign then click the gt button Choose additional portals as needed When you are done choosing portals click the Next button Click the Submit button Viewing a List of iSCSI Portals To view a list of iSCSI portals 1 2 Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon 192 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Click the Portal tab Portal information includes ID Portal number Starts at 0 IP Address IP address of the portal Controller ID RAID controller ID 1 or 2 Port ID Physical port on the RAID controller 1 to 4 Trunk ID Trunk ID 1 to 8 Refers to portals associated with a trunk link aggregation N A means this portal is not assciated with a trunk VLAN Tag VLAN Tag 0 to 4094 Refers to portals associated with a Virtual Local Area Network VLAN N A means this portal is not associated with a VLAN Viewing iSCSI Portal Information To view information about a portal Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Portal tab Click the portal you want then click the View button 1 2 3 4 Portal information includes Portal ID Portal number Starts at 0 Trunk ID 1 to 8 Refers to portals associated with a trunk link aggregation N A means this portal is not assciated with a trunk Controller ID RAID controller I
151. C or iSCSI initiator add the initiator first See Adding an Initiator on page 278 LUN mapping must be enabled in order to map a LUN See Enabling LUN Mapping on page 277 Mapping a LUN to an FC Initiator or Port To map a LUN to an FC initiator or port 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter 2 Highlight LUN Mapping and press Enter 3 Do one of the following actions e Highlight LUN Mapping Initiators and press Enter Then highlight an initiator and press Enter e Highlight LUN Mapping Ports and press Enter Then highlight a port and press Enter A list of logical drives displays 4 Inthe LUN field press the backspace key to erase the current value then type the LUN you want to assign to this initiator from 0 to 255 Each logical drive can have only one LUN and must have a unique LUN If you make a error press Control AR to restore the current LUN 5 Press Control A to save the LUN map Mapping a LUN to an iSCSI Initiator or Target To map a LUN to an iSCSI initiator or target 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter 2 Highlight LUN Mapping and press Enter 3 Do one of the following actions e Highlight LUN Mapping Initiators and press Enter Then highlight an initiator and press Enter 280 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU 5 e Highlight LUN Mapping Targets and press Enter Then highlight a target
152. CSI Targets on page 190 or page 259 Assign the new portal with VLAN assocation to the target See Assigning a Portal to an iSCSI Target on page 192 The CLU assigns portals when you add the target See page 259 Map the target to a LUN See Adding a LUN Map on page 180 or page 280 Connect your iSCSI data cable to the iSCSI port you chose for the new portal See iSCSI Storage Area Network SAN on page 34 Add your iSCSI intiators to the VTrak s initiator list See Adding an iSCSI Initiator on page 178 or page 278 For information see Managing iSCSI Connections on page 188 or page 257 Visit the Promise Knowledgebase at http kb promise com and access topic 10188 Setting up Microsoft iSCSI Initiator With the VTrak 368 Chapter 7 Technology Background Figure 10 iSCSI VLAN map L Building A S Building B N SS Network router Network router a Network switch To switch To switch To switch Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet a e e le A Bound to Bound to Bound to Bound to N Portal 1 Portal 2 Portal 3 Portal 4 Initiator An initiator functions as the client in this case your host PC or server The initiator makes requests to and receives responses from an iSCSI target on the VTrak RAID subsystem 369 VTrak E Class Product Manual Each initiator has a unique iSCSI qualified name IQN You sp
153. Connection Problems page 405 e Power Cycling the Subsystem page 409 e Event Notification Response page 410 VTrak is Beeping VTrak s alarm has five different patterns as shown below Figure 1 Audible alarm sound patterns 18 amp 1x 25s 5s 25s NRN O s C oO 5 a gt When you first power up the VTrak it beeps twice to show normal operation See pattern 1 in Figure 1 The audible alarm sounds at other times to inform you that the VTrak needs attention But the alarm does not specify the condition When the alarm sounds e Check the front and back of VTrak enclosure for red or amber LEDs e f email notification is enabled check for new messages 375 VTrak E Class Product Manual Check for yellow red X icons Check the event log See Viewing Runtime Events on page 382 and Viewing NVRAM Events on page 382 When a continuous tone sounds there are multiple alarm patterns sounding at the same time Silencing the Buzzer Caution This action disables the buzzer for all events To silence the buzzer 1 aoe wN Click the Device tab Click the Component List icon Click the Buzzer and click the Settings button Uncheck the Enable Buzzer box Click the Save button 376 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting LEDs Display Amber or Red LEDs are used on VTrak s Front Panel LEDs page 377 Drive Carrier LEDs page 378 Back P
154. D 1 or 2 VLAN Tag 0 to 4094 Refers to portals associated with a Virtual Local Area Network VLAN N A means this portal is not associated with a VLAN Port ID Physical port on the RAID controller 1 to 4 Interface Name Ethernet interface names Associated Type PHY VLAN or Trunk DHCP Enabled or disabled DHCP is currently supported only for IPv4 TCP Port Number TCP port number 3260 is the default and recommended number Assigned Targets IDs of the targets to which this Portal is assigned N A means no target is assigned See Adding iSCSI Targets on page 190 and Assigning a Portal to an iSCSI Target on page 192 193 VTrak E Class Product Manual Items marked with an asterisk are adjustable under Making iSCSI Portal Settings on page 194 Adding iSCSI Portals VTrak supports up to 32 iSCSI portals per iSCSI port Each iSCSI portal can belong to a different VLAN for a maximum of 32 VLANs If you plan to associate the new portal with a trunk create the trunk first See Adding iSCSI Trunks on page 197 For more information about iSCSI VLANs see iSCSI on a VLAN on page 368 To add a portal Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Portal tab Click the Create Portal button Make your choices and inputs as required 1 Oh PO Choose an Association type from the option list The choices are PHY Trunk or VLAN
155. D Information page 94 Viewing Power Supply Status page 94 Viewing Fan Status page 94 Viewing Temperature Sensor Status page 95 Viewing Voltage Sensor Status page 95 Viewing Enclosure Topology This feature displays the connection topology of the VTrak subsystem Topology refers to the manner in which the data paths among the enclosures are connected There are three methods Individual Subsystem A single subsystem JBOD Expansion Managed through one subsystem or head unit RAID Subsystem Cascading Managed through one subsystem or head unit For more information about connections see Making Management and Data Connections on page 25 To view enclosure topology 1 2 Click the Device tab Click the Topology icon The topology or data connections of your system displays Viewing the Enclosures Summary Enclosure Management includes information status settings and location To access Enclosure Management 1 2 Click the Device tab Click the Component List icon The following information is shown e Enclosure ID number e Status e Enclosure Type e Status Description specific components in need of attention if any 92 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Locating an Enclosure To locate an enclosure 1 Click the Device tab 2 Click the Component List icon 3 Click the enclosure you want then click the Locate button The enclosure LEDs blink for one minute
156. D subsystem 1 Manually turn ON the power supply switches on the back of the subsystem 2 Wait no less than two minutes 3 Open your browser and log into WebPAM PROe If you cannot log in immediately wait 30 seconds and try again 84 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Managing RAID Controllers RAID controller management includes Viewing Controller Information below Making Controller Settings page 86 Viewing Controller Statistics page 87 Locating a Controller page 88 Viewing the Flash Image Information page 88 Updating Firmware on a RAID Subsystem page 89 Viewing Battery Information page 89 Reconditioning a Battery page 90 Making Buzzer Settings page 91 Silencing the Buzzer page 91 Viewing Controller Information To view controller information 1 2 3 Click the Device tab Click the Component List icon Click the controller you want then click the View button Controller information includes e Controller ID e Alias If assigned e Readiness Status e Operational Status Power On Time SCSI Protocol Supported Part Number Serial Number e Hardware Revision WWN Worldwide Number Cache Usage Percentage Dirty Cache Usage Percentage Boot Loader Version Firmware Version Firmware Build Date e Software Version e Software Build Date Click the Advanced Information tab 85 VTrak E Class Product Manual Advanced controller
157. Enter Highlight Migration and press Enter Highlight the physical drives you want to add and press the spacebar to choose them Notes e You can add physical drives to a RAID 50 or 60 array but you cannot change the number of axles e Ifyou add an odd number of physical drives to a RAID 10 array it becomes a RAID 1E array by default Highlight Save Settings and Continue and press Enter Highlight a logical drive in the list that you want to migrate and press Enter Highlight RAID Level and press the spacebar to toggle through the available RAID levels Optional If you want to increase capacity of the logical drive highlight Expand Capacity and press the spacebar to toggle to Yes Highlight Capacity press the backspace key to erase the current capacity and type in the new value The new value must be equal or larger than the current capacity Highlight Save Logical Drive and press Enter The screen returns to Disk Array Migration Logical Drives At this point if you have other logical drives in the same disk array you can choose them for migration at the same time Highlight Complete Disk Array Migration and press Enter 247 VTrak E Class Product Manual 12 Press Y to confirm The screen returns to Disk Arrays Summary For migration rate see Making Background Activity Settings on page 273 Creating a LUN Clone A LUN clone is an exact copy of the original LUN or logical drive including all the
158. HAP you want then click the Delete button Click the Confirm button The CHAP is removed from the list Pinging a Host or Server on the iSCSI Network This function enables you to ping other network nodes through any one of the VTrak s iSCSI ports 202 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe To ping a host or server on the network 1 of ON Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Ping tab Type the IP address of the host or server into the IP Address field Choose the port Type from the dropdown menu iSCSI means an iSCSI port Mgmt means the VTrak s virtual management port If you chose iSCSI port choose the RAID controller and port number from the dropdown menus Type the number of packets you want to send in the Number of Package to Ping field Four packets are commonly used for a ping Click the Start button In a few moments the result displays under the Device tab as Ping succeeded or Ping failed 203 VTrak E Class Product Manual 204 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU This chapter covers the following topics Initial Connection page 206 Managing the Subsystem page 211 Managing the RAID Controllers page 215 Managing the Enclosure page 219 Managing Physical Drives page 225 Managing Disk Arrays page 229 Managing Spare Drives page 239 Managing Logical Drives page 242 Managing the Network Connection page 250 Managing Fibre Ch
159. Highlight LDAP Management and press Enter The LDAP Settings screen appears Highlight Role Mapping and press Enter The list of roles appears Highlight the role you want to delete and press the Spacebar to mark it Highlight Delete Marked Roles and press Enter Press Y to confirm 294 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Working with Software Management Software Management includes the following functions Making Email Settings page 295 Making SLP Settings page 296 Making Web Server Settings page 296 Making Telnet Settings page 297 Making SSH Settings page 297 Making SNMP Settings page 298 Managing SNMP Trap Sinks page 298 Making CIM Settings page 299 Making Netsend Settings page 301 Managing Netsend Recipients page 301 Making Email Settings By default Email service is set to Automatic and its normal status is Started To make Email service settings 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight Software Management and press Enter Highlight Email and press Enter Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic and Manual Highlight the following and press the backspace key to erase the current value then type the new value e SMTP server IP address or server name Server Port number 25 is the default Highlight Authentication and press the spacebar to toggle between Yes and No If you selected Yes
160. Information These functions affect both VTrak Fibre Channel ports 1 From the Main Menu highlight Fibre Channel Management and press Enter Highlight Fibre Channel Node and press Enter Node information appears There are no user settings on this screen Viewing Fibre Channel Port Information To view Fibre Channel port information 1 From the Main Menu highlight Fibre Channel Management and press Enter Highlight Fibre Channel Ports and press Enter Highlight the port you want and press Enter Viewing Fibre Channel Logged in Devices To view a list of logged in devices 1 From the Main Menu highlight Fibre Channel Management and press Enter Highlight Fibre Channel Ports and press Enter Highlight the port you want and press Enter Highlight Logged In Devices and press Enter If a Fibre Channel switch is attached it also appears in this list 252 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Making Fibre Channel Port Settings To make Fibre Channel port settings 1 a Fon 7 Enter the choices From the Main Menu highlight Fibre Channel Management and press Highlight Fibre Channel Ports and press Enter Highlight the port you want and press Enter Highlight Fibre Channel Port Settings and press Enter Highlight the following parameters and press the spacebar to toggle though e Configured Link Speed 8 Gb s 4 Gb s 2 Gb s or Automatic selection Configured Topology N
161. L Port Arbitrated Loop N Port Point to Point or Automatic selection value then type the new value The range is 0 to 255 255 disables this feature Highlight Hard ALPA and press the backspace key to erase the current Press Control A to save your settings The table below shows the type of attached topology you achieve based on your connection type and the configured topology you choose Fibre Channel Attached Topology Configured Topology Connection Type N Port NL Port Switch Fabric Direct Public Loop Direct Point to Point Private Loop Example 1 If you connect the VTrak to a Fibre Channel switch and choose NL Port topology you create a Public Loop attached topology Example 2 If you have a Point to Point attached topology you made a direct connection no switch and chose N port topology Note In some cases HBA settings to N Port only work if connected to the switch Refer to your HBA manual for more information 253 VTrak E Class Product Manual Viewing Fibre Channel Port Statistics To view Fibre Channel port statistics 1 From the Main Menu highlight Fibre Channel Management and press Enter 2 Highlight Fibre Channel Ports and press Enter Highlight the port you want and press Enter 3 Highlight Fibre Channel Port Statistics and press Enter Viewing SFP Information To view information about the SFPs small form factor pluggable transceivers 1 From the Mai
162. Management and press Enter 2 Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter 3 Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter 4 Highlight Voltage Sensors and press Enter If any voltage is outside the Healthy Threshold values there is a voltage malfunction in the enclosure See Diagnosing an Enclosure Problem on page 391 Viewing Battery Information This feature enables you monitor and recondition the subsystem battery or batteries 1 From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter Highlight Batteries and press Enter Highlight the battery you want to monitor and press Enter DP Wu N Battery Notes If a battery does not reflect normal conditions and it is not currently under reconditioning run the Recondition function before you replace the battery See Reconditioning a Battery on page 223 Reconditioning fully discharges then fully recharges the battery During reconditioning if the Adaptive Writeback Cache function is enabled the controller cache is set to Write Thru After reconditioning the cache is reset to Write Back See Making Controller Settings on page 216 If a battery reaches the threshold temperature while charging or discharging the charge or discharge pauses and the blower runs at high speed until the battery temperature falls below the threshold If the battery does not
163. O Removal Settings To change PDO removal settings 1 Do one of the following actions e Click the Advanced Settings icon From the Operations menu choose Advanced Settings The Advanced Settings dialog box appears with the MPIO Parameters tab displayed Click the arrows or type a new value in the PDO Remove Period field to change the interval 120 seconds is the PROMISE recommended default value Click the Apply button Click the OK button in the confirmation box The new setting takes effect immediately See also Path Verification on page 462 463 VTrak E Class Product Manual Performance Tab Refresh Rate Refresh Rate refers to the number of seconds between refreshes of the data reported on the Performance tab Changing Refresh Rate Settings To change the refresh rate on the Performance tab 1 Do one of the following actions e Click the Advanced Settings icon e From the Operations menu choose Advanced Settings The Advanced Settings dialog box appears with the MPIO Parameters tab displayed 2 Click the General tab 3 Under Refresh Rate click the arrows or type a new value in the Seconds field to change the interval 5 seconds is the default value 4 Click the Apply button The new setting takes effect immediately See also Viewing LUN Performance Statistics on page 456 Viewing Path Performance Statistics on page 457 Round Robin Count When you
164. On the SMART Log Seitings tab e Check the box to enable the SMART log Click the Save button Viewing Physical Drive Statistics To view physical drive statistics 1 2 3 4 Click the Device tab Click the Physical Drive icon Click the physical drive you want then click the View button Click the Statistics tab Physical drive statistics include e Data Transferred e Read Data Transferred e Write Data Transferred e Errors Number of errors e Non Read Write Errors e Read Errors e Write Errors e I O Request Number of requests e Non Read Write Request Number of requests e Read I O Request Number of requests e Write I O Request Number of requests e Statistics Start Time Time and date e Statistics Collection Time Time and date e Avg Response Time Ctrl 1 Controller 1 average response time 144 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Avg Response Time Ctrl 2 Controller 2 average response time Max Response Time Cirl 1 Controller 1 maximum response time Max Response Time Ctrl 2 Controller 2 maximum response time To clear physical drive statistics see Clearing Statistics on page 79 Viewing Physical Drive SMART Log Information To view physical drive SMART Log information Click the Device tab Click the Physical Drive icon Click the physical drive you want then click the View button Click the SMART Log tab SMART Log i
165. PAM PROe A detailed explanation of iSCSI functions and how to best use them is beyond the scope of this document For more information contact the Internet Engineering Task Force at http Awww iettf org Making Global iSCSI Settings This setting enables and disables the Keep Alive feature on all iSCSI sessions You can also enable and disable Keep Alive on individual sessions See page 200 To make global iSCSI settings 1 2 3 4 5 Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Global iSCSI Settings button Check the box to enable the Keep Alive feature Uncheck the box to disable Click the Submit button Viewing a List of iSCSI Targets A target is a logical drive on the VTrak subsystem The default target exposes all logical drives and is associated with all portals on the subsystem To view a list of iSCSI targets 1 2 3 Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Target tab Target information includes e ID ID number of the target e Alias If assigned e Assigned Portals Portals assigned under this target Viewing iSCSI Target Information To view information about a target 1 2 3 4 Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Target tab Click the target you want then click the View button Target information includes e ID ID number of the target 189 VTrak E Class Product Manual Na
166. PROMISE TECHNOLOGY INC VIRAK EdasSs E30 E6301 1 ersion VTrak E Class Product Manual Copyright 2011 PROMISE Technology Inc All Rights Reserved PROMISE the PROMISE logo VTrak SmartStor SuperTrak FastTrak VessRAID Vess PerfectPATH PerfectRAID SATA150 ULTRA133 VTrak S3000 BackTrak HyperCache HyperCache R HyperCache W DeltaScan and GreenRAID are registered or pending trademarks of PROMISE Technology Inc in the U S and other countries All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Information regarding products services and offerings may be superseded by subsequent documents and are subject to change without notice For the latest information and specifications regarding PROMISE Technology Inc and any of its offerings or services please contact your local PROMISE office or the corporate headquarters Visit www promise com for more information on PROMISE products Important data protection information You should back up all data before installing any drive controller or storage peripheral PROMISE Technology is not responsible for any loss of data resulting from the use disuse or misuse of this or any other PROMISE Technology product Notice Although PROMISE Technology has attempted to ensure the accuracy of the content of this document it is possible that this document may contain technical inaccuracies typographical or other errors PROMISE Technology assumes no liability
167. Product Manual iSCSI Storage Area Network SAN Important For a list of supported HBA NICs and switches download the latest compatibility list from PROMISE support http www promise com support For multipathing MPIO applications see e Appendix B Multipathing on Windows on page 363 e Appendix C Multipathing on Linux on page 385 Mi 5 Figure 17 iSCSI data and management ports on the RAID controller iSCSI data ports 2 4 i Management port Mint 10101 lt L o SAS EXP o SED oN E SAS expansion port VTrak RAID subsystem This arrangement requires e AniSCSI HBA network interface card NIC in the host PC or server e A GbE network switch A standard network switch 34 Chapter 2 Installation Data Path Each VTrak RAID controller has four 4 RJ45 iSCSI data port connectors See page 34 Figure 17 To establish the data path 1 Connect Ethernet cables between the iSCSI NIC in both host PCs or servers and the GbE network switch See Figure 19 2 Connect an Ethernet cable between at least one iSCSI data port on the left RAID controller and the GbE network switch 3 Connect an Ethernet cable between at least one iSCSI data port on the right RAID controller a
168. Promise VTrak E6301 2000 0001 5560 006 e Subsytems with a check have been added to VTrak Monitor To add a subsystem tap the subsystem When you are finished tap the Done button The available subsystems appear on the Home screen See page 493 Figure 2 492 Using VTrak Monitor Figure 2 Home screen VTrak Monitor 192 168 10 143 Up time 99 hr 16 min Status icon Subsystem IP address Uptime Model and type Tap anywhere in the box to display the Summary screen The Status 5 g or g icon indicates that the subsystem is connected For more information on these icons see Top Level Monitoring on page 495 and Troubleshooting on page 499 Viewing a VTrak Subsystem To view a VTrak subsystem from the Home screen tap the VTrak subsystem See above Figure 2 The Summary screen appears See Figure 3 Figure 3 Summary screen g w 9 3 g 3 3 E g 2 g u g 9 g 7 2 493 VTrak E Class Product Manual Deleting a VTrak Subsystem One at a Time To delete one subsystem from VTrak Monitor 1 Click the Home a icon to go to the Home screen 2 To expose the Delete button touch and drag the right edge of the VTrak box to the left Figure 4 Delete button Delete button 192 168 10 143 Up time 99 h 3 Tap the Delete button The subsystem is deleted from VTrak Monitor All Subsystems at Once To delete all subsystems from VTrak Monitor 1 C
169. R Be GOIN a PROMISE Technical Support prepares the new RAID controller with firmware and SDRAM to match the existing RAID controller in your VTrak subsystem 445 VTrak E Class Product Manual Installing a Second RAID Controller To install a second RAID controller in your VTrak subsystem 1 2 3 Shut down the subsystem Remove the blank cover from the right RAID controller slot Carefully slide the new RAID controller into the slot until the handle locks in place Attach your data and management cables to the new controller as needed See the Making Management and Data Connections on page 19 for cable connection information Power up the subsystem and launch WebPAM PROe In WebPAM PROe click the Dashboard tab and look under System Status e Ifthe new controller has a green check icon the installation is completed Go to New Settings for Dual Controllers on page 447 e Ifthe new controller has a yellow icon one of the RAID controllers went into maintenance mode because its firmware or memory do not match the other RAID controller See RAID Controller in Maintenance Mode below RAID Controller in Maintenance Mode To manage a RAID controller in maintenance mode 1 2 3 4 Click the Administration tab Click the Firmware Update icon Click the Controller Firmware Update option Compare the Firmware version on Controller 1 and Controller 2 e Ifthe firmware versions are
170. SCSI session information includes Session ID ID number of the session Status Active or inactive Initiator Name SCSI qualified name iqn Portal IP IP address of the portal Device Type Initiator or target Target Portal Group ID number TSIH Target session identifying handle Execution Throttle Max number of outstanding commands on any one port Max Rev Data Seg Length Receive data segment length First Burst Length In bytes Default Time to Wait In seconds Immediate Data Enabled or disabled Header Digest Enabled or disabled CHAP Authentication Type None Local Peer Keep Alive Enabled or disabled Portal ID ID number of the portal Target Alias Target Name iSCSI qualified name iqn Initiator IP IP address of the initiator Initiator Source Port ID number ISID Initiator session ID number Max Outstanding R2T Number of PDUs ready to transfer Max Burst Length In bytes Default Time to Retain In seconds Initial R2T Enabled or disabled Data Digest Enabled or disabled Data PDU in Order Enabled or disabled Data Seq in Order Enabled or disabled Device Access Control Enabled or disabled 267 VTrak E Class Product Manual Viewing iSCSI iSNS Information Internet Storage Name Service iSNS is a protocol used to facilitate the automated discovery management and configuration of iSC
171. SH settings 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight Software Management and press Enter Highlight SSH and press Enter Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic and Manual Highlight the following and press the backspace key to erase the current value then type the new value e Port number 22 is the default e Session Time Out 24 minutes is the default 1440 minutes 24 hours e Maximum number of connections 4 is the default Press Control A to save your settings 297 VTrak E Class Product Manual Making SNMP Settings By default Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP service is set to Automatic and its normal status is Started To make SNMP service settings 1 6 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight Software Management and press Enter Highlight SNMP and press Enter Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic and Manual Highlight the following and press the backspace key to erase the current value then type the new value e Port Number 161 is the default e System Name optional Type a system name in this field e System Location Type a country name in this field e System Contact Type the email address of your system administrator in this field e Read Community Type a community name in t
172. SI and Fibre Channel devices on a TCP IP network To view iSNS information 1 2 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI iSNS Options and press Enter The current iSNS options appear Information includes ISNS Enabled or disabled iSNSIPAddress IP address of the iSNS server iSNSPort ISNS port number 1 to 65535 3205 is the default and recommended number Items marked with an asterisk are adjustable under Making iSCSI Portal Settings on page 265 Making iSCSI iSNS Settings To make iSNS settings 1 2 OP ID From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI iSNS Options and press Enter The current iSNS options appear Highlight iSNS Settings and press Enter Highlight iSNS and press the Spacebar to toggle between Enable and Disable If you chose Enable Enter an IP address Enter a Port number 3205 is the default and recommended number To change a value highlight the item press Backspace to delete the current value and type a new value Highlight Save Settings and press Enter Press Y to acknowledge possible interruption of iSCSI services Press Y again to confirm the changes Highlight Return to Previous Menu and press Enter to return to the portal list Viewing a List of iSCSI CHAPs Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP is an authentication mechanism used to authenticate iSCSI ses
173. Settings page 266 Deleting an iSCSI Session page 266 Viewing iSCSI Session Information page 267 Viewing iSCSI iSNS Information page 268 Making iSCSI iSNS Settings page 268 Viewing a List of iSCSI CHAPs page 268 Adding iSCSI CHAPs page 269 Making iSCSI CHAP Settings page 269 Deleting iSCSI CHAPs page 270 Pinging a Host or Server on the iSCSI Network page 270 Viewing a List of iSCSI Trunks page 270 Adding iSCSI Trunks page 271 Making iSCSI Trunk Settings page 271 Deleting iSCSI Trunks page 272 Also see Adding an Initiator on page 278 and iSCSI Management on page 366 257 VTrak E Class Product Manual A detailed explanation of iSCSI functions how and when they are used and their relationship to one another is beyond the scope of this document For more information contact the Internet Engineering Task Force at http www ietf org Making Global iSCSI Settings Keep Alive recovers from intermittent disconnects that interrupt your iSCSI session To make global iSCSI settings 1 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter 2 Highlight Global iSCSI Settings and press Enter 3 Highlight KeepAlive and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and Disabled 4 Highlight Save Global Settings and press Enter 5 Press Y to confirm Viewing a List of iSCSI Targets A target is a logical drive on the VTrak subsystem The default target exposes all logical drives and is
174. To change your password 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter 288 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU DaN 7 8 Highlight User Management and press Enter Highlight your name and press Enter Highlight Change Password and press Enter Highlight Old Password and type your current password Highlight New Password and type a new password Maximum 31 characters Use letters numbers and underscore Highlight Retype Password and type the new password again to verify Press Control A to save the new password Deleting a User The Administrator or a Super User can delete other users You cannot delete the account you used to log in There must always be one Super User account Rather than deleting a user consider disabling a user account See Changing Another User s Settings on page 287 To delete a user 1 2 Log in under a user name other than the one you want to delete From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight User Management and press Enter Highlight the user you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark it The mark is an asterisk to the left of the listing Highlight Delete Marked Users and press Enter Press Y to confirm the deletion 289 VTrak E Class Product Manual Managing LDAP LDAP Management includes the following functions Viewing LDAP Information page 290 Maki
175. To make Fibre Channel port settings 1 Click the Device tab Click the FC Management icon Click the Port tab Click the FC port you want to access and click the Settings button a Fon Make these changes as required Choose a configured link speed from the dropdown menu The choices are Auto default 2 Gb s 4 Gb s and 8 Gb s e Choose a topology from the dropdown menu e Enter a Hard ALPA in the field provided Enter 255 to disable Hard ALPA 6 Click the Save button Port Setting Information The table below shows the type of attached topology you achieve based on your connection type and the configured topology you select Fibre Channel Attached Topology Configured Topology Connection Type N Port NL Port Switch Fabric Direct Public Loop Direct Point to Point Private Loop Example 1 If you connect the VTrak to an FC switch and choose NL Port topology you create a Public Loop attached topology Example 2 If you have a Point to Point attached topology you made a direct connection no FC switch and selected N port topology Note In some cases HBA settings to N Port only work if connected to the switch Refer to your HBA manual for more information 185 VTrak E Class Product Manual Viewing FC Port Statistics To view Fibre Channel port statistics 1 Click the Device tab 2 Click the FC Management icon 3 Click the Statistics tab 4 Mouse over the FC port you want to
176. Troubleshooting If you see no LUNs in the PerfectPath GUI or no Multi Path Disk Devices under Disk drives see Figure 3 do the following actions e Verify that there is at least one logical drive on the VTrak e Check your HBA cards and driver installation e Check your data connections Make any needed corrections and reboot your Host PC as needed Figure 3 Device manager window E Server Manager laxi Fie Acton View Help 9 AmHE A 1 P NG Ta Server Manager X30PERF 1 Roles ail Features E ji Diagnostics f Event viewer E Performance S 2h Device Manager at Configuration E3 Storage Device Manager Ea XB0PERF 1 gm Computer E ga Disk drives a Disk drive Promise VTrak E630f Multi Path Disk Display adapters O55 Human Interface Devices Gg IDE ATA ATAPI controllers lt 2 Keyboards A Mice and other pointing devices W Monitors E Network adapters 1 Ports COM amp LPT a Processors lt gt Storage controllers W System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers 467 VTrak E Class Product Manual Updating PerfectPath To update your PerfectPath software to the latest version 1 Download the new PerfectPath installation file from PROMISE support http www promise com support and save the installation file to your Windows desktop 2 Manually remove the current PerfectPath installation See Removing PerfectPath on page 470 3 Insta
177. Unconfigured 464 73 GB 387 VTrak E Class Product Manual Storage Tab e Disk Arrays Disk Array Offline Disk Array Rebuilding amp Disk Array Create Disk Array eu H Capacity Free Capacity Media Patrol Number of LDs o 464 73 GB 0 Byte Enabled 2 ie 271 95 GB 198 61 GB Enabled 4 DA 2 Offline 138 77 GB 0 Byte Enabled 2 e Logical Drives Logical Drive Rebuilding Logical Drive Offline Cache Policy Capacity RAID Level Stripe i i Array ID 1GB RAIDO 64 KB ReadAhead WriteBack DA 1GB RAIDO 64 KB ReadAhead WriteBack DA 1GB RAID1 64 KB ReadAhead WriteBack DA LD3 o 1GB RAID1 64 KB ReadAhead WriteBack DA LD 4 o 1GB RAID5 64 KB ReadAhead WriteBack DA LD5 o 1GB RAID5 64 KB ReadAhead WriteBack DA LD6 o 1GB RAIDS 64 KB ReadAhead WriteBack DA LD7 o 1GB RAIDS 64 KB ReadAhead WriteBack DA 388 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Administration Tab Events icon Description 10 LDO 0x00080000 Info Nov 15 2010 14 05 39 Logical drive Initialization has 12 Ctrl 1 0x00040011 Info stopped 13 Ctrl 1 0x00040036 Info Nov 15 2010 14 06 16 Fail Over is triggered on the controler 14 Ctrl 1 0x00040025 Critical Nov 15 2010 14 06 17 Controler Failed Over as partner is removed 15 Subsys 0x0011000C Major Nov 15 2010 14 06 21 System is set to Critical mode 16 Ctrl 1 0x00040010 Info Nov 15 2010 14
178. Us due to enclosure or controller temperature over threshold Shut down the VTrak and see Enclosure Problems on page 391 Event Log Event logging is enabled Event logging is disabled Event log buffer is cleared in RAM Event log buffer is cleared in NVRAM Event log buffer is cleared in MDD No action is required Fibre Channel Fibre Channel controller has detected bus reset If this message appears repeatedly contact Tech Support Fibre Channel controller has received a LUN reset command No action is required Fibre Channel controller has encountered a fatal error Restart the VTrak If this message appears repeatedly contact Tech Support 415 VTrak E Class Product Manual Reported Event Corrective Action Fibre Channel link is up Fibre Channel link is down Fibre Channel controller settings have changed No action is required Firmware Update Firmware update is started Firmware update is complete No action is required Firmware update is fail Try the update again If this message repeats contact Tech Support Back end expander firmware upgrade is started Back end expander firmware upgrade is completed No action is required Back end expander firmware upgrade failed Try the update again If this message repeats contact Tech Support Front end expander firmware upgrade
179. VTrak is functioning normally Can VTrak run using just one power supply Yes it is possible to run VTrak on a single power supply There are redundant power supplies so that VTrak can continue running if one of them fails But deliberately leaving one power supply off negates this advantage In addition leaving one power supply off reduces air flow through the VTrak enclosure and can contribute to overheating Always switch on both power supplies Also see 430 Chapter 9 Support What happens if a fan fails If the system reports a fan malfunction contact Technical Support see page 435 immediately to schedule replacement of the suspect power supply as soon as possible Running the unit in this condition for more than three weeks may shorten subsystem life and void your warranty What happens if a logical drive goes critical On the front of VTrak the logical drive LED turns amber and the buzzer sounds if enabled See VTrak is Beeping on page 375 and LEDs Display Amber or Red on page 377 VTrak s Netsend service does not report all events to Windows PCs This condition results from a shortcoming in Windows Messenger that causes miscommunication with Netsend PROMISE is developing a workaround at the time of this writing Note that all events are correctly reported in the Event Viewer Startup How can tell when the VTrak has fully booted When the VTrak is fully booted up the Power and FRU LEDs
180. Write data transaction of two drives used for parity rate Slightly lower performance than Good aggregate transfer rate RAID 50 e Safest RAID level Recommended Applications for RAID 60 e Accounting and Financial Database servers e Any application requiring very high availability 346 Chapter 7 Technology Background RAID Level Migration The term Migration means either or both of the following e Change the RAID level of a logical drive Expand the storage capacity of a logical drive On VTrak RAID level migration is performed on the disk array but it applies to the logical drives Migration does not disturb your data You can access the data while the migration is in progress When migration is done your disk array has a different RAID level and or a larger capacity Migration Requirements The following conditions affect RAID level migration e The disk array and logical drive must show a green check icon e The Target disk array may require more physical drives than the Source disk array e Ifthe Target disk array requires an EVEN number of physical drives but the Source disk array has an ODD number ADD a physical drive as part of the migration process e You cannot reduce the number of physical drives in your disk array even if the Target disk array requires fewer physical drives than the Source disk array e RAID 1 mirroring works with two drives only Only a single drive RAID 0 disk ar
181. Yes 4 Highlight Unlock and press Enter Setting Subsystem Date and Time Use this screen to make Date and Time settings 1 From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter 2 Highlight Modify System Date amp Time and press Enter 212 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU OV OO Highlight the System Date or System Time setting Press the backspace key to erase the current value Type in a new value Press Control A to save your settings Making NTP Settings After you have made Network Time Protocol NTP settings the VTrak subsystem synchronizes with a NTP server At startup Every night When you synchronize manually To make NTP settings for the subsystem From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter Highlight NTP Management and press Enter Highlight NTP Settings and press Enter Make the following settings as required 1 2 3 4 Highlight NTP Service and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Highlight Time Server 1 Time Server 2 or Time Server 3 and type a server name Example 0 us pool ntp org You can have up to 3 NTP servers Highlight Time Zone and press the spacebar to toggle through GMT GMT and GMT For GMT and GMT type the hour from 0 00 to 13 00 GMT for your time zone Highlight Daylight Savings Time and press the spacebar to toggle between Enable and Disable If Daylight Savings Time is Enabled hig
182. a list of iSCSI sessions 1 2 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI Sessions and press Enter iSCSI session information includes e ID ID number of the session e Target Name Alias of the target e Initiator Name Part of the IQN Portal ID ID number of the portal e Status Up or down active or inactive Making iSCSI Session Settings To change iSCSI session settings 1 2 3 4 5 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI Sessions and press Enter Highlight the session you want and press Enter Highlight KeepAlive and press the spacebar to toggle between Enable and Disable Press Control A to save your setting You can also enable and disable the Keep Alive as a global setting See page 258 Deleting an iSCSI Session To delete an iSCSI session 1 2 3 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI Sessions and press Enter Highlight the session you want delete and press the spacebar to select it and press Enter Highlight Delete iSCSI Session and press Enter Press Y to confirm 266 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Viewing iSCSI Session Information To view a list of iSCSI sessions From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI Sessions and press Enter Highlight the session you want and press Enter 1 2 3 i
183. a on the logical drive is lost Backup any important data before you initialize a logical drive To initialize a logical drive From the Main Menu highlight Logical Drive Management and press Enter 1 Highlight the logical drive you want and press Enter Highlight Background Activities and press Enter Highlight Start Initialization and press Enter The initialization parameters appear Initialization pattern The default 00000000 is best for most applications Quick Initialization Yes means only the first and last sections of the logical drives are initialized No means the entire logical drive is initialized 245 VTrak E Class Product Manual To change a parameter highlight it and press the backspace key to erase the current value then type the new value Highlight Start and press Enter If necessary you can pause and resume or stop and restart the Initialization You cannot access the logical drive until Initialization has finished For initialization rate see Making Background Activity Settings on page 273 Running Redundancy Check Redundancy Check is a maintenance procedure for logical drives in fault tolerant disk arrays that ensures all the data matches exactly To run Redundancy Check 1 From the Main Menu highlight Logical Drive Management and press Enter Highlight the logical drive you want and press Enter Highlight Background Activities and press Enter Highlight Start R
184. ables you to access the subsystem s Command Line Interface CLI through a network connection Stopping SSH Service To stop the SSH service 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the SSH service and click the Stop button 4 Click the Confirm button To start the SSH service after stopping it 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 128 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe 3 Click the SSH service and click the Start button Restarting SSH Service To restart the SSH service 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the SSH service and click the Restart button Making SSH Settings To change SSH service settings 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the SSH service and click the Settings button 4 Make settings changes as required e Choose a startup type e Automatic default Starts and runs with the subsystem e Manual You start the service when you need it Port number Default is 22 Max Number of Concurrent Connections Default is 4 Maximum number is 4 e Session Time Out Default is 24 minutes 5 Click the Save button 6 Click the Confirm button SNMP Service Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP service enables the SNMP browser to obtain information from the RAID subsystem The Trap Sink is where SNMP events are sent and can be viewed Stopping SNMP Serv
185. access and click the View button To clear FC port statistics see Clearing Statistics on page 79 Viewing a List of FC Initiators on the Fabric To view a list Fibre Channel initiators on the fabric 1 Click the Device tab 2 Click the FC Management icon 3 Click the Initiators on Fabric tab Also see Viewing a List of Initiators on page 177 Viewing a List of FC Logged in Devices Logged in devices refers to all Fibre Channel devices currently logged into the VTrak The device list includes e FC ports FC switches if attached e FC initiators To view a list FC logged in devices 1 Click the Device tab 2 Click the FC Management icon 3 Click the Logged In Device tab Viewing a List of FC SFPs The term SFP refers to Small Form Pluggable transceivers used in Fibre Channel ports The SFPs convert electrical signals to optical signals and send them over the Fibre Channel fabric where another transceiver converts the optical signal back to an electrical signal again To view a list FC SFPs 1 Click the Device tab 2 Click the FC Management icon 3 Click the SFP tab 186 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe SFP information includes FC port ID Controller ID Connector type Transceiver type Transceiver code Vendor name 187 VTrak E Class Product Manual Managing iSCSI Connections iSCSI management includes e Making Global iSCSI Settings page 189 e Viewing a List of
186. ache Backup Battery The cache backup battery also called a Battery Backup Unit BBU powers the cache to preserve data that has not been written the physical drives The battery is located inside the RAID controller Each RAID controller has its own battery Cautions e Try reconditioning the battery before you replace it See Reconditioning a Battery on page 90 or page 223 for more information e The battery assembly is replaced as a unit Do not attempt to disconnect the battery by itself e Installing the wrong replacement battery can result in an explosion e Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions that accompany the battery e While the battery is removed your system is vulnerable to data loss if the power fails while data is being written to the logical drives e If power service has failed do not remove the battery if the RAID controller s dirty cache LED is flashing See page 325 Figure 3 The cache backup battery is replaced as an assembly You do not have to power down the RAID subsystem nor disconnect any cables from the RAID controller You need a No 1 Phillips screwdriver for this procedure Removing the Old Battery To remove a battery 1 Verify that the battery LED is amber or red See page 325 Figure 3 2 Loosen and remove the set screw 3 Grasp the handle and pull the battery out of the RAID controller Installing a New Battery To install the battery 1 Carefully sl
187. agement icon 3 Click the Virtual Management Port tab 4 Click the protocol family whose settings you want to change and click the Configuration button 5 Make the following settings are needed e Check the Enable box to enable this protocol family e Check the Enable DHCP box to enable a DHCP server to make your network settings DHCP is currently supported in IPv4 only e For manual network settings type the RAID subsystem s IP address subnet mask gateway IP address and DNS server IP address into the fields provided 6 Click the Submit button Making Maintenance Mode Settings Each controller has its own IP addresses for access when the controller goes into maintenance mode For more information see Maintenance Mode on page 395 Before you change settings please see About IP Addresses on page 45 100 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe To make maintenance mode settings 1 2 3 4 Click the Device tab Click the Network Management icon Click the Maintenance Mode tab Click the controller and protocol family whose settings you want to change and click the Configuration button Make the following settings are needed e Check the Enable box to enable this protocol family e Check the Enable DHCP box to enable a DHCP server to make your network settings DHCP is currently supported in IPv4 only e For manual network settings type the controller s IP address subne
188. ak subsystem Transition is the process of replacing a revertible spare drive that is currently part of a disk array with an unconfigured physical drive or a non revertible spare The revertible spare drive returns to its original status Transition happens automatically when the following sequence of events takes place e You create a revertible spare drive See Creating a Spare Drive Manually on page 173 or page 239 e A physical drive assigned to your disk array fails and the array goes critical or degraded e VTrak automatically rebuilds your array to the revertible spare drive and the array becomes functional again e You replace the failed physical drive with a new physical drive of equal or greater capacity e VTrak automatically transitions moves the data from the revertible spare to the new physical drive e The new physical drive becomes part of the array and the revertible spare drive returns to its original spare status Transition happens manually when you specify a different unconfigured physical drive to transition move the data from the revertible spare drive See the example on the following pages 356 Chapter 7 Technology Background Example Following is an example to explain the Transition function 2 Array Drives 3 4 5 Spare 6 Drive In the example above there is a four drive RAID 5 disk array and a global spare drive Physical drives 1 2 3 and 4 belong to the disk array P
189. al drives minimum 32 maximum RAID 10 must have less than 32 physical drives If existing physical drives have no unused space add 1 or more physical drives RAID 10 Add physical drives Even number of physical drives RAID 50 6 physical drives minimum 32 per axle maximum RAID 60 8 physical drives minimum 32 per axle maximum If existing physical drives have no unused space add 1 or more physical drives When you migrate RAID 10 logical drive it becomes RAID 1E by default If you want a RAID 10 logical drive there must be an even number of physical drives and you must specify RAID 10 for the target logical drive 351 VTrak E Class Product Manual RAID 50 A RAID 50 Source logical drive can migrate to the following Target logical drives Target Requirements RAID 0 None RAID 1E None RAID 5 32 physical drives maximum RAID 50 must have less than 32 physical drives RAID 6 32 physical drives maximum RAID 50 must have less than 32 physical drives If existing physical drives have no unused space add 1 or more physical drives RAID 10 Even number of physical drives RAID 50 Add physical drives 32 per axle maximum RAID 60 8 physical drives minimum 32 per axle maximum If existing physical drives have no unused space add 1 or more physical drives You can add physical drives to a RAID 50 array but you cannot change the number of axles RAID
190. als assigned to this target Items marked with an asterisk are adjustable under Making iSCSI Target Settings on page 191 Items marked with a double asterisk are adjustable under Assigning a Portal to an iSCSI Target on page 192 Adding iSCSI Targets If you plan to enable authentication on the new target create a CHAP first then add the target See Adding iSCSI CHAPs on page 201 190 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Header and data digests work best with initiators equipped with a TCP Offload Engine TOE For more information see your iSCSI HBA user documentation VTrak supports a maximum 2048 iSCSI targets A maximum of 1024 logical drives can be mapped to a target To add a target OO BR a 7 Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Target tab Click the Create Target button Optional In the Alias field type an alias for this target Check the boxes to enable uncheck to disable e Enable Header Digest Adds a header digest CRC Enable Data Digest Adds a data digest CRC e Enable uni directional peer CHAP authentication e Enable bi directional local CHAP authentication Click the Submit button Making iSCSI Target Settings To make target settings 1 ONO 6 Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Target tab Click the target you want then click the Settings button Make set
191. anagement Subsystem settings Controller settings statistics lock unlock the subsystem set date and time Enclosure settings FRUs and Topology Physical Drive Management Assign an alias force a physical drive offline or online clear a Stale or PFD condition change global physical drive settings and locate a physical drive Disk Array Management Assign an alias view array information create and delete disk arrays transport rebuild PDM and transition functions accept and incomplete array locate a disk array create and delete logical drives Spare Drive Management View a list of spare drives create modify and delete spare drives and run Spare Check Logical Drive Management Assign an alias set cache policies view logical drive information run initialization and Redundancy Check create a LUN clone and locate a logical drive Network Management Set IP addresses for Virtual and Maintenance Mode Ports gateway and DNS server subnet mask Fibre Channel Management Node information Port information settings SFPs and statistics Logged in devices add intiator to the list iSCSI Management Targets Ports Portals Sessions iSNS options CHAPs Ping Trunks Logged in devices add intiator to the list Background Activities Summary of running and scheduled activity settings for Media Patrol Auto Rebuild Rebuild Migration PDM Transition Synchronization Initialization Redundan
192. ance mode see page 395 You have the option to make maintenance mode settings at a later time in WebPRM PROe See Making Maintenance Mode Settings on page 100 Making Maintenance Mode Settings Automatically Automatic settings require a DHCP server on your network DHCP is currently supported on IPv4 only You make maintenance mode settings for one controller at a time To enable automatic maintenance mode settings 1 At the command prompt type net a mod m c 1 f ipv4 s dhcp enable and press Enter administrator cli gt net a mod m c 1 f ipv4 s dhcp enable After a moment the comand prompt reappears indicating that your setting was successful administrator cli gt To verify the settings changes at the command prompt type net a list m and press Enter The following information displays administrator cli gt net a list m 50 Chapter 3 Setup Ctrild 1 Port 1 ProtocolFamily Pv4 Enabled DHCP Enabled IP 192 168 10 94 IPMask 255 255 255 0 MAC 00 01 55 30 65 E9 DNS 192 168 1 1 Gateway 192 168 10 1 Ctrild 1 Port 1 ProtocolFamily Pv6 Disabled DHCP Disabled IP 2001 2 PMask ffff MAC 00 01 55 30 65 E9 DNS Gateway Ctrlld 2 Port 1 ProtocolFamily Pv4 Enabled DHCP Disabled IP 10 0 0 3 PMask 0 0 0 0 MAC 00 01 55 30 65 E9 DNS 0 0 0 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 Ctrlld 2 Port 1 ProtocolFamily IPv6 Disabled DHCP Disabled IP 200
193. and recharge cycles of the reconditioning That behavior is normal Making Schedule Changes To make changes the scheduled battery reconditioning 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Background Activities icon The list of Background Activities displays 3 Click the Scheduler button 4 Mouse over Battery Reconditioning and click the Settings button 90 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe 6 Make settings changes as required Start Time e Uncheck the Enable This Schedule box to disable this activity e Recurrence Pattern Start From EndOn Click the Save button to apply the new settings Making Buzzer Settings To make buzzer settings 1 2 3 4 5 Click the Device tab Click the Component List icon Click the Buzzer and click the Settings button Check the Enable Buzzer box to enable the buzzer Or uncheck the box to disable Click the Save button Silencing the Buzzer Caution This action disables the buzzer for all events To silence the buzzer 1 a Fon Click the Device tab Click the Component List icon Click the Buzzer and click the Settings button Uncheck the Enable Buzzer box Click the Save button 91 VTrak E Class Product Manual Managing Enclosures Enclosure management includes the following functions Viewing the Enclosures Summary page 92 Making Enclosure Settings page 93 Locating an Enclosure page 93 Viewing FRU VP
194. anel LEDs page 379 Front Panel LEDs When the power is switched on the LEDs on the front of the VTrak light up Figure 1 Front panel LED display When boot up is finished and the VTrak is functioning normally Power FRU and Logical Drive LEDs display steady green Each controller activity LED flashes green when there is activity on that controller The controller heartbeat LED blinks green once per second for five seconds goes dark for ten seconds then blinks green once per second for five seconds again Steady means the LED is on Blinking means a regular on off pattern Flashing means an intermittent and irregular on off pattern Dark means the LED is off 377 VTrak E Class Product Manual See the table below Enclosure Front LEDs Logical Controller Coniroller State Power rae Drive Activity Heartbeat Dark No power No power No Activity Steady Normal Normal Normal Green Blinking Normal Green Flashing Activity Green Amber Problem Critical Red Failure Offline Check the LEDs on the back of the VTrak enclosure Blinks blinks green once per second for five seconds goes dark for ten seconds then blinks green once per second for five seconds again See Enclosure Problems on page 391 RAID Controller Problems on page 395 and Disk Array and Logical Drive Problems on
195. annel Connections page 252 Managing iSCSI Connections page 257 Managing Background Activity page 273 Working with the Event Viewer page 275 Working with LUN Mapping page 277 Managing UPS Units page 283 Managing Users page 286 Managing LDAP page 290 Working with Software Management page 295 Flashing through TFTP page 303 Viewing Flash Image Information page 304 Clearing Statistics page 305 Restoring Factory Defaults page 306 Shutting Down the Subsystem page 307 Starting Up After Shutdown page 309 Restarting the Subsystem page 311 Buzzer page 313 For information about the VTrak audible alarm and LEDs see Chapter 8 Troubleshooting on page 375 205 VTrak E Class Product Manual Initial Connection Making an initial connection includes the following functions Making a Serial Connection page 206 Making a Telnet Connection page 207 Making a SSH Connection page 207 Logging Into the CLI page 208 Accessing Online Help page 209 Exiting the CLU page 210 Logging Out of the CLI page 210 Logging Back Into the CLI and CLU page 210 Making a Serial Connection Before you begin be sure the RJ11 to DB9 serial data cable is connected between the Host PC and VTrak and that both machines are booted and running Figure 1 Serial port on the controller Serial port ira o o GD a
196. ansceiver for each connected FC port on the subsystem e A network switch Data Path To establish the data path 1 Connect an FC cable between a data port on the left RAID controller and the FC HBA card in your host PC or server See page 29 Figure 13 2 Connect an FC cable between a data port on the right RAID controller and the FC HBA card in your host PC or server Chapter 2 Installation Figure 13 FC DAS data and management connections Host PC or server Network switch Co pina aa li N Begesessscc00009 J fe IE LIT wo AS Z 0000000000000000 Network o0 cable i ae Management i ports EE Network connector Eze FC hea NEEE card Tesi jal ak L FC ports A FC cable VTrak RAID subsystem The VTrak RAID subsystem is shown with SFP transceivers installed Management Path To establish the management path 1 Connect Ethernet cables between the Management ports of both RAID controllers and the network switch See Figure 13 2 Connect an Ethernet cable between the network port on the host PC or server and the network switch 29 VTrak E Class Product Manual Fibre Channel with JBOD Expansion JBOD expansion requires at least one SFF 8088 4X to SFF 8088 4X external SAS cable for each JBOD unit To add JBOD units 1
197. ansfer Default Time to Retain In seconds Max Burst Length In bytes Initial R2T Enabled or disabled Data Digest Enabled or disabled Data PDU in Order Enabled or disabled Portal ID ID number of the portal Keep Alive Enabled or disabled Target Name iSCSI qualified name iqn Initiator IP IP address of the initiator Device Access Control Enabled or disabled Initiator Source Port ID number ISID Initiator session ID number Max Rev Data Seg Length Receive data segment length First Burst Length In bytes Default Time to Wait In seconds Immediate Data Enabled or disabled Header Digest Enabled or disabled CHAP Authentication Type None Local Peer Data Seq in Order Enabled or disabled 199 VTrak E Class Product Manual Making iSCSI Session Settings To make iSCSI session settings 1 OF ER 6 Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Session tab Click the iSCSI session you want and click the Settings button Check the box to enable the Keep Alive feature Uncheck the box to disable Click the Submit button You can also enable and disable the Keep Alive as a global setting See page 189 Deleting an iSCSI Session To delete an iSCSI session 1 ON BO TD Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Session tab Click the iSCSI session you want an
198. ardware version e Firmware version Shut down the VTrak Remove the first controller and install the second controller Repeat steps 3 through 6 Then compare your records Correct any differences between the two controllers See Updating the Subsystem Firmware on page 315 Taking a RAID Controller out of Maintenance Mode If you shut down the VTrak subsystem in the process of correcting the maintenance mode problem the affected RAID controller boots into normal mode when the VTrak restarts No further action is required If you corrected the problem without shutting down the VTrak subsystem choose one of the following methods to take the controller out of maintenance mode Restart the VTrak subsystem See page 83 WebPAM PROe or page 311 CLU Establish a serial connection then use the CLI see below Establish a Telnet connection then use the CLI see page 397 Serial Connection To clear maintenance mode using a serial connection 1 Change your terminal emulation program settings to match the following specifications e Bits per second 115200 e Data bits 8 e Parity None 396 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 7 e Stop bits 1 e Flow control none Start your PC s terminal VT100 or ANSI emulation program Press Enter once to launch the CLI The login screen appears The following steps show the default Administrator user name and password Use your own user name and password if you have chang
199. ary information includes e Controller ID 1 or 2 e Alias if assigned e Operational Status OK means normal Might show BGA running Not present indicates a malfunction or no controller is installed e Readiness Status Active or Standby is normal N A means not accessible Highlight the controller you want and press Enter To access additional controller information highlight Advanced Information and press Enter To access controller statistics highlight Controller Statistics and press Enter Clearing Statistics To clear controller statistics see Clearing Statistics on page 305 Clearing an Orphan Watermark This condition is the result of a disk drive failure during an NVRAM RAID level migration on a disk array To clear an orphan watermark 1 2 3 4 From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter Highlight Controller Management and press Enter Highlight one of the controllers and press Enter Highlight Clear Orphan Watermark and press Enter 215 VTrak E Class Product Manual The condition is cleared See Physical Drive Problems on page 399 for more information Making Controller Settings If your subsystem has two controllers any settings you make to one controller automatically apply to the other controller To make Controller settings From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter Highlight Controller Management and press En
200. ator IDs and corresponding LUN maps that you specified Click the Submit button to create the LUN map The screen displays a list of initiator IDs and corresponding LUN maps You can also set LUN mapping and masking at a later time Click the Administration tab then click the LUN Mapping amp Masking option 67 VTrak E Class Product Manual Logging out of WebPAM PROe There are two ways to log out of WebPAM PROe e Close your browser window e Click Logout on the WebPAM PROe banner Figure 7 Clicking Logout on the WebPAM PROe banner IC Google P th B sM Save Service Report Heip ContactUs About Logout A Clicking Logout brings you back to the Login Screen See page 60 After logging out you must enter your user name and password in order to log in again Using WebPAM PROe over the Internet The above instructions cover connections between VTrak and your company network It is also possible to connect to a VTrak from the Internet Your MIS Administrator can tell you how to access your network from outside the firewall Once you are logged onto the network you can access the VTrak using its IP address See Logging into WebPAM PROe on page 60 68 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe This chapter contains the following topics Logging into WebPAM PROe below Choosing the Display Language page 70 Perusing the Interface page 72 Logging out of WebPAM PROe page 74 Vie
201. attery comes back online the write policy automatically changes back to Write Back To enable the Adaptive Writeback Cache option see Making Controller Settings on page 86 or page 216 Host Cache Flushing On the VTrak subsystem you can enable or disable host cache flushing When enabled host cache flushing guards against data loss in the event of a power failure However RAID performance is slightly reduced When disabled the VTrak subsystem has greater sustained bandwidth and lower latency which are helpful for real time video capture When you operate the VTrak with host cache flushing disabled use a UPS to protect against data loss 363 VTrak E Class Product Manual Preferred Controller ID See Preferred Controller ID on page 353 Power Saving Power saving is a method of conserving energy by applying specific actions to hard disk drives HDD After an HDD has been idle for the set period of time you can elect to e Park the read write heads Referred to as Power Saving Idle Time on VTrak e Reduce disk rotation speed Referred to as Power Saving Standby Time on VTrak e Spin down the disk stop rotation Referred to as Power Saving Stopped Time on VTrak Power management must be e Seton the RAID controller See Making Controller Settings on page 86 or page 216 e Enabled on each HDD See Making Disk Array Settings on page 157 or page 233 Capacity Coercion Th
202. b Server 126 296 severity of events 104 131 134 135 275 299 302 382 386 389 498 shut down the subsystem 83 307 SLP service 296 settings 125 296 SMART error 425 setting 216 SNMP service 298 settings 129 130 298 trap sinks 298 Spare Check reported events 425 run 175 240 spare drive create 239 create manually 173 dedicated 355 delete 174 241 global 355 information 172 list 172 239 509 VTrak E Class Product Manual spare drive cont locate 174 reported events 425 requirements 355 revertible 355 settings 174 240 Spare Check 175 240 transition 175 356 SSH connection 207 service 128 297 settings 128 297 statistics clear 305 controller 87 215 Fibre Channel 254 Fibre Channel port 186 254 logical drive 244 physical drive 226 status power supply 94 219 220 subsystem lock 77 212 storage network 75 stripe level migration reported event 426 subsystem cascading 224 date and time 47 56 212 information 76 list 75 lock 77 212 maintenance 315 power cycle 409 reported events 426 restart 83 311 settings 77 211 shut down 83 shutdown 307 startup after shutdown 84 309 synchronization logical drive 122 reported events 426 settings 122 synchronizing NTP 214 T targets iSCSI add 190 259 assign portals 192 260 delete 191 261 information 189 258 list 189 258 settings 191 260 unassign portal 261 unassign portals 192 Technical Support contact 435 Telnet conne
203. ble e Power Management Highlight and press the spacebar to toggle between enable and disable 4 Press Control A to save your settings Notes You can also enable or disable Media Patrol for the entire RAID system See Making Background Activity Settings on page 273 Power Management must be enabled on the disk array for the HDD Power Saving settings to be effective See Making Disk Array Settings on page 233 Power management is limited to the features your HDDs actually support Viewing Disk Array Information 1 From the Main Menu highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter 2 Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter The information and settings screen appears 3 Highlight any of the following and press Enter to view a list of e Physical drives in this array e Logical drives in this array e Spare drives in this array dedicated and global Disk Array Operational Status e OK This is the normal state of a logical drive When a logical drive is Functional it is ready for immediate use For RAID Levels other than RAID 0 Striping the logical drive has full redundancy 234 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU e Synchronizing This condition is temporary Synchronizing is a maintenance function that verifies the integrity of data and redundancy in the logical drive When a logical drive is Synchronizing it functions and your data is available However access is s
204. cal drive delete the disk array and re create it See Deleting a Disk Array on page 156 and Creating a Disk Array Manually on page 150 Restore the data from your backup source Rebuilding a Disk Array When you rebuild a disk array you are actually rebuilding the data on one physical drive When a physical drive in a disk array fails and a spare drive of adequate capacity is available the disk array begins to rebuild automatically using the spare drive If there is no spare drive of adequate capacity but the Auto Rebuild function is ENABLED the disk array begins to rebuild automatically as soon as you remove the failed physical drive and install an unconfigured physical drive in the same slot See Making Rebuild Settings on page 120 402 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting e If there is no spare drive of adequate capacity and the Auto Rebuild function is DISABLED you must replace the failed drive with an unconfigured physical drive then perform a Manual Rebuild See Rebuilding a Disk Array on page 160 Important If your replacement disk drive was formerly part of a different disk array or logical drive you must clear the configuration data on the replacement drive before you use it See Clearing a Stale or a PFA Condition on page 147 Incomplete Array A more serious but far less common problem is an Incomplete Array An incomplete array results from a physical drive that fails
205. cal drives RAID 50 6 physical drives minimum 32 per axle maximum If existing physical drives have no unused space add 1 or more physical drives RAID 60 8 physical drives minimum 32 per axle maximum If existing physical drives have no unused space add 1 or more physical drives 348 Chapter 7 Technology Background RAID 1 A RAID 1 Source logical drive can migrate to the following Target logical drives Target Requirements RAID 0 None RAID 1E 3 or more physical drives Add 1 or more physical drives RAID 5 3 physical drives minimum 32 maximum RAID 1 must have less than 32 physical drives Add 1 or more physical drives RAID 10 4 physical drives minimum Even number of physical drives Add 2 or more physical drives RAID 50 6 physical drives minimum 32 per axle maximum Add 4 or more physical drives RAID 1E A RAID 1E Source logical drive can migrate to the following Target logical drives Target Requirements RAID 0 None RAID 1E Add physical drives RAID 5 3 physical drives minimum 32 maximum RAID 1E must have less than 32 physical drives If existing physical drives have no unused space add 1 or more physical drives RAID 10 4 physical drives minimum Even number of physical drives If existing physical drives have no unused space add 1 or more physical drives RAID 50 6 physical drives minimum 32 per axle maximum
206. ces Click the Start button to begin the cloning process The cloning progress bar displays Note the Target Logical Drive ID Use this number to identify the LUN clone in the Logical Drive list If you chose a redundant RAID level the LUN clone is automatically synchronized after creation After the LUN clone is created you can manage it like any other logical drive See Making Logical Drive Settings on page 166 Locating a Logical Drive on page 167 and Deleting a Logical Drive on page 166 For users to access the LUN clone you must map it to an initiator See Managing LUNs on page 180 171 VTrak E Class Product Manual Managing Spare Drives Spare drive management includes Viewing a List of Spare Drives below Viewing Spare Drive Information page 172 Creating a Spare Drive Manually page 173 Creating a Spare Drive with the Wizard see Creating a Disk Array with the Wizard on page 151 Deleting a Spare Drive page 174 Making Spare Drive Settings page 174 Locating a Spare Drive page 174 Running Spare Check page 175 Running a Transition on a Spare Drive page 175 Viewing a List of Spare Drives To view a list of spare drives 1 2 Click the Storage tab Click the Spare Drive icon Spare Drive information displays including e ID Spare0 Spare etc e Operational Status OK means normal e Configurable Capacity Usable capacity of the spare dri
207. choose the day from the dropdown menu Choose a Start From date from the dropdown menus e Choose an End On option No end date or perpetual End after a specific number of activity actions 116 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe e Until date from the dropdown menus e For Redundancy Check choose Auto Fix option Attempts to repair the problem when it finds an error Check to enable e Pause on Error option The process stops when it finds a non repairable error Check to enable e Select LD Check the boxes for the logical drives to run Redundancy Check Check at least one logical drive 6 Click the Save button Enabling or Disabling a Scheduled Background Activity Background activity schedules are enabled by default when you create the schedule If you want to stop a background activity now but plan to use it again in the future disable the scheduled activity rather than deleting it Caution Disabling the battery recondition schedule is NOT recommended To enable or disable change an existing scheduled background activity 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Background Activities icon The list of background appears 3 Click the Scheduler button The list of currently scheduled background act it viti es appears Click the background activity and click the Settings button 5 Uncheck the Enable This Schedule box to disable this schedule Check the box to enable t
208. cified e Role Policy Default or Explicit e Default Privilege Applies to Default Role Policy The following items apply to the Default Role Policy e BaseDNOfGroup Authenticates communication between subsystem and LDAP server e ObjectClassOfGroup group is the default value e GrouplDAttribute cn is the default Making LDAP Settings To make LDAP settings 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight LDAP Management and press Enter The LDAP Settings screen appears Highlight LDAP Auth and press Enter The LDAP Authorization screen appears Highlight each item and press the Spacebar to toggle between Enabled and Disabled as needed e LDAP EmailNotificationForEvent Highlight each item and press Backspace to erase the current value then type a new value as needed Timeout Maximum time to allowed for communication with LDAP server 10 seconds is the default e BaseDN Search domain limit of LDAP query dc example dc com is the default Server Hostname or IP address of LDAP server 127 0 0 1 is the default e Port Network port of LDAP server 389 is the default BindDN Authenticates communication between subsystem and LDAP server binddn is the default value Bindpw Password for BindDN binddn is the default value When email notification is enabled these items appear e Object Class person
209. city of a RAID 60 logical drive is the smallest physical drive times the number of physical drives minus four RAID 60 also provides very high reliability because data is still available even if multiple physical drives fail two in each axle The greater the number of axles the greater the number of physical drives that can fail without the RAID 60 logical drive going offline Component Minimum Maximum Number of Axles 2 16 Physical Drives per Axle 4 32 Physical Drives per Logical Drive 8 256 RAID 60 Axles When you create a RAID 60 you must specify the number of axles An axle refers to a single RAID 6 logical drive that is striped with other RAID 6 logical drives to make RAID 60 An axle can have from 4 to 32 physical drives depending on the number of physical drives in the logical drive 345 VTrak E Class Product Manual RAID 60 Logical Drive No of No of Drives No of No of Drives Drives Axles per Axle Drives Axles per Axle 8 2 4 4 17 2 8 9 9 2 4 5 3 5 6 6 10 2 5 5 4 4 4 4 5 11 2 5 6 18 2 9 9 12 2 6 6 3 6 6 6 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 13 2 6 7 19 2 9 10 3 4 4 5 3 6 6 7 14 2 7 7 4 4 5 5 5 3 4 5 5 20 2 10 10 15 2 7 8 3 6 7 7 3 5 5 5 4 5 5 5 5 16 2 8 8 5 4 4 4 4 4 3 5 5 6 4 4 4 4 4 Advantages Disadvantages High Read data transaction rate High disk overhead equivalent e Medium
210. completed message appears click the View button to see Spare Check Status Running a Transition on a Spare Drive Transition is the process of replacing a revertible spare drive that is currently part of a disk array with an unconfigured physical drive or a non revertible spare You must specify an unconfigured physical drive of the same or larger capacity and same media type as the revertible spare drive See Transition on page 122 and page 356 Running a Transition To run a transition on a revertible spare drive 1 2 Click the Administration tab Click the Background Activities icon The list of background activities appears Mouse over Transition and click the Start button From the Source Physical Drive dropdown menu choose a Source disk array and the revertible spare drive Arrays have an ID No The revertible spare has a Seq No sequence number 175 VTrak E Class Product Manual 5 6 From the Target Physical Drive dropdown menu choose a Target unconfigured drive Click the Confirm button Stopping Pausing or Resuming a Transition To stop pause or resume Transition 1 2 Click the Administration tab Click the Background Activities icon The list of background activities appears Mouse over Transition and click the Stop Pause or Resume button 176 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Managing Initiators Initiator management includes e Viewing a L
211. controller Cld 1 or 2 and protocol family IPv4 or IPv6 you want and press Enter 4 Highlight DHCP and press the spacebar to toggle to Enabled 5 Press Control A to save your settings Making Manual Settings 1 From the Main Menu highlight Network Management and press Enter 2 Highlight Maintenance Mode Network Configuration and press Enter 3 Highlight the controller Cld 1 or 2 and protocol family IPv4 or IPv6 you want and press Enter 4 Highlight DHCP and press the spacebar to toggle to Disabled 5 Highlight each of the following and press the backspace key to erase the current value then type the new value e IP Address Subnet Mask e Default Gateway IP Address e DNS Server IP Address 6 Press Control A to save your settings 251 VTrak E Class Product Manual Managing Fibre Channel Connections The Fibre Channel Management option appears only with VTrak Fibre Channel models Fibre Channel Management includes the following functions Viewing Node Information page 252 Viewing Fibre Channel Port Information page 252 Viewing Fibre Channel Logged in Devices page 252 Making Fibre Channel Port Settings page 253 Viewing Fibre Channel Port Statistics page 254 Viewing SFP Information page 254 Viewing Fibre Channel Port Statistics page 254 Viewing Fibre Channel Initiators page 255 Also see Adding an Initiator on page 278 and Deleting an Initiator on page 279 Viewing Node
212. cs 3 Under Diagnostics click the Device Manager 451 VTrak E Class Product Manual 4 In the Device Manager window click Disk drives 5 Under Disk drives look for Promise VTrak Multi Path Disk Device in the Disk drives list See Figure 1 Figure 1 Device manager window E Server Manager Ey x File Action View Help 9 2m O B ole te Br Fe SES Roles j Features APRN Diagnostics AA Event Viewer R Performance a o Promise VTrak E630f Multi Path Di om Seon Stato OF Human Interface Devices IDE ATA ATAPI controllers Keyboards A Mice and other pointing devices amp Monitors amp Network adapters 1 Ports COM amp LPT Processors lt gt Storage controllers 7 System devices Universal Serial Bus controllers 452 Running Perfect Path View Running Perfect Path View Running PerfectPath View includes these functions e Starting PerfectPath View page 453 Quitting PerfectPath View page 453 Starting PerfectPath View To start PerfectPath View From the Start menu choose All Programs gt PerfectPath gt PerfectPath View The PerfectPath View window opens See Figure 2 Figure 2 PerfectPath View window mix System Operations Help we aee E X30PERF1 Properties Perfomance Events B E Promise VTrak E630F Multi Path Disk Device LUN 0 QLogic Fibre Channel Adapter 7 0 2 0 QLogic Fibre Channel Adapter
213. ct Tech Support The controller s heart beat has started The controller s heart beat has stopped The partner controller s heart beat has started The partner controller s heart beat has stopped The partner controller s heart beat has skipped No action is required The controller s main scheduler has frozen Contact Tech Support if the condition persists Controller has entered maintenance mode since configured physical disk seen by partner controller is not seen here Verify that all SATA drives have an SAS to SATA adapter installed Controller has entered maintenance mode due to mismatch of physical disks types Check and correct SAS cabling and connections as needed Controller has entered maintenance mode due to mismatch of physical disk WWN Update to the latest firmware If the condition persists replace the controller Controller has entered maintenance mode due to mismatch of SATA Disks Controller has entered maintenance mode due to mismatch of Disk IDs Controller has entered maintenance mode since no physical disks are seen as seen by Partner controller Check and correct data cabling and connections as needed 412 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Reported Event Corrective Action Controller is started Controller is set to Active Mode Controller is set to Standby Mode No action is required Controller Fa
214. ction 207 settings 127 297 temperature enclosure 219 settings 93 220 thresholds 95 221 terminal emulation program 44 206 test LDAP settings 111 293 topology enclosure 92 223 Fibre Channel 185 transceivers Fibre Channel 26 28 31 transition automatic 359 explained 356 manual 359 reported event 427 settings 122 spare drive 175 transport disk array 160 236 trap sinks 130 298 510 Index trunks iSCSI add 197 271 delete 198 272 list 197 270 settings 198 271 U unknown reported event 427 UPS control connection 40 information 98 285 list of units 96 283 settings 97 284 USB Support firmware update 319 problem reporting 390 user create 286 database export 107 database import 106 delete 289 enable disable 287 information 286 password change 288 privileges 103 105 110 112 287 settings 287 288 username and password CLI CLU 44 WebPAM PROe 60 70 V virtual management port settings 47 56 250 voltage enclosure 95 219 222 VTrak beeping 375 EMI RFI statements 12 environmental standards 13 warranty 440 VTrak Monitor add subsystem 491 delete subsystem 494 device information 497 diagnosing a subsystem 496 download 491 install 491 launch 491 logging into a subsystem 493 monitoring 495 problem reporting 495 runtime events 497 settings 494 support information 498 WwW warranty VTrak 440 watermark orphan 215 Web Server service 296 settings 126 296 WebP
215. cy Check rate and thresholds Event Viewer View runtime and NVRAM event logs Additional Info and Management LUN mapping UPS management User management Software services management Flash through TFTP Firmware update Clear Statistics Restore Default Settings Shutdown or Restart the subsystem Buzzer Enable disable or silence the buzzer audible alarm Accessing Online Help To access online help on any CLU screen press Control AE To return to the CLU press Enter 209 VTrak E Class Product Manual Exiting the CLU 1 Highlight Return to Previous Menu and press Enter Repeat this action until you arrive at the Main Menu 2 From the Main Menu highlight Return to CLI and press Enter to exit 3 Close the terminal emulation Telnet SSH or terminal window Logging Out of the CLI When you shut down or restart the VTrak subsystem you are automatically logged out of the CLI To manually log out of the CLI no shut down or restart At the username cli gt prompt type logout and press Enter The prompt changes to cli gt Logging Back Into the CLI and CLU To log into the CLI and CLU after a manual logout 1 Atthe cli gt prompt type login followed by your user name and press Enter 2 Atthe Password prompt type your password and press Enter 3 At the username cli gt prompt type menu and press Enter to open the CLU 210 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Managing the Subsystem
216. d Manual Transition If you wanted to use the drive in slot 5 as a member of the disk array rather than the drive in slot 3 you would run the Transition function manually See Running a Transition on a Spare Drive on page 175 or Running Transition on a Disk Array on page 237 359 VTrak E Class Product Manual 1 2 Array Drives 3 4 5 Spare i Drive When the Manual Transition is finished physical drives 1 2 4 and 5 belong to the disk array and physical drive 6 is a revertible spare drive At this point you would replace the drive in slot 3 The new drive in slot 3 remains unconfigured until you assign it to a disk array or as a spare 360 Chapter 7 Technology Background RAID Controllers RAID controller technology includes e LUN Affinity page 361 e ALUA page 361 e Cache Policy page 362 e Preferred Controller ID page 364 e Power Saving page 364 Capacity Coercion page 364 LUN Affinity VTrak subsystems with dual RAID controllers include a LUN Affinity feature Normally either controller can access all logical drives LUN Affinity enables you to specify which controller can access each logical drive Use this feature to balance the load of your logical drives between the two controllers To use LUN Affinity you must e Have two RAID controllers in the subsystem e Set the redundancy type to Active Active See Making Subsystem Settings on page 77 or page 211 e
217. d between the sectors of multiple physical drives Performance is increased since the workload is balanced between drives or members that form the logical drive Identical drives are recommended for performance as well as data storage efficiency Figure 1 RAID 0 Striping interleaves data across multiple drives Data Stripe Physical Drives The disk array s data capacity is equal to the number of disk drive members multiplied by the smallest drive s capacity For example one 100 GB and three 120 GB drives form a 400 GB 4 x 100 GB disk array instead of 460 GB If physical drives of different capacities are used there is unused capacity on the larger drives RAID 0 logical drives on VTrak consist of one or more physical drives 333 VTrak E Class Product Manual Advantages Disadvantages Implements a striped disk array the data is broken down into blocks and each block is written to a separate disk drive I O performance is greatly improved by spreading the I O load across many channels and drives No parity calculation overhead is involved Not a true RAID because it is not fault tolerant The failure of just one drive results in all data in an disk array being lost Should not be used in mission critical environments Recommended Applications for RAID 0 Image Editing Pre Press Applications Any application requiring high bandwidth 334 Chapter 7 Technology Bac
218. d activities 1 Click the Administration tab 114 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Click the Background Activities icon The list of background appears Click the Scheduler button The list of currently scheduled background activities appears Adding a Scheduled Background Activity To add a new scheduled background activity 1 2 10 11 Click the Administration tab Click the Background Activities icon The list of background appears Click the Scheduler button The list of currently scheduled background act it viti es appears Click the Add Schedule button Check the Enable Media Patrol box to enable uncheck to disable This settings enables or disables Media Patrol for your entire RAID system Click the Confirm button Choose the option for the activity you want e Media Patrol e Redundancy Check Spare Check e Battery Recondition Choose a Start Time from the dropdown menus The menus have a 24 hour clock Choose a Recurrence Pattern option daily weekly or monthly e For the Daily option enter an interval in the Every field e For the Weekly option enter an interval in the Every field and choose one or more days of the week e For the Monthly option choose e Day of the Month option then choose a number from the dropdown menu The day of the week option then choose the day of the month from the dropdown menus Choose a Start From date from the dropdown menus Cho
219. d click the Delete button Type confirm in the field provided then click the Confirm button Viewing iSCSI iSNS Information To view information about iSNS 1 2 3 Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the iSNS tab The information includes e Auto iSNS IP Yes means the IP address is assigned automatically e iSNS Enabled Yes means the iSNS feature is enabled ISNS Server IP Address IP address of the iSNS Server e iSNS Port 3205 is the default and recommended value Items marked with an asterisk are adjustable under Making iSCSI iSNS Settings on page 201 200 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Making iSCSI iSNS Settings To make iSNS settings 1 OF eR O0 9 6 Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the iSNS tab Click the iSNS Settings button Make settings changes are required e Check the box to enable iSNS Uncheck to disable e Enter the iSNS server IP address e Enter a new iSNS Port number The range is 1 to 65535 Click the Submit button Viewing a List of iSCSI CHAPs To view a list of iSCSI CHAPs 1 2 3 Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the CHAP tab CHAP information includes Index ID number of the CHAP Name User assigned name of the CHAP Type Peer or local e Peer is one way or uni directional e Local is two way or bi directional
220. d page 227 Deleting a Disk Array on page 156 and page 233 Deleting a Logical Drive on page 166 and page 243 Initializing a Logical Drive on page 167 and page 245 Deleting an FC Initiator on page 178 and page 279 Updating with WebPAM PROe on page 315 Updating with the CLU on page 317 Updating with USB Support on page 319 Updating Physical Drive Firmware on page 321 Replacing a Cache Backup Battery on page 324 Replacing a RAID Controller Single Controller on page 327 Initialization on page 354 VTrak E Class Product Manual e USB Support Reports a Problem on page 390 e Unsaved Data in the Controller Cache on page 398 Warranty and Support Warranty e Three year complete system limited warranty with advanced parts replacement e Optional extended warranty e Optional onsite parts replacement program Support e 24 hour 7 days a week 365 days a year e mail and phone support English only e 24 hour 7 days a week 365 days a year access to PROMISE support site e Firmware and compatibility lists Chapter 2 Installation This chapter covers the following topics e Unpacking the VTrak below e Mounting VTrak in a Rack page 17 e Installing Physical Drives page 21 e Making Management and Data Connections page 25 Making Serial Cable Connections page 40 Unpacking the VTrak The VTrak box contains the following items
221. d press Enter 382 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting 3 The log of NVRAM Events appears Events are added to the top of the list Each item includes Sequence number Begins with 0 at system startup e Device Disk Array Logical Drive Physical Drive by its ID number e Severity See the Table on the previous page e Timestamp Date and time the event happened e Description A description of the event in plain language Press the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the log Checking a Reported Component In this example let us check disk array status 1 2 3 Open the CLU Highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter Observe the status of your disk arrays Dald Alias OpStatus CfgCapacity FreeCapacity MaxContiguousCap 0 DAO OK 75 44GB 66 06GB 66 06GB 1 DA1 Degraded 189 06GB 179 68GB 179 68GB 2 DA2 OK 73 57GB 64 20GB 64 20GB At this point you can highlight the Degraded array and press Enter to see more information See below Disk Array ID 1 Physical Capacity 189 06GB OperationalStatus Degraded MaxContiguousCapacity 11 18GB FreeCapacity 179 68 GB ConfigurableCapacity 179 68GB SupportedRAIDLevels 05 10 1E Disk Array Alias DAL MediaPatrol Enabled PDM Enabled Transport Rebuild Predictive Data Migration Transition Dedicated Spare Drives in the Array Physical Drives in the Array Logical Drives in the Array Locate Disk Array Save Settings CTRL A
222. d to the list Important For this user to receive event notification Click the new user and click the Subscription button e For this user to be an LDAP User click the LDAP Settings button enter information and make settings as required User Privileges Level Meaning View Allows the user to see all status and settings but not to make any changes Maintenance Allows the user to perform maintenance tasks including Rebuilding PDM Media Patrol and Redundancy Check Power Allows the user to create but not delete disk arrays and logical drives change RAID levels change stripe size change settings of components such as disk arrays logical drives physical drives and the controller Super Allows the user full access to all functions including create and delete users and changing the settings of other users and delete disk arrays and logical drives The default administrator account is a Super User Setting User Event Subscriptions By default all users have event notification Enabled e Set to the Major severity level for all events See the Table above 103 VTrak E Class Product Manual Subscribing users receive notification of events at the chosen severity level and all higher levels See the table on the next page Note Each user must have a valid Email address to receive events See Making User Settings below Changing a user subscription r
223. duct requires repair If the product needs repair the technician issues an RMA Return Merchandise Authorization number Important Obtain an RMA number from Technical Support before you return the product and write the RMA number on the label The RMA number is essential for tracking your product and providing the proper service Return ONLY the specific product covered by the warranty Do not ship cables manuals CDs etc USA and Canada PROMISE Technology Inc Customer Service Dept Attn RMA 47654 Kato Road Fremont CA 94538 Other Countries Return the product to your dealer or retailer Contact them for instructions before shipping the product You must follow the packaging guidelines for returning products Use the original shipping carton and packaging Include a summary of the product s problem s Write an attention line on the box with the RMA number Include a copy of your proof of purchase 442 Chapter 9 Support You are responsible for the cost of insurance and shipment of the product to PROMISE Note that damage incurred due to improper transport or packaging is not covered under the Limited Warranty When repairing returned product s PROMISE may replace defective parts with new or reconditioned parts or replace the entire unit with a new or reconditioned unit In the event of a replacement the replacement unit is under warranty for the remainder of the original warranty term from p
224. e 1 From the Main Menu highlight Spare Drive Management and press Enter A list of the current spare drives appears Highlight the spare drive you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark it The mark is an asterisk to the left of the listing Highlight Delete Marked Spare Drives and press Enter Press Y to confirm the deletion 241 VTrak E Class Product Manual Managing Logical Drives Logical drive management includes Creating a Logical Drive page 242 Deleting a Logical Drive page 243 Viewing Logical Drive Information page 243 Viewing Logical Drive Statistics page 244 Viewing the Logical Drive Check Table page 244 Making Logical Drive Settings page 245 Initializing a Logical Drive page 245 Running Redundancy Check page 246 Locating a Logical Drive page 246 Migrating a Logical Drive page 247 Creating a LUN Clone page 248 For LUN mapping see Working with LUN Mapping on page 277 Creating a Logical Drive You can create logical drives on existing disk arrays if there is available space in the array For more information on the choices below see Logical Drives on page 333 To create a logical drive from an existing disk array 1 2 From the Main Menu highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter Highlight the disk array in which you want to create a logical drive and press Enter Highlight Logical Drives in the Disk Array and press Enter Highlight Cr
225. e Run level 4 is for multiple users e Run level 5 is for multiple users on X Windows SLES 10 SP2 10 SP3 11 11 SP1 To set the MP daemon to run at boot time 1 Open a terminal window 2 Set the daemon to run at boot time chkconfig multipathd on The system does not return anything Verifying the Modules are Loaded To verify that the DM MP modules are loaded 1 Open a terminal window 2 Verify that the multipath module is loaded ismod grep dm multipath 478 Task 3 Making Initial Host Settings If the module is loaded the system returns dm multipath 215770 ora similar message 3 Verify that the device mapper module is loaded ismod grep dm mod If the module is loaded the system returns dm mod 56537 8 dm snapshot ora similar message Verifying the Daemon is Running To verify that the MP daemon is running 1 Open a terminal window 2 Check the daemon s status etc init d multipathd status 3 Do one of the following actions e If the system returns mul tipathd is running ora similar message Go to Task 4 Create and Configure Devices on page 480 e Ifthe system returns mul tipathd is stopped ora similar message Start the MP daemon etc init d multipathd start Then go to Task 4 Create and Configure Devices on page 480 479 VTrak E Class Product Manual Task 4 Create and Configure Devices This step applies the settings from the multipath config fil
226. e Appendix C Multipathing on Linux on page 385 An FC SAN with no single point of failure NSPF requires An FC HBA card in each host PC or server An SFP transceiver for each connected FC port on the subsystem Two SFF 8088 4X to SFF 8088 4X SAS external cables for each JBOD unit Two FC switches A network switch Data Path To establish the data path 1 Connect an FC cable between an FC data port on the left RAID controller and one of the FC switches See page 32 Figure 15 Connect an FC cable between an FC data port on the left RAID controller and the other FC switch Connect an FC cable between an FC data port on the right RAID controller and one of the FC switches Connect an FC cable between an FC data port on the right RAID controller and the other FC switch Connect FC cables between one of the FC switches and the FC HBA cards in both of the host PCs or servers Connect FC cables between the other FC switch and the FC HBA cards in both of the host PCs or servers If you have multiple VTrak subsystems repeat steps 1 through 6 as required VTrak E Class Product Manual Figure 15 FC SAN NSPF data connections Each RAID HBA card connects to both FC switches Each FC switch connects to e Both Host PCs e Both RAID subsystems 00000004 po0o Cope ec ec Ets mer 000000000000000000000000000000000000 000000000000000000000000000000009 m A
227. e database or video applications then you should choose that size as your Stripe Size If you do not know the cache buffer or fixed data block sizes choose 64 KB as your Stripe Size Generally speaking e Email POS and web servers prefer smaller stripe sizes e Video and database applications prefer larger stripe sizes Sector Size A sector is the smallest addressable area on a physical drive Sector size refers to the number of data bytes a sector can hold A smaller sector size is a more efficient use of a physical drive s capacity 512 bytes 512 B is the most common sector size and the default in WebPAM PROe Preferred Controller ID When you create a logical drive using the Advanced method of disk array creation you can specify the Preferred Controller ID e Controller 1 Assign all logical drives to Controller 1 e Controller 2 Assign all logical drives to Controller 2 e Automatic Alternate logical drive assignments between Controllers 1 and 2 Automatic is the default and preferred setting because it balances the logical drive assignments for you See Creating a Disk Array Manually on page 150 Creating a Disk Array with the Wizard on page 151 and Creating a Disk Array Advanced on page 232 353 VTrak E Class Product Manual Initialization Initialization is done to logical drives after they are created from a disk array Full initialization sets all data bits in the logical d
228. e condition Click the Clear PFA Stale button a second time to remove the PFA condition Updating Firmware on a Physical Drive This feature applies only to PROMISE supported physical drives For a list of supported drives go to http www promise com support Then see Updating Physical Drive Firmware on page 321 If you have physical drives in your RAID system that are not PROMISE supported follow the firmware update procedure from the drive manufacturer 147 VTrak E Class Product Manual Managing Disk Arrays Disk array management includes e Viewing a List of Disk Arrays below e Viewing Disk Array Information page 148 e Creating a Disk Array Manually page 150 e Creating a Disk Array with the Wizard page 151 e Deleting a Disk Array page 156 e Making Disk Array Settings page 157 e Locating a Disk Array page 158 e Running Media Patrol on a Disk Array page 158 e Running PDM on a Disk Array page 159 e Preparing a Disk Array for Transport page 160 e Rebuilding a Disk Array page 160 Also see Disk Array and Logical Drive Problems page 400 Viewing a List of Disk Arrays To view a list of disk arrays 1 Click the Storage tab 2 Click the Disk Array icon The list of disk arrays appears Disk array information includes ID DAO DA1 DA2 etc e Alias If assigned e Status A green check u icon means OK e Capacity Data capacity of the array e Free Capacity
229. e or resume a Rebuild 1 2 Click the Administration tab Click the Background Activities icon The list of background appears Mouse over Rebuild and click the Stop Pause or Resume button 161 VTrak E Class Product Manual Managing Logical Drives Logical drive management includes e Viewing a List of Logical Drives below e Viewing Logical Drive Information page 163 e Viewing Logical Drive Statistics page 164 e Viewing Logical Drive Check Tables page 164 Creating a Logical Drive Manually page 165 e Deleting a Logical Drive page 166 e Making Logical Drive Settings page 166 e Locating a Logical Drive page 167 e Locating a Logical Drive page 167 e Initializing a Logical Drive page 167 e Redundancy Check on a Logical Drive page 168 e Migrating a Logical Drive s RAID Level page 169 e Creating a LUN Clone page 170 Also see Disk Array and Logical Drive Problems page 400 Viewing a List of Logical Drives To view a list of logical drives 1 Click the Storage tab 2 Click the Logical Drive icon The list of logical drives appears Logical Drive information includes e ID LDO LD1 LD2 etc e Alias If assigned e Status A green check icon means OK e Capacity Data capacity of the logical drive e RAID Level Set when the logical drive was created e Stripe Set when the logical drive was created e Cache Policy Read cache and Write cache settings A
230. e to the Host 1 Open a terminal window 2 Type the following command and press Enter multipath v3 The system returns paths list uuid hcil dev dev_t pri dm st chk_st vend 222490001555459b3b 2 0 0 0 sdb 8 16 1 undef undef Prom 222b40000155a75b49 2 0 0 2 sbc 8 32 1 undef undef Prom 20efcff5501000121a 3 0 0 0 sbd 8 48 1 undef undef Prom 222b44000155ebf0c 3 0 0 1 sde 8 64 1 undef undef Prom params 1 que if_no_path 0 1 1 round robin 0 1 1 8 64 100 status 10011A010 8 64 4 0 sde mask 0x4 sde path checker readsector0 controller setting sde state 2 or a similar message 3 Restart the MP daemon etc init d multipathd restart The system returns Stopping multipathd daemon ora similar message Starting multipathd daemon ora similar message For more information about path monitoring functions type help and press Enter 480 Task 5 Setting up ALUA Task 5 Setting up ALUA VTrak supports Asymmetric Logical Unit Access ALUA on the latest Linux distributions RedHat Linux RHEL 5 4 RedHat Linux RHEL 5 5 SuSE Linux SLES 10 SP3 SuSE Linux SLES 11 SuSE Linux SLES 11 SP1 PROMISE provides RPM packages and multipath conf files for ALUA See RPM Packages and Documents for Linux MPIO on page 486 RedHat Linux RHEL 5 4 Default Kernel To support ALUA within RHEL 5 4 using the default kernel without XEN or PAE support 1 4 Install RHEL 5 4
231. e unconfigured physical drives are available You can accept or reject the proposed arrangement but you cannot modify it See Creating a Disk Array Automatic on page 230 Express You choose the parameters for a new disk array by specifying the characteristics you want You can create multiple logical drives at the same time however they are all identical Creates a hot spare drive for all RAID levels except RAID 0 See Creating a Disk Array Express on page 231 Advanced Enables you to specify all parameters for a new disk array logical drives and spare drives See Creating a Disk Array Advanced on page 232 229 VTrak E Class Product Manual Creating a Disk Array Automatic To create a disk array using the Automatic feature 1 2 3 From the Main Menu highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter Highlight Create New Array and press Enter Highlight Configuration Method and press the spacebar to toggle to Automatic Press Control A to save your settings and move to the next screen Review the proposed configuration of disk array and logical drives e To accept the proposed configuration and create the disk array and logical drives highlight Save Configuration and press Enter e To reject the proposed configuration highlight Cancel Array Configuration and press Enter You return to the Disk Arrays Summary screen To create a disk array with different characteristics repeat
232. eate New Logical Drive and press Enter The Disk Array ID number and Maximum capacity available for the new logical drive are displayed Highlight the following parameters and press the backspace key to erase the current value e Alias Type an alias into the field if desired Maximum of 32 characters Use letters numbers space between words and underscore e Capacity Maximum capacity shown Enter a smaller capacity if desired Highlight the following parameters and press the spacebar to toggle though the available choices 242 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Stripe size Press the spacebar to choose 64 KB 128 KB 256 KB 512 KB or 1 MB e Sector size Press the spacebar to choose 512 B 1 KB 2 KB or 4 KB e Write Policy Press spacebar to choose Write Back or Write Through e Read Policy Press spacebar to choose No Cache Read Cache or Read Ahead Cache 7 Highlight Preferred Controller ID and press the spacebar to toggle among 1 2 or Automatic Applies to dual controller capable Fibre Channel models only 8 RAID 50 and 60 only Highlight Number of Axles and press the spacebar to choose the number of axles 9 Highlight Save Logical Drive and press Enter Note If you did not use all of the available capacity of the disk array you can create an additional logical drive at this point Deleting a Logical Drive Caution When you delete a logical drive you delete al
233. eature rich task scheduler for background activities PerfectRAID Features e Predictive Data Migration PDM e Intelligent Bad Sector Remapping SMART Error Handling NVRAM Error Logging Disk Slot Power Control e Read Write Check Table e Write Hole Table GreenRAID Features e Four levels of advanced power management disk drive MAID support e Efficient 80Plus Bronze Certified power supplies System Management Management Interfaces e Browser based management with WebPAM PROe over Ethernet e Command Line Interface CLI over Serial Port Ethernet via Telnet or SSH e Command Line Utility CLU over Serial Port Ethernet via Telnet or SSH e Third Party Management Support via SNMP and CIM Supported Operating Systems Operating systems run on the Host PC from which you monitor and manage the VTrak subsystem Features Supported Operating Environments Core Platform Type Notes Microsoft Windows Server 2008 with SP2 x86 x64 Windows Server 2008 Hyper V x64 ALUA support with with SP2 PerfectPath v4 00 or later Windows Server 2008 R2 x64 Oracle Enterprise Linux 5 3 x64 No LUN Affinity ALUA support Enterprise Linux 5 5 x64 LUN Affinity ALUA natively supported RedHat Enterprise Linux 5 3 x86 x64 No LUN Affinity ALUA support Enterprise Linux 5 4 x86 x64 UN Affinity ALUA Enterprise Linux 5 5 x86 x64 Natively supported SuSE Linux Enterprise S
234. ecify the initiator by that name when you map a LUN or logical drive to the initiator Initiators come in two varieties software and hardware Software A software initiator uses code to implement iSCSI The software emulates SCSI devices for a computer by speaking the iSCSI protocol Software initiators are available for most mainstream operating systems and this type is the most common mode of deploying iSCSI on computers For more information see your iSCSI driver user documentation Hardware A hardware initiator uses dedicated hardware in combination with software running on it to implement iSCSI A common example is an iSCSI host bus adapter HBA card The iSCSI HBA is a 1 gigabit or 10 gigabit Ethernet network Interface card NIC that plugs into a PCI Express slot It looks like a SCSI device to the host PC or server s operating system The iSCSI HBA uses a TCP IP Offload Engine TOE to perform iSCSI and TCP processing and managing interrupts leaving the host PC or server s microprocessor free to run other applications For more information see your iSCSI HBA user documentation Target The target represents a storage device in this case the VTrak RAID subsystem Each target has a unique iSCSI qualified name IQN VTrak supports a maximum 2048 iSCSI targets A maximum of 1024 logical drives can be mapped to a target Target options include Digests and CHAPs Digests A header digest adds a 32 bit CRC diges
235. ector on the RAID controller UPS control cables are available from PROMISE Technology at http Awww promise com To complete the UPS management setup see Making UPS Settings on page 79 or page 227 when your subsystem is running 40 Chapter 3 Setup This chapter covers the following topics Connecting the Power below Setting up the Serial Connection page 44 VTrak Default IP Addresses page 45 Choosing DHCP or a Static IP Address page 45 Setting up VTrak with the CLI page 47 Setting up VTrak with the CLU page 55 Logging into WebPAM PROe page 60 Creating Disk Arrays and Logical Drives page 62 Enabling LUN Mapping and Masking page 67 Logging out of WebPAM PROe page 68 Connecting the Power Plug in the power cables and turn on the switches on both power supplies Important If you have a SAN DAS or Cascade with JBOD Expansion always power on the JBOD expansion units first When the power is switched on the LEDs on the right handle light up When boot up is finished and the VTrak is functioning normally Power FRU and Logical Drive LEDs display steady green Each controller activity LED flashes green when there is activity on that controller The controller heartbeat LED blinks green once per second for five seconds goes dark for ten seconds then blinks green once per second for five seconds again Steady means the LED is on Blinking means a regular on off pattern Flas
236. ed these At the Login prompt type administrator and press Enter At the Password prompt type password and press Enter The CLI screen appears The prompt should display MAINTENANCE MODE cli gt If the prompt displays your login name such as administrator cli gt log into the other controller At the MAINTENANCE MODE cli gt prompt type maintenance a exit and press Enter The controller reboots The login screen again appears Close the Serial connection Telnet Connection This procedure requires you to know the IP address of the controller To clear maintenance mode using a Telnet connection 1 Go to the command line prompt Windows or click the terminal icon Linux then run telnet 192 168 1 56 2300 The IP address above is only an example 2300 is the Telnet port for VTrak The login screen appears The following steps show the default Administrator user name and password Use your own user name and password if you have changed these At the Login prompt type administrator and press Enter At the Password prompt type password and press Enter The CLI screen appears The prompt should display MAINTENANCE MODE cli gt If the prompt displays your login name such as administrator cli gt log into the other controller At the MAINTENANCE MODE cli gt prompt type maintenance a exit and press Enter 397 VTrak E Class Product Manual The controller reboots The Telnet session ends Unsaved
237. ed or edited in the field 107 VTrak E Class Product Manual Managing LDAP LDAP Management includes the following functions Viewing LDAP Information page 108 Making LDAP Settings page 109 Testing LDAP Settings page 111 Viewing a List of Role Maps page 111 Adding a Role Map page 111 Making Role Map Settings page 112 Deleting a Role Map page 113 Viewing LDAP Information Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP is a protocol used to access a directory listings To view LDAP information 1 2 3 Click the Administration tab Click the User Management icon Click the LDAP Settings button The LDAP Authorization screen appears LDAP information includes e Enable LDAP Check the box to enable LDAP Response Time Out Maximum time to allowed for communication with LDAP server Base DN Distinguished name used as based object entry search dc example dc com is the default LDAP Server Hostname or IP address of the LDAP server 127 0 0 1 is the default LDAP Port The port number of the LDAP server 389 is the default e Server Type Windows Active Directory Mac Open directory or Unspecified UID Attribute Stores user s ID in LDAP server For Windows a typical value is sAMAccountName For Mac OS a typical value is uid Anonymous Bind Allows the system to bind to an LDAP server without providing Bind DN and password e Bind DN D
238. edundancy Check and press Enter The redundancy check parameters appear e Auto Fix Corrects inconsistencies automatically e Pause On Error Pauses the Redundancy Check when an error is found To change a parameter highlight it and press the backspace toggle between Yes and No Highlight Start and press Enter If necessary you can pause and resume or stop and restart the Redundancy Check You can use the logical drive while Redundancy Check is running For Redundancy Check rate see Making Background Activity Settings on page 273 Locating a Logical Drive This feature helps you identify the physical drives assigned to the logical drive you are working with in the CLU To locate a logical drive 1 From the Main Menu highlight Logical Drive Management and press Enter Highlight the logical drive you want and press Enter Highlight Locate Logical Drive and press Enter The drive carrier status LEDs flash for one minute 246 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Figure 7 Drive carrier status LED Green LED flashes Migrating a Logical Drive In order to migrate RAID level you may have to add physical drives For more information see RAID Level Migration on page 347 To migrate a logical drive 1 oP eh 10 11 From the Main Menu highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter Highlight Background Activities and press
239. eee 14 Chapter 2 Installation 00000 cee ee 15 Unpacking the VTrak 0 0 2 0 cee eee 15 Mounting VTrak in a Rack 0 cece eee 17 Installing Physical Drives 000 000 eee ee ee 21 Making Management and Data Connections 25 Making Serial Cable Connections 000000 e eae 40 Chapter 3 Setup 200 cece eee eee eee 41 Connecting the Power 0 0 0c cece eee cee eee 41 Setting up the Serial Connection n saaana aasa 44 About IP Addresses 0 0 cece eee eee 45 Setting up VTrak with the CLI 0 0000 e eee eee 47 Setting up VTrak with the CLU 0 0 0 0 eee eee 55 Logging into WebPAM PROe 202 000e eee ee cence 60 Creating Disk Arrays and Logical Drives 04 62 Enabling LUN Mapping and Masking 05 67 Logging out of WebPAM PROe 00e eee eens 68 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe 69 Logging into WebPAM PROe 200000e eee ee cence 69 Choosing the Display Language 0 00e eee eeee 70 Perusing the Interface 20 eina E EEROR ee 72 Logging out of WebPAM PROe 2 0020 eee eens 74 Viewing the Storage Network 000 cece eee 75 Managing Subsystems 00 cee eee eee eee 76 Managing RAID Controllers 0 000 cece eee 85 Managing Enclosures 0 0 eee eee 92 Managing UPS Units
240. eges LDAP 292 user 103 105 110 112 287 problem reporting CLU 382 USB Support 390 VTrak Monitor 495 WebPAM PROe 385 Q Quick Setup 55 R RAID levels changing 169 247 347 read cache 362 rebuild disk array 120 160 236 manual 160 reported events 424 settings 120 rebuild disk array 120 recipients Netsend 301 VTrak E Class Product Manual recondition a battery 90 123 223 Redundancy Check 246 logical drive 168 reported events 424 425 settings 118 releasing lock 78 212 renewing lock 77 212 replace battery 324 controller 326 327 power supply 323 reported events 410 427 battery 411 BBU 411 blade server 411 cache 411 controller 412 414 CRC 414 disk array 414 drive interface 414 415 enclosure 415 event log 415 Fibre Channel 415 firmware update 416 host interface 416 initiator 417 JBOD 418 logical drive 418 419 Media Patrol 419 online capacity expansion 419 420 parity error 420 PDM 420 physical drive 420 422 power supply 422 423 power supply fan 423 RAID level migration 423 424 rebuild 424 Redundancy Check 424 425 resource not available 425 reported events cont SCSI 425 SEP 425 SMART error 425 Spare Check 425 spare drive 425 stripe level migration 426 subsystem 426 synchronization 426 transition 427 unknown 427 zoning 427 requirements for spare drives 355 resource not available reported event 425 restart the subsystem 83 311 restore default settings 78 306 retur
241. els change stripe size change settings of components such as disk arrays logical drives physical drives and the controller Super Allows the user full access to all functions including create and delete users and changing the settings of other users and delete disk arrays and logical drives The default administrator account is a Super User Changing User Passwords This action requires Administrator or Super User privileges To change a user s password 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the User Management icon 3 Inthe User list Click the user you want then click Change Password 4 In the Change Password dialog box enter the information in the fields provided New Password e Retype Password 5 Click the Save button Note To reset the Administrator s password to the factory default see Resetting the Default Password on page 330 105 VTrak E Class Product Manual Deleting a User This action requires Administrator or Super User privileges Note You cannot delete the Administrator To delete a user 1 2 3 4 Click the Administration tab Click the User Management icon In the User list Click the user you want then click the Delete button In the Confirmation box type the word confirm in the field provided and click the Confirm button Importing a User Database You can save the user information and settings from one VTrak R
242. ended use for this disk array e File Server e Video Stream e Transaction Data e Transaction Log e Other 153 VTrak E Class Product Manual 7 Click the Next button to continue The Summary screen appears with information on disk arrays logical drives and spare drives you are about to create 8 To accept the proposed configuration click the Submit button 9 Click the Finish button to clear the Express Configuration box Note If you disagree with the proposed configuration review and modify your selections in the previous steps Wizard Advanced Configuration This option enables you to directly specify all parameters for a new disk array logical drives and spare drives This action requires Super User or Power User privileges To use the Advanced Configuration Wizard 1 Click the Storage tab 2 Click the Wizard icon 3 Click the Advanced button The Create Disk Array screen displays Task 1 Disk Array Creation To create your disk array 1 Accept the defaults or make changes e Enter an alias in the Alias field e Media Patrol Uncheck to disable on this array For more information see Media Patrol on page 331 e PDM Uncheck to disable on this array For more information see PDM on page 331 e Power management Uncheck to disable on this array e Choose a media type Hard disk drive HDD or solid state drive SSD 2 Click the enclosure graphic to view informat
243. ent Port IPv4 settings screen follows the System Date and Time settings screen To enable automatic management port settings 1 Press the arrow keys to highlight DHCP 2 Press the spacebar to toggle to Enable 3 Press Control A to save these settings and move to the Management Port IPv6 settings screen Viewing Virtual Management Port Settings To view the current IP address and network settings when using DHCP 1 Press the arrow keys to highlight DHCP 2 Press the spacebar to toggle to Disable The following information displays IP Address 192 168 10 85 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway IP Address 192 168 10 1 DNS Server IP Address 192 168 10 11 3 Press the spacebar to toggle DHCP back to Enable 4 Press Control A to save these settings and move to the Management Port IPv6 settings screen 56 Chapter 3 Setup Making Virtual Management Port Settings Manually under IPv4 To make IPv4 settings manually on the management port 1 Press the arrow keys to highlight IP Address 2 Press the backspace key to erase the current IP address 3 Type the new Management Port IP address 4 Follow the same procedure to specify the Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address and DNS Server IP Address If you do not have a DNS server skip the DNS Server IP address 5 Press Control A to save your settings and move to the Management Port IPv6 settings screen Making Virtual Management Port Settings Manually under IPv
244. equires Administrator or Super User privileges To set a user event subscription 1 2 3 4 5 Click the Administration tab Click the User Management icon In the User list click the user you want then click the Subscription button Make settings changes as required For the Enable Event Notification box check to enable for this user uncheck to disable e Click to change the priority options for each category of event Click the Save button Making User Settings This action requires Administrator or a Super User privileges To make user settings 1 2 3 4 Click the Administration tab Click the User Management icon In the User list Click the user you want then click Settings Make settings changes as required For the Enable box check to enable this user account uncheck to disable this user account e In the User Settings dialog box enter a new Display Name or User Email address e Choose a new Privilege level from the dropdown menu See the table on the next page Click the Save button 104 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe User Privileges Level Meaning View Allows the user to see all status and settings but not to make any changes Maintenance Allows the user to perform maintenance tasks including Rebuilding PDM Media Patrol and Redundancy Check Power Allows the user to create but not delete disk arrays and logical drives change RAID lev
245. erver 10 2 x86 x64 Linux Enterprise Server 10 3 x86 x64 SoN AMIATA natively supported Enterprise Server 11 x64 VMware ESX Server v4 0 Update 2 x64 LUN Affinity ALUA ESX Server v4 1 x64 natively supported ESX Server has been qualified by PROMISE and then certified by VMware to be compatible with VTrak For the latest list of supported operating systems go to PROMISE support http www promise com support VTrak E Class Product Manual Supported Browsers Browsers run on the host PC or server from which you monitor and manage the VTrak subsystem using WebPAM PROe The browsers listed here meet the minimum version requirements for browser compatibility e Internet Explorer 8 0 7600 16385 e Firefox for Windows 3 6 13 e Firefox for RHEL 3 0 18 e Firefox for SLES 11 1 3 5 9 e Safari for MacOS 4 0 5 6531 22 7 e Safari for Windows 5 0 2 7533 18 5 For the latest list of supported browsers go to PROMISE support http Awww promise com support General Specifications Power Supplies e 40 24 Bay Dual 750W 100 240 Vac auto ranging 50 60 Hz dual hot swap and redundant with PFC N 1 design Meets 80Plus bronze e 30 16 Bay Dual 580W 100 240 Vac auto ranging 50 60 Hz dual hot swap and redundant with PFC N 1 design Meets 80Plus bronze Voltage e 100 240 VAC e Auto Ranging Current Maximum e 10A 100 VAC e 5A 200 VAC Power Conversion Efficiency e g
246. ess Enter Make new settings as needed 260 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU e Optional Highlight TargetAlias and type an alias into the field provided e Highlight each item and press the Spacebar to toggle between Enable and Disable HeaderDigest Adds a header digest CRC e DataDigest Adds a data digest CRC e UniCHAPAuthen Enables uni directional CHAP authentication e _BiCHAPAuthen Enables bi directional CHAP authentication Authentication requires a pre existing CHAP Highlight Save Settings and press Enter The Add Portals screen appears Highlight each portal that you want to assign to the new target and press the Spacebar to mark it If a portal is marked highlight and press the Spacebar to un mark it When you have maked the portals you want highlight Save Settings and press Enter Press Y to confirm The revised target appears 10 Press Return to Previous Menu to return to the iSCSI targets list Deleting iSCSI Targets You cannot delete the default target Using the CLU to unassign a portal from a target you must delete the target To delete an iSCSI target 1 2 OO Be GO From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI Targets and press Enter The list of iSCSI Targets displays Highlight the target you want to delete and press the Spacebar to mark it Highlight Delete Marked Targets and press Enter Press Y to confirm deletion
247. et up an Initiator or Target tyoe LUN map You can set up both LUN map types on the same subsystem but only one LUN map type can be active at a time 180 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe A maximum of 1024 logical drives can be mapped to an FC initiator or port or to an iSCSI initiator or target To assign a LUN to an initiator add the initiator first See Adding an FC Initiator on page 177 or Adding an iSCSI Initiator on page 178 LUN masking must be enabled in order to map a LUN See Enabling and Disabling LUN Masking on page 183 To add a LUN map 1 2 3 Click the Storage tab Click the LUN Mapping amp Masking icon Beside Active LUN Mapping Type e FC subsystems choose the Initiator or Port option e iSCSI subsystems choose the Initiator or Target option If you change the LUN Mapping Type in the popup message type confirm and click the Confirm button Click the LUN Mapping button The first LUN Mapping screen appears This screen lets you choose initiators ports or targets depending on the Active LUN Mapping Type Click the dropdown menu to choose the initiators ports or targets you want for the LUN map Choose your initiators ports or targets individually or choose all of them Click the Next button The second LUN Mapping screen appears Click a logical drive to highlight it Then click the lt button to assign the logical drive to an initiator or port
248. etwork or serial connections but not a combination of both methods Note 2 Detection Setting must be set to Auto If a UPS is detected the settings changes to Enable 284 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Note 3 The maximum recommended Loading Ratio varies among models of UPS units The general range is 60 to 80 Note 4 To specify UPS units by DNS names ask your IT administrator to add the DNS names to the DNS server before you make UPS settings Viewing UPS Information To view information about a specific UPS unit 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight UPS Management and press Enter Highlight the UPS unit you want and press Enter UPS information includes UPSID Model Name Serial Number Firmware Version e Manufacture Date Voltage Rating Output voltage of the UPS Battery Capacity Backup capacity expressed as a percentage e Remaining Backup Time Number of minutes the UPS is expected to power your system in the event of a power failure Loading Ratio Actual output of UPS as a percentage of the rated output See the Note below Temperature Reported temperature of the UPS unit Note The maximum recommended Loading Ratio varies among models of UPS units The general range is 60 to 80 If the reported Loading Ratio exceeds the recommended value for your UPS unit e Have fewer subsystems or periphe
249. everal options you can specify for a spare drive e System Options e Revertible Returns to its spare drive assignment after you replace the failed physical drive in the disk array and run the Transition function e Media Patrol By default Media Patrol runs on spare drives unless you disable it Spare Type e Global Can be used by any disk array e Dedicated Can be used only by the assigned disk array Media Type type of physical drive e Hard Disk Drive HDD e Solid State Drive SSD Requirements The spare drive must e Have adequate capacity to replace the largest physical drive in your disk arrays Be the same media type as the physical drives in your disk arrays 355 VTrak E Class Product Manual A revertible spare drive requires e You to replace the failed physical drive in the disk array e You to run the Transition function Transition Transition is the process of replacing a revertible spare drive that is currently part of a disk array with an unconfigured physical drive or a non revertible spare The revertible spare drive returns to its original status In order to run the Transition function the spare drive must be revertible In addition you must specify an unconfigured physical drive of the same or larger capacity and same media type as the revertible spare drive Running a Transition The Transition feature enables you to specify permanent spare drives for your VTr
250. ewing a List of Services below e Email Service page 124 e SLP Service page 125 e Webserver Service page 126 e Telnet Service page 127 e SSH Service page 128 e SNMP Service page 129 e CIM Service page 131 e Netsend Service page 132 Viewing a List of Services This feature displays all software services running on the RAID subsystem See the table below To view the list of software services 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon The list of services includes Service Name e Start type Automatic or Manual Email Service Email service enables the RAID subsystem to send you Email messages about events and status changes By default Email service is set to Automatic Stopping Email Service To stop the Email service 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the Email service and click the Stop button 4 Click the Confirm button To start the Email service after stopping it 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the Email service and click the Start button 124 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Restarting Email Service To restart the Email service 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the Email service and click the Restart button Making Email Settings To change Email service settings 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the E
251. f total capacity 0 disk arrays e High I O rates are achieved thanks to multiple stripe segments e Can use an odd number of disks Recommended Applications for RAID 1E e Imaging applications Database servers e General fileserver 337 VTrak E Class Product Manual RAID 5 Block and Parity Stripe RAID 5 organizes block data and parity data across the physical drives Generally RAID Level 5 tends to exhibit lower random write performance due to the heavy workload of parity recalculation for each I O RAID 5 is generally considered to be the most versatile RAID level It works well for file database application and web servers Figure 4 RAID 5 stripes all drives with data and parity information Distributed Parity Data i S 2 Physical Drives The capacity of a RAID 5 logical drive equals the smallest physical drive times the number of physical drives minus one Hence a RAID 5 logical drive with four 100 GB physical drives has a capacity of 300 GB A RAID 5 logical drive with two 120 GB physical drives and one 100 GB physical drive has a capacity of 200 GB RAID 5 is generally considered to be the most versatile RAID level A RAID 5 on VTrak consists of 3 to 32 physical drives Advantages Disadvantages e High Read data transaction rate Disk failure has a medium impact Medium Write data transaction on throughput rate Good aggregate transfer rate e Most versatile RAID level
252. f users The default is group e Group ID Attribute Identification for a group of users The default is CN 5 Click the Save button When LDAP is applied to a user the User Type is LDAP User When LDAP is NOT applied to a user the User Type is local User Privileges Level Meaning View Allows the user to see all status and settings but not to make any changes Maintenance Allows the user to perform maintenance tasks including Rebuilding PDM Media Patrol and Redundancy Check Power Allows the user to create but not delete disk arrays and logical drives change RAID levels change stripe size change settings of components such as disk arrays logical drives physical drives and the controller Super Allows the user full access to all functions including create and delete users and changing the settings of other users and delete disk arrays and logical drives The default administrator account is a Super User 110 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Testing LDAP Settings To test your LDAP settings 1 4 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight LDAP Management and press Enter The LDAP Settings screen appears Highlight LDAP Auth and press Enter The LDAP Authorization screen appears LDAP must be enabled to test the settings Highlight Test and press Enter Viewing a List of Role Maps A Role Map is a
253. figurations button Click the option button next to the script you want to use Click the Next button and review the Summary page To use this script click the Submit button To choose a different script click the Back button In the Confirmation box type the word confirm in the field provided and click the Confirm button Wizard Automatic Configuration This option proposes a disk array and logical drive arrangement You can accept or reject the proposed arrangement but you cannot modify it This action requires Super User or Power User privileges To use the Automatic Configuration Wizard i 2 3 Click the Storage tab Click the Wizard icon Click the Automatic button When you choose the Automatic option the following parameters appear on the screen e Disk Arrays The number of logical drives number of physical drives ID of each physical drive configurable capacity and the media type hard disk drives or solid state drives e Logical Drives The ID numbers of the logical drives their RAID levels capacity sector size and stripe size e Spare Drives The ID numbers of the logical drives type global or dedicated revertible option enabled or disabled and media type A hot spare drive is created for all RAID levels except RAID 0 when five or more unconfigured physical drives are available 152 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe To accept the proposed configuration click t
254. firmware image file click the file to choose it then click the Open button 315 VTrak E Class Product Manual TFTP Server Enter the TFTP Server host name or IP address port number and file name 5 Optional Check the Non disruptive Image Update NDIU box NDIU updates the RAID controllers and I O modules one at a time enabling I O operations continue during the firmware update Updates with this option take a longer period of time to complete Only VTrak x30 models support this feature 6 Click the Next button The next screen shows the Flash Image firmware image file Version Number and Build Date 7 Click the Submit button The progress of the update displays Warning Do NOT power off the RAID subsystem during the update Do NOT move to any other screen until the firmware update operation is completed When the update is completed a message tells you to reboot the subsystem 8 Click the OK button e If you chose the Disruptive Flash Method the RAID subsystem and JBOD expansion units automatically restart e If you chose the Non Disruptive Flash Method the system automatically flashes and restarts the RAID controllers one at a time Automatic Restart If you did NOT check the NDIU box the RAID subsystem and JBOD expansion units automatically restart That action temporarily disrupts I O operations and drops your WebPAM PROe connection To reestablish your WebPAM PROe connection 1
255. for any error in this publication and for damages whether direct indirect incidental consequential or otherwise that may result from such error including but not limited to loss of data or profits PROMISE Technology provides this publication as is without warranty of any kind either express or implied including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose The published information in the manual is subject to change without notice PROMISE Technology reserves the right to make changes in the product design layout and driver revisions without notification to its users This version of this document supersedes all previous versions Recommendations In this Product Manual the appearance of products made by other companies including but not limited to software servers and disk drives is for the purpose of illustration and explanation only PROMISE Technology does not recommend endorse prefer or support any product made by another manufacturer Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 00000 e eee eee 1 About This Manuals cin sarcisseteiea eE aia il aad 1 ViTrak Oveni W jks a eit id ede Oh a ae el ee Pa 2 Architectural Description 0 000 eee 3 Features iu hr a as Goalie gd 29g Mohs aed wh de Ba AA 6 General Specifications 0 cee eee 10 Safety and Environmental 00 0c cece eee 12 Warranty and Support 60 0c eee eee
256. g QLogic 8g sets rports dev_loss_tmo value too small resulting in loss of the path during failover failoack To fix this problem increase the value to 60 seconds 4 SLES 10 With FC switch HBA driver such as Emulex 4g QLogic 8g SP3 sets rports dev_loss_tmo value too small resulting in loss of the path during failover failback To fix this problem increase the value to 60 seconds 5 SLES 11 e With a FC HBA set rports dev_loss_tmo as large as SP1 possible such as Ox7fffffff Set fast_io_failure_tmo to 30 seconds Without these settings the system does not recognize device or the systems hang during boot and failover failoack e Download and update the latest SLES11 SP1 patches from Novell Without these patches the system hangs during failover failback With a Fibre Channel switch a dev_loss_tmo value set too small can result in loss of the path during failover failback Linux maintains the rports dev_loss_tmo value in the sys class fc_remote_port rport xxxx dev_loss_tmo file The Fibre Channel HBA driver sets this value at loading time To change the dev_loss_tmo value to the recommended 60 seconds during runtime type the echo command echo 60 gt sys class fc_remote port rpot 1 0 0 dev_loss tmo 488 Sample multipath conf File Sample multipath conf File Below is a complete multipath conf file for VTrak If you have no other multipath devices on your Host you can use this multipath conf file as show
257. ge 454 e Viewing LUN Performance Statistics on page 456 e Load Balance Policy on page 461 460 Features and Settings Load Balance Policy Load Balance Policy is a method of equalizing the I O traffic over each path by systematically dividing the load among multiple paths Failover Policy No load balancing With Automatic Load Balancing disabled the first path discovered is the primary path I Os follow the active path until it fails then they change to next available path Each LUN uses only one active path See Automatic Load Balancing for Failover Policy on page 460 Round Robin Policy Os follow all active paths changing paths at the specified I O count You can set the I O count in the General tab of the Advanced Settings dialog box If LUN Affinity is enabled do NOT use Round Robin See Making Controller Settings on page 86 or page 216 Round Robin with Subset Policy One or more paths are designated as standby I Os follow all active paths changing at the specified I O count You can set the I O count in the General tab of the Advanced Settings dialog box If LUN Affinity is enabled you can use Round Robin with Subset See Making Controller Settings on page 86 or page 216 Least Queue Depth Policy I Os follow the path with the least number of requests queued Note that you can enable Automatic Load Balancing for LUNs with policy set to Failover See Automatic Load Bala
258. ge 473 e If you cannot see your logical drives make the necessary adjustments and check again 472 Task 1 Meeting Package Requirements Task 1 Meeting Package Requirements The latest device mapper and multipath packages must be loaded onto your Linux host before configuring Device Mapper Multipath DM MP When this document was written the current versions were e For RHEL 5 3 e device mapper 1 02 28 2 el5 e device mapper multipath 0 4 7 23 el5 e For RHEL 5 4 e device mapper 1 02 32 1 el5 e device mapper multipath 0 4 7 30 el5 e For RHEL 5 5 e device mapper 1 02 39 1 el5 e device mapper multipath 0 4 7 34 el5 e For SLES 10 SP2 e device mapper 1 02 13 6 14 e multipath tools 0 4 7 34 38 e For SLES 10 SP3 e device mapper 1 02 13 6 14 e multipath tools 0 4 7 34 50 10 e For SLES 11 device mapper 1 02 27 8 6 e multipath tools 0 4 8 40 1 e For SLES 11 SP1 e device mapper 1 02 27 8 20 e multipath tools 0 4 8 40 21 1 Installing Packages The easiest and most effective way to install the device mapper and multipath tool is during OS installation The device mapper installs by default regardless of the configuration you select However you must manually specify the multipath tool as it does not install as a part of any of the configurations of either OS The multipath tool is listed as an option under Base System For hosts with the OS already installed you can add the device ma
259. gh the sides of the carrier Figure 8 Drive carrier bottom view o C W D D C D C D o 9l Ce 42 a C b C bp C D D C D C C C C J gt Ee e ea O oO O O Figure 9 Drive carrier side view 6 Insert the screws through the proper holes in the carrier and into the drive or adapter e Use the screws supplied with the VTrak or the SAS to SATA adapter e Install four screws per drive 23 VTrak E Class Product Manual e Install two screws per adapter Snug each screw Be careful not to over tighten 7 With the drive carrier handle in open position gently slide the drive carrier into the enclosure Important Press the release button to push the drive carrier into position Do not push the handle See page 23 Figure 7 Proper drive installation ensures adequate grounding and minimizes vibration Always attach the drive to the carrier with four screws 24 Chapter 2 Installation Making Management and Data Connections Examples of VTrak configurations include e Fibre Channel SAN below Fibre Channel DAS page 28 e Fibre Channel with JBOD Expansion page 30 e Fibre Channel SAN No Single Point of Failure page 31 iSCSI Storage Area Network SAN page 34 iSCSI Direct Attached Storage DAS page 3
260. ght Slave Ports and type the port number you want For multiple ports separate the numbers with a comma You can choose any or all port numbers except the Master Port number Highlight Save Trunk and press Enter The new trunk appears in the list You can add up to 8 trunks After you add a trunk you can assign it toa portal See Adding iSCSI Portals on page 264 Making iSCSI Trunk Settings To make trunk settings 1 2 3 4 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight Trunk and press Enter Highlight the trunk you want and press Enter Enter information as required e Highlight Controller and type the controller you want 1 or 2 e Highlight Master Port and type the port number you want 1 to 4 e Highlight Slave Ports and type the port number you want For multiple ports separate the numbers with a comma 271 VTrak E Class Product Manual You can choose any or all port numbers except the Master Port number 5 Highlight Save Settings and press Enter Deleting iSCSI Trunks Before you can delete a trunk you must delete any portals configured on it See Deleting iSCSI Portals on page 265 To delete an iSCSI trunk 1 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight Trunk and press Enter Highlight the trunk you want to delete and press the Spacebar to mark it Highlight Delete Marked Trunks and press Enter Press Y to confirm CFP ON
261. gical Drive ID Use this number to identify the LUN clone in the Logical Drive list 248 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU If you chose a redundant RAID level the LUN clone is automatically synchronized after creation After the LUN clone is created you can manage it like any other logical drive See Making Spare Drive Settings on page 240 Locating a Logical Drive on page 246 and Deleting a Logical Drive on page 243 For users to access the LUN clone you must map it to an initiator See Working with LUN Mapping on page 277 249 VTrak E Class Product Manual Managing the Network Connection Network Management deals with network connections and settings for the VTrak s Management ports Each Management Port can be configured e Making Virtual Management Port Settings page 250 e Making Maintenance Mode Settings page 251 Making Virtual Management Port Settings The VTrak subsystem has a virtual management port enabling you to log into a VTrak with dual controllers using one IP address Before you change settings please see About IP Addresses on page 45 You initially made these settings during subsystem setup You can change them later as required Caution Changing virtual management port settings can interrupt your network connection and require you to log in again Making Automatic Settings Automatic settings require a DHCP server on your network DHCP is currentl
262. h promise suse11 0 4 8 x86_64 rpm ALUA multipath conf vtrak alua sles11 How to Configure MPIO SLES 11 doc normal multipath conf vtrak normal sles11 486 RPM Packages and Documents for Linux MPIO Package Folder Contents SLES11 SP1 packages _ scsi_dh_alua_sles11sp1 2 1 i586 rom scsi_dh_alua_sles11sp1 2 1 x86_64 rom scsi_dh_alua_sles11sp1 2 1 src rpm ALUA multipath conf alua sles11sp1 How to Configure MPIO SLES 11sp1 doc normal multipath conf vtrak normal sles11sp1 How to Configure MPIO SLES 11sp1 doc RHEL 5 3 normal multipath conf vtrak normal rhel5 3 RHEL 5 4 package scsi_dh_alua_Vtrak 1 1 i386 rom scsi_dh_alua_Vtrak 1 1 x86_64 rom scsi_dh_alua_Vtrak 1 1 src rpm ALUA multipath conf vtrak alua rhel5 4 How to Configure MPIO RHEL 5 4 doc normal multipath conf vtrak normal rhel5 4 RHEL 5 5 packages j scsi_dh_alua_Vtrak 2 1 i386 rom scsi_dh_alua_Vtrak 2 1 x86_64 rom scsi_dh_alua_Vtrak 2 1 src rpm ALUA multipath conf alua rhel5 5 How to Configure MPIO RHEL 5 5 doc normal multipath conf normal rhel5 5 487 VTrak E Class Product Manual Linux MPIO Known Issues Issue os Description 1 SLES 11 OS multipath with SAS interface makes kernel panic GMC 2 SLES 11 OS sets default rports dev_loss_tmo value at 10 seconds GMC resulting in loss of the path during failover failback 3 RHEL 5 4 With FC switch HBA driver such as Emulex 4
263. h recipient PC If your Netsend and Messenger service settings are correct but the recipient PC does not receive event messages check the recipient PC s Firewall settings Refer to your OS documentation for more information Adding Netsend recipients To add a Netsend recipient 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight Software Management and press Enter Highlight Netsend and press Enter Highlight Message Recipients and press Enter Highlight Create New Message Recipient and press Enter Type the recipient s IP address into the field provided Highlight Message Event Severity Filter and press the spacebar to change severity levels NOOR WD 301 VTrak E Class Product Manual The selected level and all higher severity levels of severity are reported See the Table below 8 Press Control A to save your settings Event Severity Levels Level Description Fatal Non recoverable error or failure has occurred Critical Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are serious Major Action is needed now Minor Action is needed but the condition is not a serious at this time Warning User can decide whether or not action is required Information Information only no action is required Deleting Netsend Recipients To delete a Netsend recipient 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter
264. hange stripe size change settings of components such as disk arrays logical drives physical drives and the controller Super Allows the user full access to all functions including create and delete users and changing the settings of other users and delete disk arrays and logical drives The default administrator account is a Super User 292 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Testing LDAP Settings To test your LDAP settings 1 4 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight LDAP Management and press Enter The LDAP Settings screen appears Highlight LDAP Auth and press Enter The LDAP Authorization screen appears LDAP must be enabled to test the settings Highlight Test and press Enter Viewing a List of Role Maps A Role Map is a method of mapping a group of users to an LDAP server You must enable LDAP to use Role Mapping You do not have to enable LDAP to manage Role Mapping You must enable LDAP to use Role Mapping See Making LDAP Settings on page 291 You do not have to enable LDAP to manage Role Mapping To view a list of roles 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight LDAP Management and press Enter The LDAP Settings screen appears Highlight Role Mapping and press Enter The list of roles appears Role information includes e External Group Enable and disab
265. he Submit button 5 Click the Finish button to clear the Automatic Configuration box Note If you disagree with the proposed configuration click the Cancel button then click the Express button or the Advanced button and input your parameters manually Wizard Express Configuration When you choose the Express option a set of characteristics and options appears on the screen This action requires Super User or Power User privileges To use the Express Configuration Wizard 1 Click the Storage tab 2 Click the Wizard icon 3 Click the Express button 4 Check the boxes to choose any one or a combination of e Redundancy The array remains available if a physical drive fails e Capacity The greatest possible amount of data capacity e Performance The highest possible read write speed Spare Drive A hot spare drive is created when you choose Redundancy Spare Drive and five or more unconfigured physical drives are available Mixing SATA SAS Drive Check this box if you want to use both SATA and SAS drives in the same disk array If the box is unchecked and you have both SATA and SAS drives a separate array is created for each type of drive 5 Inthe Number of Logical Drives field enter the number of logical drives you want to make from this disk array VTrak supports up to 32 logical drives per disk array 6 From the Application Type menu choose an application that best describes your int
266. he features your HDDs actually support Locating the Controller To locate this controller 1 me w y From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter Highlight Controller Management and press Enter Highlight the controller you want and press Enter Highlight Controller Settings and press Enter Highlight Locate Controller and press Enter The controller LEDs blink for one minute 217 VTrak E Class Product Manual Figure 4 FC RAID controller LEDs Dirty Cache LED Controller Status LED Mgmt 10101 a SAS EXP Ra LJ GD m 20 o o 15200 0 AE ae 8 o Ie e 80 a O ft m o GI ECA G G 218 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Managing the Enclosure Enclosure Management includes the following functions Viewing the Enclosures Summary page 219 Viewing Enclosure Information page 219 Making Enclosure Settings page 220 Viewing FRU VPD Information page 220 Viewing Power Supply Status page 220 Locating a Power Supply page 221 Viewing Cooling Unit Status page 221 Viewing Temperature Sensor Status page 221 Viewing Voltage Sensor Status page 222 Viewing Battery Information page 222 Reconditioning a Battery page 223 Locating an Enclosure page 223 Viewing Enclosure Topology page 223 Viewing the Enclosures Summary Enclosure Management
267. he power supply switches on the RAID subsystem or JBOD expansion units To restart the subsystem DOR GNM N Click the Administration tab Click the Subsystem Information icon Click the Shutdown Restart button Click the Restart button Type the word confirm in the field provided Click the Confirm button When the controller shuts down your WebPAM PROe connection is lost Wait no less than two minutes In your browser click Logout in the WebPAM PROe Header then log in again If you cannot log in immediately wait 30 seconds and try again Shutting Down the Subsystem This function shuts down the RAID subsystem without restarting it To shutdown the subsystem 1 oF ON Click the Administration tab Click the Subsystem Information icon Click the Shutdown Restart button Click the Shutdown button Type the word confirm in the field provided 83 VTrak E Class Product Manual 6 Click the Confirm button When the controller shuts down your WebPAM PROe connection is lost 7 Wait no less than two minutes 8 Manually turn OFF the switches on both power supplies Important If your RAID subsystem manages JBOD expansion units you must follow the proper startup procedure Restarting the Subsystem after a Shutdown Important If your RAID subsystem manages JBOD expansion units always power on the JBOD expansion units first Then power on the RAID subsystem To start the RAI
268. heck is aborted due to internal error Reduce system load on the VTrak Redundancy Check encountered inconsistent block s Check the disk drive check table after RC and replace disk drive as needed Redundancy Check task is queued Redundancy check is in progress No action is required 424 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Reported Event Corrective Action Redundancy Check task is stopped internally Restore the disk array to functional status Redundancy check is started on unsynchronized logical drive No action is required Resource Resource is NOT available Reduce system load on the VTrak SCSI SCSI host interface controller settings have changed No action is required SEP SEP is found No action is required SEP is NOT found Insert or replace SEP hardware SEP I2C device access failure SEP I2C device access recovered from failure If this message appears repeatedly contact Tech Support Spare Check Spare check started on the given spare drive Spare check completed successfully on the given spare drive No action is required Spare Drives Physical disk assigned as global spare Physical disk is no longer assigned as global spare Global Spare has been deleted Physical disk assigned as dedicated spare Physical disk is no longer assigned as dedicated spare Dedicated Spa
269. hing means an intermittent and irregular on off pattern See page 42 Figure 1 VTrak E Class Product Manual Figure 1 Front panel LED display Controller 2 Activity Controller Heartbeat 7 Also see the table below Enclosure Front LEDs Logical Controller Controller siale Power FRU Drive Activity Heartbeat Dark No power No power No Activity Steady Normal Normal Normal green Blinking Normal green Flashing Activity green Amber Problem Critical Red Failure Offline Check the LEDs on the back of the VTrak enclosure Blinks blinks green once per second for five seconds goes dark for ten seconds then blinks green once per second for five seconds again For more information on LEDs see Chapter 8 Troubleshooting on page 375 42 Chapter 3 Setup Drive Status Indicators The VTrak spins up the disk drives sequentially to equalize power draw during start up After a few moments e The Power Activity LED displays blue when a physical drive is present e The Drive Status LED displays green when the physical drive is configured as a member of a disk array or as a spare When the physical drive is unconfigured the LED is dark Steady means the LED is on Blinking means a regular on off pattern Flashing means intermittent and irregular on off pattern See the table on
270. his field e Write Community private no change possible Press Control A to save your settings To start stop or restart the SNMP service highlight Start Stop or Restart and press Enter Managing SNMP Trap Sinks Viewing a List of Trap Sinks To create a trap sink 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight Software Management and press Enter Highlight SNMP and press Enter Highlight Trap Sinks and press Enter A list of the current trap sinks appears Adding a Trap Sink To add a trap sink 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter 298 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU 2 Highlight Software Management and press Enter 3 Highlight SNMP and press Enter 4 Highlight Trap Sinks and press Enter 5 Highlight Create New Trap Sink and press Enter 6 Highlight Trap Sink IP address and press the backspace key to erase the current value then type the new IP address in this field 7 Highlight Trap Filter and press the spacebar to toggle through the severity levels See the Table below 8 Press Control A to save the Trap Sink Event Severity Levels Level Description Fatal Non recoverable error or failure has occurred Critical Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are serious Major Action is needed now Minor Action is needed but the condition is not a serious at this time
271. his schedule 6 Click the Save button Deleting a Scheduled Background Activity Caution Deleting the battery recondition schedule is NOT recommended To change an existing scheduled background activity 1 Click the Administration tab 117 VTrak E Class Product Manual 2 Click the Background Activities icon The list of background appears 3 Click the Scheduler button The list of currently scheduled background act it viti es appears 4 Click the background activity and click the Delete button 5 Inthe confirmation box click the confirm button Media Patrol Media Patrol is a routine maintenance procedure that checks the magnetic media on each disk drive Media Patrol checks are enabled by default on all disk arrays and spare drives Media Patrol is concerned with the media itself not the data recorded on the media If Media Patrol encounters a critical error it triggers PDM if PDM is enabled on the disk array See Making Disk Array Settings on page 157 Running Media Patrol on a Disk Array on page 158 and Media Patrol on page 331 Making Media Patrol Settings To make Media Patrol settings 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Background Activities icon The list of background appears 3 Click the Settings button 4 Check the Enable Media Patrol box to enable uncheck to disable This settings enables or disables Media Patrol for your entire RAID system 5 Click the Confirm button
272. hlight the Start Month and End Month and enter a number from 1 to 12 Then highlight the Week and Day and toggle to make your choices Press Control A to save your settings Notes e The NTP server name shown is an example only You must find and enter your local NTP server name e GMT is the older designation for UTC 213 VTrak E Class Product Manual Synchronizing with a NTP Server The VTrak subsystem automatically synchronizes with a NTP server every night and a startup You have the option of synchronizing manually at any time To manually synchronize the VTrak with a NTP server 1 From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter 2 Highlight NTP Management and press Enter 3 Highlight Start Time Sync and press Enter 4 Press Y to confirm To verify check Last Synchronization Time and Last Synchronization Result 214 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Managing the RAID Controllers RAID controller management includes the following functions Viewing Controller Information page 215 Clearing an Orphan Watermark page 215 Making Controller Settings page 216 Locating the Controller page 217 Viewing Controller Information Controller Management includes information settings and statistics To access Controller Management 1 2 3 From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter Highlight Controller Management and press Enter The Controller summ
273. hreshold fields See Note 2 e Running Time Remaining Threshold Actual time below this value resets adaptive writeback cache to writethrough e Warning Temperature Threshold Actual temperature above this value triggers a warning and logs an event e Loading Ratio Threshold Actual loading ratio percentage above this threshold triggers a warning and logs an event See Note 3 e For UPS units with network cards type the IP addresses or DNS names in fields UPS 1 and UPS 2 See Note 4 Press Control A to save your settings Note 1 VTrak supports multiple UPS units using network or serial connections but not a combination of both methods Note 2 Detection Setting must be set to Auto If a UPS is detected the settings changes to Enable Note 3 The maximum recommended Loading Ratio varies among models of UPS units The general range is 60 to 80 Note 4 To specify UPS units by DNS names ask your IT administrator to add the DNS names to the DNS server before you make UPS settings 97 VTrak E Class Product Manual Viewing UPS Information To view information about a specific UPS unit Click the Device tab Click the UPS icon Mouse over UPS and click the View button 1 2 3 UPS information includes UPS ID Model Name Serial Number Firmware Version Manufacture Date Voltage Rating Output voltage of the UPS Battery Capacity Backup capacity expressed as a percentage Remaining Backup Time
274. hysical drive 5 remains unconfigured Physical drive 6 is a revertible spare drive 2 Failed 3 Drive 4 5 6 Rebuild to Spare If a physical drive fails in a disk array and there is a spare drive of adequate capacity available the controller automatically rebuilds the array using the spare 357 VTrak E Class Product Manual drive In this example physical drive 3 failed and the array is rebuilt using physical drive 6 the revertible spare drive Array Drives When the rebuild is complete the spare drive has replaced the failed drive In this example failed drive 3 was replaced by spare drive 6 The disk array now consists of physical drives 1 2 4 and 6 There is no spare drive at this moment Even if physical drive 5 is of adequate capacity it has not been designated as a spare therefore the controller cannot use it as a Spare 358 Chapter 7 Technology Background Automatic Transition At this juncture you would replace the failed drive in slot 3 with a new one of the same or greater capacity 1 2 Array Drives 3 4 5 Spare 6 Drive When the VTrak controller detects the new drive in slot 3 the controller e Automatically transitions the data on drive 6 to drive 3 e Returns drive 6 to spare status When the Automatic Transition is finished physical drives 1 2 3 and 4 belong to the disk array and physical drive 6 is a revertible spare drive The original configuration is restore
275. i ate rr_wei ght uniform rr_min_io 100 no_path_retry 20 features 1 queue if_no_ path product blacklist VTrak V LUN 5 Edit the file to include the following lines under devnode_blacklist devnode blacklist devnode sda devnode ramlraw loop fd md dm sr scd st 0 9 devnode hd a z devnode cciss c 0 9 d 0 9 6 Be sure all the relevant lines of your configuration file are uncommented Remove the character from the beginning of the line 7 Save the file as multipath conf 8 Place a copy of the multipath conf file into the Host s ete directory 477 VTrak E Class Product Manual Task 3 Making Initial Host Settings After the packages and configuration file are installed the Host is ready to accept multipath settings Setting the Daemon to Run RHEL 5 3 5 4 5 5 This action requires RHEL installation with the linux mpath Option See Before You Begin on page 471 To set the MP daemon to run at boot time 1 Open a terminal window 2 Verify that ete re d rc 3 5 d has a symbolic link to etc re d init d multipathd Also see the Note below Run the command ls al etc rc d rc 3 5 d grep multipathd 3 If there is no symbolic link run the command cd Jetc rc d rc 3 5 d Then run the command in s Jetc rc d init d multipathd S 13multipathd Note etc rc d rc 3 5 d saves a link to start at each run level e Run level 3 is for a single user
276. iSCSI Connections 0000 eee eee Managing Background Activity 0 0 eee eee Working with the Event Viewer 00 2 eee eae Working with LUN Mapping 2 200 ee eee eee Managing UPS Units 000 cee ee Managing Users 2c s c0 0te deergow Diges whoo lhe eeeeat Managing EDAP a4 2 205 tence be ail Ghee OS Laks Shaheen BS Working with Software Management 20005 Flashing through TFTP 0 eet eee Viewing Flash Image Information 0 200 eae Clearing Statistics 0 cece Restoring Factory Defaults 2 02000 0c eee eee Shutting Down the Subsystem 0 000 c eee eee Starting Up After Shutdown 0 0000 e eee eee Restarting the Subsystem 0 00 c cece eee BUZZePr gis eau beet aa Melee da eet e gl gana AL Contents Chapter 6 Maintenance 0020s cece eee eee ees 315 Updating the Subsystem Firmware 20000eeeee 315 Updating Physical Drive Firmware 000 ee aa 321 Replacing a Power Supply 20 0c cee eee eee 323 Replacing a Cache Backup Battery 0055 324 Replacing a RAID Controller Dual Controllers 326 Replacing a RAID Controller Single Controller 327 Resetting the Default Password 00 0c eee eee 330 Chapter 7 Technology Background 0 00eeeeeeees 331 DISK AMOY weir e ance auPe Geet
277. iSCSI Targets page 189 e Viewing iSCSI Target Information page 189 e Adding iSCSI Targets page 190 e Making iSCSI Target Settings page 191 e Deleting an iSCSI Target page 191 e Assigning a Portal to an iSCSI Target page 192 e Un assigning a Portal from an iSCSI Target page 192 e Viewing a List of iSCSI Portals page 192 e Viewing iSCSI Portal Information page 193 e Adding iSCSI Portals page 194 e Making iSCSI Portal Settings page 194 e Deleting iSCSI Portals page 195 e Viewing a List of iSCSI Ports page 195 e Viewing iSCSI Port Information page 196 e Making iSCSI Port Settings page 196 e Viewing a List of iSCSI Trunks page 197 e Adding iSCSI Trunks page 197 e Making iSCSI Trunk Settings page 198 e Deleting iSCSI Trunks page 198 e Viewing a List of iSCSI Sessions page 198 e Viewing iSCSI Session Information page 199 e Making iSCSI Session Settings page 200 e Deleting an iSCSI Session page 200 e Making iSCSI Session Settings page 200 e Viewing iSCSI iSNS Information page 200 e Making iSCSI ISNS Settings page 201 e Viewing a List of iSCSI CHAPs page 201 e Adding iSCSI CHAPs page 201 e Making iSCSI CHAP Settings page 202 e Deleting iSCSI CHAPs page 202 e Pinging a Host or Server on the iSCSI Network page 202 Also see e Adding an iSCSI Initiator on page 178 e iSCSI Management on page 366 188 Chapter 4 Management with Web
278. iSCSI ports on the same RAID controller Also known as a link aggregation This feature combines ports to increase bandwidth Once you have made a port association you cannot change it If you have no portals with the port association you want create a new portal Each iSCSI portal can belong to a different VLAN VTrak supports 32 VLANs Port A port is the physical point of connection between the VTrak and the iSCSI network There are four ports on each RAID controller for a total of eight When you create a portal you specify one or more ports Each port has a unique MAC address There are two options for each iSCSI port Enable Port Turns the port on or off e Jumbo Frame Enables jumbo frame support on the port The standard Ethernet frame is 1518 bytes with 1500 bytes for payload A jumbo frame ranges from 1500 bytes to 9000 bytes of payload Because jumbo frames carry more data they are used to reduce network management overhead thereby increasing network throughput 371 VTrak E Class Product Manual Trunk A trunk is an aggregation of two or more iSCSI ports on the same RAID controller Also known as a link aggregation This feature combines ports to increase bandwidth Ports must be enabled to add them to a trunk Trunks are identified by their Trunk IDs When you create a trunk you specify e Controller ID RAID controller whose iSCSI ports you are using e Master port Any available iSCSI po
279. ice To stop the SNMP service 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the SNMP service and click the Stop button 4 Click the Confirm button To start the SNMP service after stopping it 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 129 VTrak E Class Product Manual 3 Click the SNMP service and click the Start button Restarting SNMP Service To restart the SNMP service 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the SNMP service and click the Restart button Making SNMP Settings To change SNMP service settings 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the SNMP service and click the Settings button 4 Make settings changes as required e Choose a startup type e Automatic default Starts and runs with the subsystem e Manual You start the service when you need it e Port Number Default is 161 System Name No default e System Location Default is USA e System Contact Default is admin yourcompany com e Read Community Default is public e Write Community Default is private No changes are possible 5 Click the Save button 6 Click the Confirm button Adding an SNMP Trap Sink To add a trap sink 1 Click the Administration tab Click the Services icon Click the SNMP service and click the Settings button Enter a trap sink server IP address in the field provided
280. ide the battery into the RAID controller 2 Replace and tighten the set screw 3 Verify that the battery LED is green 324 Chapter 6 Maintenance Figure 3 Cache backup battery Dirty cache LED Battery LED Set screw VTrak E830f and E630f Dirty cache LED Battery LED Set screw VTrak E330f 325 VTrak E Class Product Manual Replacing a RAID Controller Dual Controllers The RAID controller monitors and manages the logical drives When the RAID controller is replaced all of your logical drive data and configurations remain intact because logical drive information is stored on the physical drives Important e Do not replace the RAID controller based on LED colors alone Only replace the RAID controller when directed to do so by PROMISE Technical Support See page 435 e The firmware version and amount of SDRAM must be the same on the replacement RAID controller and the other RAID controller in the subsystem To obtain firmware and SDRAM information for an installed RAID controller in WebPAM PROe click the Administration button then click the Image Version icon Replacement RAID controllers to not come with a BBU Remove the BBU from the old controller and install it into the new one See Replacing a Cache Backup Battery on page 324 Note On subsystems with dual RAID controllers you
281. ifier assigned to this logical drive Codec Scheme Pertains to some RAID levels Serial Number Assigned to this logical drive 163 VTrak E Class Product Manual Viewing Logical Drive Statistics To view logical drive statistics 1 2 Click the Storage tab Click the Logical Drive icon The list of logical drives appears Click the logical drive you want then click the View button Click the Statistics tab Logical Drive statistics display including e Data Transferred In bytes e Read Data Transferred In bytes e Write Data Transferred In bytes e Errors e Read Errors e Write Errors O Requests e Non Read Write I O Requests e Read I O Requests e Write I O Requests e Statistics Start Time e Statistics Collection Time To clear physical drive statistics see Clearing Statistics on page 79 Viewing Logical Drive Check Tables This feature enables you to view error tables Use this information to evaluate the integrity of the logical drive and to determine whether corrective action is needed To view logical drive check tables 1 2 Click the Storage tab Click the Logical Drive icon The list of logical drives appears Click the logical drive you want then click the Check Table button Choose an option e All All errors The default choice e Read Check Read errors for this logical drive e Write Check Write errors for this logical drive 164
282. ight following and press the spacebar to toggle through Low Medium and High rates e Rebuild Rebuilds data to a replacement physical drive in a disk array e Migration Change RAID level or add physical drives to disk arrays 273 VTrak E Class Product Manual e PDM Migrates data from a suspect physical drive to a replacement drive in a disk array e Transition Returns a revertible spare drive to spare status e Synchronization Checks the data integrity on disk arrays initialization Full initialization sets all data bits in the logical drive to a specified pattern such as all zeros e Redundancy Check Checks reports and can correct data inconsistencies in logical drives The rates are defined as follows e Low Fewer resources to activity more to data read write e Medium Balance of resources to activity and data read write e High More resources to activity fewer to data read write 5 Highlight the following PDM trigger settings and press the backspace key to erase the current value BBM Threshold 1 to 2048 reassigned blocks e Media Patrol Threshold 1 to 2048 error blocks 6 Press Control A to save your settings 274 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Working with the Event Viewer Working with the Event Viewer includes the following functions Viewing Runtime Events page 275 Clearing Runtime Events page 276 Viewing NVRAM Events page 276 Clearing NVRAM Eve
283. iled Over as partner is removed Controller Failed Over as heart beat stopped Verify that the partner controller is properly installed and all cables are connected Controller Firmware mismatch with that of the partner controller Auto Firmware synchronization upgrades or downgrades the firmware Controller set to Maintenance Mode because of hardware mismatch with partner controller Compare controller types and amount of memory installed Correct or update as needed Controller set to Maintenance Mode because of firmware mismatch with partner controller Update this controller to the same firmware version as the partner controller Controller set to Maintenance Mode because Firmware is flashing in the partner controller Exit out of Maintenance mode after firmware flashing is complete Controller set to Maintenance Mode because of flash image version mismatch with partner controller Update this controller to the same flash image version as the partner controller Controller has been set to Maintenance mode because there is a mismatch in the Controller Model or Hardware version with that of the partner controller Replace this controller with the same Model and Hardware version as the partner controller Controller has been set to Maintenance mode because there is a mismatch in the memory size with that of the partner controller Replace this controller s memory with the same me
284. initialization when ready Logical drive initialization has resumed No action is required Logical drive initialization has stopped If this action was not intentional check the logical drive s status Logical drive initialization marks the logical drive offline Replace the failed physical drive Delete and recreate the logical drive Logical drive initialization is aborted due to an internal error Reduce system load on the VTrak Logical drive initialization is queued Quick logical drive initialization has started Quick logical drive initialization has completed No action is required Quick logical drive initialization has paused Resume the initialization when ready Quick logical drive initialization has resumed No action is required Quick logical drive initialization has stopped If this action was not intentional check the logical drive s status Quick logical drive initialization marks the logical drive offline Replace the failed physical drive Delete and recreate the logical drive Quick logical drive Initialization is aborted due to an internal error Reduce system load on the VTrak 418 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Reported Event Corrective Action Quick logical drive initialization is queued A new logical drive has been created Logical drive has been deleted Logical drive has been placed online
285. initiator add 177 278 delete 178 279 list 177 255 278 initiators on the fabric 186 logged in devices 186 252 node 184 252 port information 184 252 277 port settings 185 253 port statistics 186 254 reported events 415 SFPs 186 254 topology 185 transceivers 26 28 31 186 254 firmware update CLU 317 319 reported event 416 WebPAM PROe 315 firmware version 85 304 flash image information 88 304 force offline 146 227 forced read ahead cache 363 forced unlock 78 212 FRU status LED 41 377 379 VPD information 94 220 G global spare drive 172 239 355 H HBA card Fibre Channel 26 28 31 Head Unit 92 224 heartbeat LED 41 377 host cache flushing explained 363 settings 87 216 503 VTrak E Class Product Manual host interface reported events 416 host support browsers 10 operating systems 8 l import configuration script 82 user database 106 initialization logical drive 168 245 settings 119 274 initiator Fibre Channel add 177 278 delete 178 279 iSCSI add 178 reported events 417 interface WebPAM PROe 72 Internet access WebPAM PROe 68 IP address default 406 DHOP or static 45 DHCP server changed 408 email server 295 maintenance mode 50 57 101 251 management port default 45 Netsend recipient 301 physical ports default 45 UPS unit 97 284 virtual management port 47 56 69 100 250 iPad iPhone 491 499 iSCSI assign portal to target 192 260 cable connections 34
286. internal controller failure When a controller enters maintenance mode it goes offline and it displays N A not accessible under Readiness Status You must find and correct the cause of the problem and then take the controller out of maintenance mode see page 396 Finding and Correcting the Cause of the Problem External Checks Make the following external checks to your VTrak subsystem Be sure that e Both RAID controllers are present fully inserted into their slots and locked into place e The RAID controllers match meaning both are Fibre Channel or both are iSCSI e All SAS expansion cables from the RAID controllers to external JBOD units in good condition and are securely connected Important A disconnected SAS expansion cable causes the two RAID controllers to see a different set of configured drives This condition is the most common cause of a controller entering maintenance mode 395 VTrak E Class Product Manual Internal Checks If all external checks are OK take the following actions 1 OM ND Shut down the VTrak See page 83 WebPAM PROe or page 248 CLU Remove one of the RAID controllers See Replacing a RAID Controller Dual Controllers on page 326 Restart the VTrak After the VTrak is fully booted view the controller information See page 85 WebPAM PROe or page 215 CLU Observe and record the following information about the first controller e SDRAM memory size e H
287. ion about physical drives 154 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Look for drives with a green LED dark a blue LED lit and no crosshatching over the carrier m Green LED dark Blue LED lit 3 Click a physical drive to select it for your array The physical drive s ID number is added to the Selected list 4 Click the Next button to continue The Create Logical Drive screen displays Task 2 Logical Drive Creation To create your logical drive 1 Enter your information and choose your options e Enter a logical drive alias in the field provided e Choose a RAID level from the dropdown menu Note the Max capacity value Then enter a capacity value the field provided and choose a unit of measure from the dropdown menu Choose a Stripe size 64 KB 128 KB 256 KB 512 KB and 1 MB are available e Choose a Sector size 512 B 1 KB 2 KB and 4 KB are available e Choose a Read cache Policy The choices are Read Cache Read Ahead cache and None e Choose a Write cache Policy The choices are WriteThru write through and WriteBack Write back requires a Read Cache or Read Ahead Read Cache Policy e RAID 6 and 60 only Choose a scheme from the dropdown menu The choices are P Q and Q Q If in doubt use the default P Q e Choose a preferred controller ID from the dropdown menu The choices are Controller 1 Controller 2 and Automatic If in doubt use the default Automatic 2 Clic
288. ion is required Online capacity expansion has stopped If this action was not intentional check the logical drive s status Online capacity expansion has encountered a physical disk error Check the physical drive check table after OCE is finished Online capacity expansion is aborted due to an internal error Reduce system load on the VTrak Online capacity expansion is queued No action is required Parity Parity error is detected during Data Out phase If this message appears repeatedly contact Tech Support PDM PDM is started PDM is in progress PDM is completed No action is required PDM is paused Resume PDM when ready PDM is resumed No action is required PDM is stopped If this action was not intentional check the disk array s status PDM is switched to rebuild Replace the dead physical drive or reinstall the missing drive PDM is stopped internally The destination drive was removed or used for a rebuild Physical Disk Physical Drive Physical disk is marked online No action is required Physical disk is marked offline Physical disk is marked as DEAD Physical disk has been reset Replace the physical drive 420 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Reported Event Corrective Action Physical disk assigned as global spare Global Spare has been deleted Physical Di
289. ion tab Click the Subsystem Information icon Click the Lock Unlock button In the Lock Time field type a new lock time in minutes 1440 minutes 24 hours Click the Lock button 77 VTrak E Class Product Manual Releasing the Lock To release a lock that you set 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Subsystem Information icon 3 Click the Lock Unlock button 4 Click the Unlock button Releasing a Lock set by another user To release somebody else s lock 1 Click the Administration tab Click the Subsystem Information icon Click the Lock Unlock button Check the Force Unlock box Click the Unlock button Cl Oo 19 Restoring Factory Default Settings This feature restores settings to their default values Caution Use this feature only when required and only on the settings that you must reset to default in order to set them correctly Note To reset the Administrator s password to the factory default see Resetting the Default Password on page 330 To restore all settings to their default values 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Restore Factory Default icon 3 Inthe Restore factory default settings screen check the boxes beside the settings you want to reset to default value 78 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Firmware Factory Default Settings Background activity settings Controller settings Enclosure settings FC port settings iSCSI
290. is condition is temporary Synchronizing is a maintenance function that verifies the integrity of data and redundancy in the logical drive When a logical drive is Synchronizing it functions and your data is available However access is slower due to the synchronizing operation Critical Degraded This condition arises as the result of a physical drive failure A degraded logical drive still functions and your data is still available However the logical drive has lost redundancy fault tolerance You must determine the cause of the problem and correct it Rebuilding This condition is temporary When a physical drive has been replaced the logical drive automatically begins rebuilding in order to restore redundancy fault tolerance When a logical drive is rebuilding it functions and your data is available However access is slower due to the rebuilding operation Transport Ready After you perform a successful Prepare for Transport operation this condition means you can remove the physical drives of this disk array and move them to another enclosure or different drive slots After you relocate the physical drives the disk array status shows OK 149 VTrak E Class Product Manual Creating a Disk Array Manually This feature creates a disk array only You can also use the Wizard to create a disk array with logical drives and spare drives at the same time This action requires Super User or Power User privileges T
291. is down For VTrak you must use the CLI or CLU to set the Management Port IP address in order for WebPAM PROe to connect with it See Setting up the Serial Connection on page 44 This issue is discussed further under Network Connections below See Making Serial Cable Connections on page 40 for more information on making the connection The CLI and CLU control and manage but they do not move data They communicates through a RJ11 to DB9 serial data cable supplied with the VTrak You may choose not use the CLI or CLU often and want to disconnect and store the cable Consider leaving it connected so you know where it is the next time you need it 405 VTrak E Class Product Manual Network Connections Each RAID controller has an Ethernet RJ45 management port connector on the back of the enclosure This is a Gigabit Ethernet connector designed to connect to your network The VTrak becomes a node on your network like any other PC server or other component with an IP address VTrak ships from the factory IP addresses of 10 0 0 1 10 0 0 2 and 10 0 0 3 You must change these addresses to ones that work on your network You make the initial IP address setting using the CLI or CLU See Setting up the Serial Connection on page 44 Figure 3 Management port connection on the RAID controller Mgmt Activity LED Connectivity LED a oy Management Port LEDs State Activity Connectiv
292. is feature is designed for fault tolerant logical drives RAID 1 1E 5 10 50 and 60 It is generally recommended to use physical drives of the same size in your disk arrays When this is not possible the system adjusts for the size differences by reducing or coercing the capacity of the larger drives to match the smaller ones With VTrak you can choose to enable capacity coercion and any one of four methods Enable capacity coercion and choose a method see Making Controller Settings on page 86 or page 216 The choices are e GB Truncate Default Reduces the useful capacity to the nearest 1 000 000 000 byte boundary e 10GB Truncate Reduces the useful capacity to the nearest 10 000 000 000 byte boundary e Group Rounding Uses an algorithm to determine how much to truncate Results in the maximum amount of usable drive capacity e Table Rounding Applies a predefined table to determine how much to truncate Capacity coercion also affects a replacement drive used in a disk array Normally when an physical drive fails the replacement drive must be the same capacity or larger However the capacity coercion feature permits the installation of a 364 Chapter 7 Technology Background replacement drive that is slightly smaller within 1 gigabyte than the remaining working drive For example the remaining working drives can be 80 5 GB and the replacement drive can be 80 3 since all are rounded down to 80 GB
293. isplayed on the iSCSI Ping screen Viewing a List of iSCSI Trunks A trunk is the aggregation of two or more iSCSI ports to increase bandwidth To view a list of iSCSI trunks 1 2 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight Trunk and press Enter The list of iSCSI Trunks displays e ID ID number of the trunk Starts at 1 Ctrlld RAID controller ID 1 or 2 Master Port One of the four physical ports on the RAID controller 270 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Slave Ports Any or all of the remaining physical ports on the same RAID controller e Failed Ports A slave port that has no iSCSI data connection e State Optimal Sub Optimal or Failed Identify and correct the failed iSCSI ports Adding iSCSI Trunks Ports must be enabled to add them to a trunk See Making iSCSI Port Settings on page 262 VTrak supports a maximum of eight trunks You cannot use an iSCSI port that has portals configured to it See Viewing a List of iSCSI Portals on page 263 and Deleting iSCSI Portals on page 265 To add an iSCSI Trunk 1 2 3 4 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight Trunk and press Enter Highlight Create New Trunk and press Enter Enter information as required e Highlight Controller and type the controller you want 1 or 2 e Highlight Master Port and type the port number you want 1 to 4 e Highli
294. ist of Initiators below e Adding an FC Initiator page 177 e Deleting an FC Initiator page 178 e Adding an iSCSI Initiator page 178 Viewing a List of Initiators The VTrak s initiator list displays initiators available for mapping to a LUN or logical drive You must add initiators to the VTrak s initiator list to make them available for mapping to a LUN To view a list of initiators 1 Click the Storage tab 2 Click the Initiator icon The list of initiators appears Initiator information includes e Index Initiator O Initiator 1 Initiator 2 etc e initiator Name Fibre Channel The World Wide Port Name of the initiator composed of a series of eight two digit hexadecimal numbers iSCSI The iSCSI name of the initiator device composed of a single text string Also see Viewing a List of FC Initiators on the Fabric on page 186 Adding an FC Initiator You must add an initiator to the VTrak s initiator list in order to map your LUN or logical drive to the initiator Method 1 Inputting the Initiator Name This action requires Administrator or Super User privileges To add a Fibre Channel initiator to the list 1 Click the Storage tab 2 Click the Initiator icon 3 Click the Add Initiator button 4 Input the initiator name in the fields provided An FC initiator name is the World Wide Port Name of the initiator composed of a series of eight two digit hexadecimal numbers 177 VTra
295. istics e Inthe Tree right click the LUN 1 icon and choose Clear Path Statistics from the popup menu 459 VTrak E Class Product Manual Features and Settings Features and Settings include the following functions Automatic Load Balancing for Failover Policy page 460 e Load Balance Policy page 461 e Path Verification page 462 e PDO Removal page 463 e Performance Tab Refresh Rate page 464 e Round Robin Count page 464 e Refreshing the Objects page 465 e Viewing System Information page 465 e Saving System Information page 466 Automatic Load Balancing for Failover Policy The PROMISE MPIO solution can load balance the paths for your LUNs with load balance policy set to Failover With Automatic Load Balancing enabled the LUNs set to Failover policy are automatically redistributed among all available paths when A path fails A failed path comes back online e Anew path is added Automatic Load Balancing when enabled provides optimal data throughput for LUNs set to Failover policy Note that Automatic Load Balancing has NO effect upon LUNs set to Round Robin Round Robin with Subset or Least Queue Depth Enabling Automatic Load Balancing To enable automatic load balancing From the Operations menu choose Auto Load Balance When you see a check mark beside Auto Load Balance in the Operations menu this feature is enabled See also e Viewing LUN Properties on pa
296. istinguished name used to authenticate communication between subsystem and LDAP server No default value Bind Password Password for Bind DN No default value Email notification for Event Enables an email subscription for an LDAP authenticated user 108 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Object Class For email notification The default is person Full Name Attribute Stores user s full name in LDAP server displayName is the default Email Address Attribute Stores user s email address in LDAP server mail is the default Privilege for LDAP Users Default Privilege or Using Role Mapping Default Privilege Applies to Default Role Policy View Maintenance Power or Super Base DN of Group The base DN for a group of users Object Class of Group The object class for a group of users The default is group Group ID Attribute Identification for a group of users The default is CN Making LDAP Settings This action requires Administrator or a Super User privileges To make user LDAP settings Click the Administration tab Click the User Management icon Click the LDAP Settings button Enter information and make settings as required 1 2 3 4 Enable LDAP Check the box to enable LDAP Response Time Out Maximum time to allowed for communication with LDAP server Base DN Distinguished name used as based object entry search dc example dc com
297. ity Dark No activity 10BaseT Steady green 100BaseT Flashing green Activity Amber 1000BaseT Note that VTrak s virtual and maintenance ports can accept IP address assignments from a DHCP server Use VTrak s Command Line Utility CLU to enable this feature If you manually assigned an IP address to the VTrak but there is a DHCP server on your network there is a chance that the server might assign the VTrak s IP address to another node You might see a warning to this effect on your PC s monitor If this happens WebPAM PROe may not be able to connect See your network administrator to work out a suitable arrangement Fibre Channel Connections When there is a connection failure use WebPAM PROe to verify that VTrak sees the initiators See Viewing a List of FC Initiators on the Fabric on page 186 or page 255 406 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting If VTrak sees some initiators but not the one you want the problem is most likely elsewhere in the loop or fabric If VTrak does not see any initiators e Check all of the Fibre Channel connections e Verify that all nodes are properly connected and powered e Verify that the fabric router or switch is properly connected powered For more information see Managing Fibre Channel Connections on page 184 or page 252 SAS Connections Faulty SAS expansion connections are suspected when the link port counter reports a large number of bad link er
298. k E Class Product Manual 5 Click the Submit button The initiator is added Method 2 Adding from a List This action requires Administrator or Super User privileges To add a Fibre Channel initiator to the list 1 aPF oN Click the Device tab Click the Fibre Channel Management icon Click the Logged In Device tab Check the box next to the initiator you want to add Click the Add to Initiator List button The initiator is added and its check box grays out Deleting an FC Initiator Caution If you delete an initiator you delete the LUN map associated with that initiator Verify that the LUN map is no longer needed before deleting the initiator This action requires Administrator or Super User privileges To delete an FC initiator 1 2 3 4 Click the Storage tab Click the Initiator icon Click the initiator you want then click the Delete button In the Confirmation box type the word confirm in the field provided and click the Confirm button The initiator is removed from VTrak s initiator list Adding an iSCSI Initiator To add an iSCSI initiator to the list 1 2 3 4 Click the Storage tab Click the Initiator icon Click the Add Initiator button Input the initiator name in the fields provided An iSCSI initiator name is the iSCSI name of the initiator device composed of a single text string 178 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Example iqn 19
299. k the LEDs on the back of VTrak These LEDs give the status of the field replaceable units e RAID controller e Power supply Under normal conditions the controller status LED marked with 1 icon and battery status LED display green The dirty cache LED marked with A icon is dark 379 VTrak E Class Product Manual Figure 3 FC RAID controller LEDs Dirty cache LED Controller status LED ups Mgmt lolol aS SAS EXP o M Mi G MoOe ejo oO f a 5 20 o o o 520 40 o IE o e o Ee 80 e o o im LECIA lt i gt G GZ Battery status LED Figure 4 iSCSI RAID controller LEDs Dirty cache LED Controller status LED SAS EXP B om Battery status LED Under normal conditions the power supply status LEDs display green Figure 5 Power supply LED Status LED 380 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Enclosure Back LEDs Power State Status Dirty Cache Battery Supply Dark No power Normal No power or No power Failed Steady Green Normal Normal Normal Blinking Locator Locator Locator Green feature feature feature Steady Amber Surviving Unsaved data Less than 72 in cache hours reserve Flashing Normal Amber Steady Red Failed Failed Failed F
300. k the Add button The new logical drive appears on the list at the right If there is capacity remaining you can create an additional logical drive 3 Click the Next button to continue The Create Spare Drive screen displays 155 VTrak E Class Product Manual Task 3 Spare Drive Creation To create your spare drive 1 For each of the following items accept the default or change the settings as required e Check the Revertible box if you want a revertible spare drive A revertible spare drive returns to its spare drive assignment after you replace the failed physical drive in the disk array and run the Transition function e Global Can be used by any disk array e Dedicated to newly created disk array The disk array you are now creating 2 Inthe Select Physical Drives diagram click a drive to choose it for your spare The ID number for chosen drive appears in the field below the diagram 3 Click the Next button The Summary screen displays Task 4 Summary Review your choices of disk array logical drives and spare drive To make a change click the Back button to reach the appropriate screen To accept click the Submit button Click the Finish button to clear the Summary screen Deleting a Disk Array Caution If you delete a disk array you also delete any logical drives that belong to it along with the data in those logical drives Back up any important data before deleting a disk array
301. k the Events icon Click the Save button Follow your browser s procedure to save the event file to the desired location Clearing Runtime Events To clear the Runtime Events log 1 2 3 4 Click the Administration tab Click the Events icon Click the Clear button In the Confirmation box type the word confirm in the field provided and click the Confirm button Viewing NVRAM Events This screen displays a list of and information about the most important events over multiple subsystem startups To display NVRAM events 1 2 3 Click the Administration tab Click the Events icon Click the NVRAM Events button The log of NVRAM Events appears Events are added to the top of the list Each item includes e Index number Begins with 0 at system startup e Device Disk Array Logical Drive Physical Drive by its ID number e Event ID Hexadecimal code for the specific event e Severity See the Table on the previous page e Timestamp Date and time the event happened 136 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe 4 e Description A description of the event in plain language Press the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the log Saving NVRAM Events This feature saves a plain text file of NVRAM events to your host PC or server using your browser To save NVRAM Events 1 OF PON Click the Administration tab Click the Events icon Click the NVRAM Events
302. kground RAID 1 Mirror When a logical drive is mirrored identical data is written to a pair of physical drives while reads are performed in parallel The reads are performed using elevator seek and load balancing techniques where the workload is distributed in the most efficient manner Whichever drive is not busy and is positioned closer to the data is accessed first With RAID 1 if one physical drive fails or has errors the other mirrored physical drive continues to function Moreover if a spare physical drive is present the spare drive is used as the replacement drive and data begins to mirrored to it from the remaining good drive Figure 2 RAID 1 Mirrors identical data to two drives Data Mirror Physical Drives The logical drive s data capacity equals the smaller physical drive For example a 100 GB physical drive and a 120 GB physical drive have a combined capacity of 100 GB in a mirrored logical drive If physical drives of different capacities are used there is unused capacity on the larger drive RAID 1 logical drives on VTrak consist of two physical drives If you want a mirrored logical drive with more than two physical drives see RAID 1E Enhanced Mirror on page 337 335 VTrak E Class Product Manual Advantages Disadvantages Simplest RAID storage e Very high disk overhead uses subsystem design only 50 of total capacity Can increase read performance by pr
303. l Drive Critical on page 400 When an disk array becomes degraded can still access the data on it Yes but reads and writes take longer while rebuilding is in progress 433 VTrak E Class Product Manual Deleting a Disk Array or Logical Drive Why can t select Delete Disk Array or Delete Logical Drive You must have Power or Super User Rights to delete a disk array or logical drive See your Administrator about upgrading your access rights if necessary Also see Making User Settings on page 104 or page 287 Can delete a Logical Drive without deleting the Disk Array Yes See Deleting a Logical Drive on page 166 Rebuilding a Disk Array replaced a failed physical drive with a used but known good drive The system does not rebuild to it Why not The replacement drive was previously used in a different disk array or logical drive You must clear erase the Reserve Sector of the replacement disk drive before the system can rebuild to it Clearing a Stale or a PFA Condition on page 147 or page 227 Migrating a Disk Array When I try to migrate a disk array from one RAID level to another why doesn t the controller let me do it Most RAID levels have a minimum and maximum number of physical drives Be sure you have the correct number of drives available for the target disk array See RAID Levels on page 333 and RAID Level Migration on page 347 want to add two more drives to
304. l the data it contains Back up all important data before deleting a logical drive To delete a logical drive from a disk array 1 From the Main Menu highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter 2 Highlight the disk array that contains the logical drive you want to delete and press Enter Highlight Logical Drives in the Disk Array and press Enter Highlight the logical drive you want to delete and press the spacebar to mark it The mark is an asterisk to the left of the listing 5 Highlight Delete Marked Logical Drives and press Enter 6 Press Y to confirm the deletion Po Press Y again to re confirm Viewing Logical Drive Information 243 VTrak E Class Product Manual To view logical drive information 1 From the Main Menu highlight Logical Drive Management and press Enter 2 Highlight the logical drive you want and press Enter The information and settings screen appears 3 Highlight any of the following and press Enter to view more information e Check Table Read Check Write Check and Inconsistency Check Tables e Logical Drive Statistics Viewing Logical Drive Statistics To view logical drive information 1 From the Main Menu highlight Logical Drive Management and press Enter 2 Highlight the logical drive you want and press Enter The information and settings screen appears 3 Highlight Logical Drive Statistics and press Enter The statistics screen appears Clearing S
305. lashing Red Maintenance Mode See Enclosure Problems on page 391 and RAID Controller Problems on page 395 for more information The Locator feature is triggered from WebPAM PROe or the CLU It causes the LEDs to blink on and off for one minute That action helps you find the physical component Checking Component Installation To check a component s installation remove the component then reinstall the component in its original location In most cases this action fixes a bad connection and allows VTrak to detect the component If this action does not correct the problem replace the unit See page 315 for instructions On VTraks with dual controllers when one controller s Status LED is amber and the other controller s Status LED is flashing red it means that the controller with the flashing red LED has entered maintenance mode See RAID Controller Problems on page 395 If the Controller Status LED continues to display amber after startup contact PROMISE Technical Support See Contacting Technical Support on page 435 The Dirty Cache LED flashes during input output operation If the LED shines amber and the power is off there is unsaved data in the cache Do NOT power down the VTrak while this LED is on 381 VTrak E Class Product Manual CLU Reports a Problem The CLU reports information passively that is you must determine which functions to check based on the sound
306. led Failed ports result in sub optimal and failed trunks Adding iSCSI Trunks Ports must be enabled to add them to a trunk See Making iSCSI Port Settings on page 196 VTrak supports a maximum of eight trunks You cannot use an iSCSI port that has portals configured to it See Viewing a List of iSCSI Portals on page 192 and Deleting iSCSI Portals on page 195 To add an iSCSI trunk 1 Or e ON Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Trunk tab Click the Create Trunk button Make your choices as required Controller ID ID of the RAID controller 1 or 2 Master Port number ID of the master port Slave Port number IDs the slave ports Click the Submit button The new trunk is added to the list Specify the trunk when your create a portal See Adding iSCSI Portals on page 194 197 VTrak E Class Product Manual Making iSCSI Trunk Settings To make trunk settings 1 E 6 Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Trunk tab Click the trunk you want then click the Settings button Make changes as required Controller ID ID of the RAID controller 1 or 2 Master Port number ID of the master port e Slave Port number IDs the slave ports Click the Submit button Deleting iSCSI Trunks Before you can delete a trunk you must delete any portals configured on it See Deleting iSCSI Por
307. les LDAP e Privilege Enables email subscription for the LDAP authenticated user Adding a Role Map To add a role map 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight LDAP Management and press Enter The LDAP Settings screen appears Highlight Role Mapping and press Enter The list of roles appears 293 VTrak E Class Product Manual Highlight Create Role and press Enter Highlight External Role and type a name in the field provided Highlight Privilege and press the Spacebar to toggle through the privilege levels View Maintenance Power and Super See Table 3 on page 292 Press Control A to save your settings The new role appears in the list Making Role Map Settings To make role map settings 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight LDAP Management and press Enter The LDAP Settings screen appears Highlight Role Mapping and press Enter The list of roles appears Highlight the Role you want to change and press Enter Highlight Privilege and press the Spacebar to toggle through the privilege levels View Maintenance Power and Super See Table 3 on page 292 Press Control A to save your settings The role appears in the list with the new privilege setting Deleting a Role Map To delete a role map 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter
308. lick the Home al icon to go to the Home screen 2 Tap the button at the top right of the screen 3 In the confirmation dialog box tap the Yes button to confirm Changing VTrak Monitor Settings To change VTrak Monitor settings Press iPad or iPhone s Home J button to go to desktop Tap the Settings icon In the Settings list tap VTrak Monitor In the VTrak Monitor window set PN e Event Severity Choose the lowest level you want to see in the Events screen Critical Major Warning or Info e Page Capacity 10 25 or 50 5 Press the Home button again to return to the desktop 494 Monitoring Subsystems Choosing a Wi Fi Network Bonjour discovery only works on the currently chosen Wi Fi network See With Bonjour Discovery on page 492 To choose a Wi Fi network Press iPad or iPhone s Home J button to go to desktop Tap the Settings icon In the Settings list tap Wi Fi Under Choose a Network tap the network you want use Press the Home button again to return to the desktop OW Gos Ne a See your iPad or iPhone User Guide for more information Monitoring Subsystems Top Level Monitoring The Home screen displays the top level status of all VTrak subsystems One of these icons appears on each VTrak subsystem e Green check g icon All components are OK e Yellow 4 icon One or more components in Critical status Red g icon One or more components in Offline status e No icon
309. light up green If a disk array is present the Logical Drive LED lights up green also The Controller heartbeat LED blinks green once per second for five seconds goes dark for ten seconds then blinks green once per second for five seconds again See Front Panel LEDs on page 377 Logging In Why am I not able to log in Check the spelling and case User names and passwords are case sensitive have entered correct user name and password but still am not able to log in The Administrator may have deleted or disabled your user name The login screen says Login failed the requested service is busy The subsystem might still be booting or rebooting Dual controller subsystems take longer because the controllers boot individually then they synch to each other Wait a few moments then try again Connection Why can t I connect to my RAID System 431 VTrak E Class Product Manual Be sure you are using the correct IP address and entry text for the VTrak RAID subsystem For more information see Logging into WebPAM PROe on page 69 verified the IP address and entry text but still cannot connect Check the physical network connections on the VTrak RAID subsystem If these are OK report the problem to your network administrator I can access the VTrak over my company s intranet But can t access it from an outside Internet connection How do make the Internet connection work This condition
310. ll the new PerfectPath software See Installing PerfectPath on page 450 468 Repairing PerfectPath Repairing PerfectPath To implement this procedure you must use the same PerfectPath exe installer file that you used to install the PerfectPath software onto your PC The installer s version number is part of its file name However there is no corresponding number in the PerfectPath software To repair the PerfectPath software 1 2 3 Double click the PerfectPath exe file to start the installer In the Welcome screen click the Next button In the Program Maintenance screen choose the Repair option then click the Next button In the Ready to Repair the Program screen click the Install button In the Install Completed screen click the Finish button In the Restart message box click the Yes button to restart your PC 469 VTrak E Class Product Manual Removing PerfectPath Preferred Method This procedure uses the uninstaller included with PerfectPath To remove the PerfectPath software 1 a 6 From the Start menu choose All Programs gt PerfectPath gt Uninstall PerfectPath In the Welcome screen click the Next button In the Program Maintenance screen choose the Remove option then click the Next button In the Remove the Program screen click the Remove button In the Completed screen click the Finish button In the Restart message box click the Yes button to resta
311. ller 1 IPv4 10 0 0 2 e Controller 1 IPv6 2001 2 e Controller 2 IPv4 10 0 0 3 e Controller 2 IPv6 2001 3 The physical management port IP address works with only one RAID controller and is used when the controller goes into maintenance mode For more information see Maintenance Mode on page 395 Choosing DHCP or a Static IP Address When you setup your VTrak you have the option of e Enabling DHCP and letting your DHCP server assign the IP address to the VTrak s virtual management port e Specifying a static IP address for the VTrak s virtual management port DHCP is currently supported on IPv4 only If you use IPv6 you must make your network settings manually If you choose to enable DHCP have your Network Administrator dedicate an IP address for the VTrak linked to the VTrak s MAC address This action prevents the DHCP server from assigning a new IP address when the VTrak restarts with the result that users can no longer log in 45 VTrak E Class Product Manual Accessing the MAC Address in the CLI To access the MAC address in the CLI At the command prompt type net a list v and press Enter The following information displays administrator cli gt net a list v ActiveCtrlld 1 Port 1 MaxSupportedSpeed 1000Mbps LinkStatus Up ProtocolFamily Pv4 Enabled DHCP Disabled IP 10 0 0 1 PMask 0 0 0 0 MAC 00 01 55 61 18 65 DNS 0 0 0 0 Gateway 0 0 0 0 Protoc
312. loading and Installing VTrak Monitor 491 Using VTrak Monitor 0 0 0 0c eee 491 Monitoring Subsystems 0 00 cece eee eee 495 Viewing Information e ea NA E ee 497 Managing the VTrak with WebPAM PROe 499 Troubleshooting 0 00 cece tee tees 499 INDEX ees ee Me tee ae Pcie fe eee ale toe 501 vi Chapter 1 Introduction This chapter covers the following topics e About This Manual below e VTrak Overview page 2 Architectural Description page 3 e Features page 6 General Specifications page 10 e Safety and Environmental page 12 e Warranty and Support page 14 About This Manual This Product Manual describes how to setup use and maintain the VTrak E830f E830i E630f and E630i external disk array subsystems It describes how to use the e Built in command line interface CLI Built in command line utility CLU Embedded Web based Promise Array Management Professional WebPAM PROe software This manual includes a full table of contents index chapter task lists and numerous cross references to help you find the specific information you are looking for Also included are four levels of notices Warning A Warning notifies you of probable equipment damage or loss of data or the possibility of physical injury and how to avoid them Caution A Caution informs you of possible equipment damage or loss of
313. log 1 From the Main Menu highlight Event Viewer and press Enter 2 Highlight Clear Runtime Event Log and press Enter 3 Press Y to confirm Viewing NVRAM Events This screen displays a list of and information about the most important events over multiple subsystem startups To display NVRAM events 1 From the Main Menu highlight Event Viewer and press Enter 2 Highlight NVRAM Events and press Enter The log of NVRAM Events appears Events are added to the top of the list Each item includes Sequence number Begins with 0 at system startup Device Disk Array Logical Drive Physical Drive by its ID number Severity See the table on the previous page Timestamp Date and time the event happened Description A description of the event in plain language 3 Press the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the log Clearing NVRAM Events To clear the Runtime Event log 1 From the Main Menu highlight Event Viewer and press Enter 2 Highlight NVRAM Events and press Enter 3 Highlight Clear NVRAM Event Log and press Enter 4 Press Y to confirm 276 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Working with LUN Mapping LUN Mapping includes the following functions Enabling LUN Mapping page 277 Viewing a List Ports page 277 Viewing a List Targets page 278 Viewing a List of Initiators page 278 Adding an Initiator page 278 Deleting an Initiator page 279 Viewing a List of LUN Maps
314. long time You can choose to temporarily disconnect your storage install PerfectPath then reconnect your storage to reduce installation time Installing PerfectPath To install the PerfectPath software 1 Download the PerfectPath installer file from PROMISE support http www promise com support and save the installer file to your Windows desktop Double click the PerfectPath exe installer file to start the installer In the Welcome screen click the Next button In the License Agreement screen click the I accept the terms of this license agreement option then click the Next button In the Close All Disk Management Applications screen click the Next button In the Ready to Install the Program screen click the Install button Optional If the installer displays a Security Alert message about an unsigned driver click the Yes button to continue installation The software files install onto the system drive in the Program Files Promise PerfectPath folder There is no optional install location In the Install Completed screen click the Finish button In the Restart message box click the Yes button to restart your PC Important Save the PerfectPath installer file in case you need to repair your PerfectPath software in the future See Repairing PerfectPath on page 469 450 Verifying Installation Verifying Installation Before you can verify PerfectPath installation e Your Host PC mus
315. low the firmware update procedure from the drive manufacturer WebPAM PROe Download the latest firmware image file from PROMISE support http www promise com support and save it to your Host PC or TFTP server To update the firmware on PROMISE supported physical drives 1 2 3 4 Click the Administration tab Click the Firmware Update icon Click the PD Firmware Update tab Choose a download option e Local File through HTTP Click the Browse button locate the firmware image file click the file to choose it then click the Open button TFTP Server Enter the TFTP Server host name or IP address port number and file name Click the Next button Click the Submit button The progress of the update displays Warning Do NOT power off the RAID subsystem during the update Do NOT move to any other screen until the firmware update operation is completed When the update is completed a message tells you to reboot the subsystem Click the OK button Restart the RAID subsystem See Restarting a Subsystem on the next page 321 VTrak E Class Product Manual Restarting a Subsystem This function shuts down the subsystem and then restarts it Important Do NOT turn off the power supply switches on the RAID subsystem or JBOD expansion units To restart the subsystem oO oO MS _ Click the Administration tab Click the Subsystem Information icon Click the Shutdown Restart b
316. lower due to the synchronizing operation e Critical Degraded This condition arises as the result of a physical drive failure A degraded logical drive still functions and your data is still available However the logical drive has lost redundancy fault tolerance You must determine the cause of the problem and correct it e Rebuilding This condition is temporary When a physical drive has been replaced the logical drive automatically begins rebuilding in order to restore redundancy fault tolerance When a logical drive is rebuilding it functions and your data is available However access is slower due to the rebuilding operation Transport Ready After you perform a successful Prepare for Transport operation this condition means you can remove the physical drives of this disk array and move them to another enclosure or different drive slots After you relocate the physical drives the disk array status shows OK Accepting an Incomplete Array This condition is the result of a missing physical drive See Incomplete Array on page 403 before you use this function To accept an incomplete array 1 From the Main Menu highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter 2 Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter 3 Highlight Accept Incomplete Array and press Enter Enabling Media Patrol PDM and Power Management on a Disk Array Media Patrol checks the magnetic media on physical drives Predictive Data Migrati
317. ls Estimated hold time Time in hours that the battery can power the cache 89 VTrak E Class Product Manual e Temperature threshold discharge Maximum temperature allowed when the battery is discharging e Temperature threshold charge Maximum temperature allowed when the battery is charging e Battery temperature Actual battery temperature Cycle count Number of times the battery was reconditioned e Voltage in millivolts e Current in milliamps Reconditioning a Battery Batteries maintain power to the controller cache in the event of a power failure thus protecting any data that has not been written to a physical drive Reconditioning is the action of discharging and recharging a battery to preserve its capacity and performance Reconditioning is a background activity and does not affect I O performance When the recondition is completed the battery s cycle count increments by one By default each battery is reconditioned every two months You can change the reconditioning schedule Caution Disabling or deleting the battery recondition schedule is NOT recommended To recondition a battery immediately 1 Click the Device tab 2 Click the Component List icon 3 Click the battery you want then click the Recondition button Battery operations status changes to Recondition and the battery s remaining capacity and estimated hold time fall and rise reflecting the discharge
318. mail service and click the Settings button 4 Make settings changes as required e Choose a startup type e Automatic default Starts and runs with the subsystem e Manual You start the service when you need it e SMTP Server IP address e SMTP Authentication The Yes option enables authentication The No option disables e SMTP Authentication Username Required if SMTP authentication is enabled e SMTP Authentication Password Required if SMTP authentication is enabled Email Sender From Address The sender s name shown on notification messages e Email Subject The subject line of the notification message 5 Click the Save button 6 Click the Confirm button Note To verify your settings send a test message SLP Service Service Location Protocol SLP discovers services over the Internet SLP applies to IPv4 protocol only 125 VTrak E Class Product Manual Stopping SLP Service To stop the SLP service 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the SLP service and click the Stop button 4 Click the Confirm button To start the SLP service after stopping it 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the SLP service and click the Start button Restarting SLP Service To restart the SLP service 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the SLP service and click the Restart button
319. maintain normal values after a Recondition replace the battery See Replacing a Cache Backup Battery on page 324 By default VTrak automatically reconditions the batteries every two months When you install a new battery the cycle count shows 0 VTrak automatically runs a recondition on the battery to verify it If you restart the subsystem or controller before reconditioning is finished the battery is charged to 100 then reconditioning starts again 222 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Reconditioning a Battery To recondition the subsystem battery ll OF GN Sn R From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter Highlight Batteries and press Enter Highlight the battery you want to recondition and press Enter Highlight Start Reconditioning and press Enter Press Y to confirm Reconditioning fully discharges then fully recharges the battery During reconditioning if the Adaptive Writeback Cache function is enabled the controller cache is set to Write Thru After reconditioning the cache is reset to Write Back See Making Controller Settings on page 216 Caution Disabling or deleting the battery recondition schedule is NOT recommended Locating an Enclosure This feature helps you identify the physical VTrak enclosure you are working with through the CLU 1 2 3
320. me iSCSI qualified name iqn of this target Alias Maximum of 32 characters Use letters numbers space between words and underscore An alias is optional Status Up or down Error Recovery Level Error recovery level supported Initial R2T Allows initiator to begin sending data to a target without receiving a ready to transfer command Max Outstanding R2T Maximum number of R2T PDUs the target can have outstanding for a single iSCSI command Max Burst Length Maximum length of a solicited data sequence in bytes Data Digest Adds a data digest CRC Header Digest Enables the use of header digest CRC Data Sequence in Order Enables placement of data in sequence order Data PTU in Order Enables placement of data in PDU order Default Time to Wait After a dropped connection the number of seconds to wait before attempting to reconnect Default Time to Retain Number of seconds after time to wait above before reassigning outstanding commands Uni directional CHAP Authentication Uni directional peer CHAP authentication enabled or disabled Bi directional CHAP Authentication Bi directional local CHAP authentication enabled or disabled Maximum Connections The maximum number of concurrent connections Immediate Data Enables the initiator to send unsolicited data with the iSCSI command PDU First Burst Length In bytes Assigned Portal Ids Port
321. mod d and the date in yyyyy mm dd format then press Enter administrator cli gt date a mod d 2011 03 25 2 Type date a mod t and the time in hh mm ss format then press Enter administrator cli gt date a mod t 14 50 05 You can combine date and time settings such as administrator cli gt date a mod d 2011 03 25 t 14 50 05 Virtual Management Port Settings Making Virtual Management Port Settings Automatically Automatic settings require a DHCP server on your network DHCP is currently supported on IPv4 only To enable automatic management port settings 1 Atthe command prompt type net a mod f ipv4 s dhcp enable and press Enter administrator cli gt net a mod f ipv4 s dhcp enable After a moment the comand prompt reappears indicating that your setting was successful administrator cli gt 47 VTrak E Class Product Manual To verify the setting change at the command prompt type net and press Enter The following information displays administrator cli gt net PF Status IP Link IPv4 Enabled 192 168 10 85 Up IPv6 Disabled 2001 1 Up In the above example e PF refers to IP protocol family v4 or v6 e Status refers to whether the IP protocol is enabled IPv4 is enabled by default e IP is the virtual management port IP address e Link indicates whether there is a working network connection By default IPv4 is enabled and IPv6 is disabled Currently IPv6 does not suppport DHCP
322. mory size as the partner controller Partner Controller has entered maintenance mode to protect user data since one of the configured physical drives was disconnected in the partner controller Check and correct cable connections to external JBOD enclosures Rebuild any critical logical drives Back up array data Replace the physical drive Bring controller out of maintenance mode 413 VTrak E Class Product Manual Reported Event Corrective Action Controller was placed on reset during Fail Over processing Partner Controller was placed on reset during Fail Over processing No action is required Controller was reset as it was not able to join the running partner controller Verify that the controller is running If the condition persists replace the controller The controller has reset because it encountered a firmware problem If resets happen frequently update to new firmware or replace the controller Controller temperature is above the warning threshold The controller temperature is above controller critical threshold Check airflow around the VTrak Check blowers and fans Controller temperature is within the normal range No action is required CRC CRC error is detected while receiving CMD information unit CRC error is detected during Data Out phase If this message appears repeatedly contact Tech Support Disk Array New di
323. mpted by a message from software or when directed by Technical Support To power cycle the RAID subsystem 1 Shut down the subsystem See Shutting Down the Subsystem on page 83 or page 307 When the controllers shut down your network connection is lost Manually turn OFF the switches on both power supplies of the RAID subsystem and all attached JBOD expansion units Wait at least 10 seconds Manually turn ON the switches on both power supplies of the JBOD units Manually turn ON the switches on both power supplies of the RAID subsystem Wait no less than two minutes Do one of the following actions Open your browser and log into WebPAM PROe e Re establish your Telnet or SSH connection to the subsystem and open the CLU If you cannot log in immediately wait 30 seconds and try again Important If your RAID subsystem manages JBOD expansion units always power on the JBOD expansion units first Then power on the RAID subsystem 409 VTrak E Class Product Manual Event Notification Response When you choose Event Notification WebPAM PROe sends popup and or email messages regarding its status The messages you see depend on your notification selection and what is currently happening in the VTrak See Setting User Event Subscriptions on page 103 The table below cites e Reported Events Events that require you to take action e Corrective Actions The action you should take in resp
324. my RAID 1 disk array Why won t the controller let me migrate it A RAID 1 disk array uses only two disk drives In this case you can add two physical drives then convert to a RAID 10 disk array Most RAID levels have a minimum and maximum number of disk drives See RAID Levels on page 333 Media Patrol and PDM Media Patrol and PDM are enabled on my system But they never report anything This is a good sign Media Patrol and PDM operate transparently until they find a problem on a physical drive 434 Chapter 9 Support Contacting Technical Support PROMISE Technical Support provides several support options for PROMISE users to access information and updates We encourage you to use one of our electronic services which provide product information updates for the most efficient service and support PROMISE E Support https support promise com PROMISE web site http www promise com apple When you contact us please have the following information available e Product model and serial number BIOS firmware and driver version numbers e A description of the problem situation e System configuration information including motherboard and CPU type hard drive models SAS SATA ATA ATAPI drives amp devices and other controllers United States 580 Cottonwood Drive Milpitas Ca 95035 USA Apple Pre Sales 1 408 228 1400 Option 2 Apple Support Phone Toll Free 1 800 888 0245 Option 8 Fax 1 408 2
325. n If you have other multipath devices add these settings to your existing multipath conf file This is a template multipath tools configuration file for the Promise VTrak subsystem defaults user friendly names yes blacklist devnode sda devnode ramjraw loop fd md dm sr scdjst 0 9 devnode hd a z 0 9 devnode cciss c 0 9 d 0 9 p 0 9 devices device vendor Promise product VTrak path grouping policy multibus getuid callout Isbin scsi_ id g u s block n path checker eadsector0 path selector round robin 0 hardware handler nge failback immedi ate rr weight uniform rr_min_io 100 no_path_retry 20 features 1 queue if_no_path product blacklist VTrak V LUN 489 VTrak E Class Product Manual 490 Appendix D VTrak Monitor The appendix covers the following topics e Downloading and Installing VTrak Monitor below e Using VTrak Monitor below e Monitoring Subsystems page 495 e Diagnosing a Subsystem page 496 e Viewing Information page 497 e Managing the VTrak with WebPAM PROe page 499 e Troubleshooting page 499 Downloading and Installing VTrak Monitor VTrak Monitor is a free application available from the App Store To download and install VTrak Monitor on your iPad or iPhone follow the instructions in your iPad or iPhone User Guide Using VTrak Monitor Launching VTrak Monitor
326. n Menu highlight Fibre Channel Management and press Enter 2 Highlight Fibre Channel Ports and press Enter 3 Highlight the port you want and press Enter 4 Highlight Fibre Channel Port SFP and press Enter The screen displays information about the SFP transceiver There are no user settings on this screen Viewing Fibre Channel Port Statistics To view port statistics 1 From the Main Menu highlight Fibre Channel Management and press Enter 2 Highlight Fibre Channel Ports and press Enter 3 Highlight the port you want and press Enter 4 Highlight Fibre Channel Port Statistics and press Enter This screen displays statistics for this port There are no user settings on this screen Clearing Statistics To clear Fibre Channel statistics see Clearing Statistics on page 305 Property Definitions Definitions of the properties for which statistical information is reported appears in the list below e TimeLastReset Time in minutes since the system has been running FramesSent Number of frames sent since last reset e FramesReceived Number of frames received since last reset 254 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU WordsSent Number of words sent since last reset WordsReceived Number of words received since last reset LIPCount Loop Initialization Primitive Sequence This primitive sequence applies only to the arbitrated loop topology It is transmitted by an L_Port to initialize
327. n and click the View button 391 VTrak E Class Product Manual Note the red X icon Click the View button 4S 2U 12Bay _ Fans ID StatyA Type Status Description SBB SAS 2U 12Bay 2 fan s critical Fsettings Locate LIFRu ved The components list expands and shows the power supply fans which server as the Cooling Unit of the VTrak Ex30 enclosure Status Location Operational Status Healthy Threshold Current Fan Speed PSU 1 Functional gt 2000 RPM 2900 RPM Malfunction gt 2000 RPM ORPM Note the red X icons Note that the fans for power supply 2 PSU 2 have failed Click the Back View icon on the Device tab Click the picture of the enclosure A popup messages displays the status of each component Fan ID Operational Status Current Speed When a power supply fan fails you must replace the power supply See Replacing a Power Supply on page 323 for more information If the system reports a fan malfunction contact Technical Support see page 435 immediately to schedule replacement of the suspect power supply as soon as possible Running the unit in this condition for more than three weeks may shorten subsystem life and void your warranty 392 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Overheating Overheating is a potentially serious condition because the excessively high temperatures can lead to physical drive failure and controller malfunction Overheating usually
328. n the VTrak RAID level migration is queued No action is required Migration has detected stale NV Watermark Wait to see if the watermark clears 423 VTrak E Class Product Manual Reported Event Corrective Action Migration has cleared stale NV Watermark No action is required Array was made incomplete due to missing NV Watermark If the array is online try migration again If the array is offline delete and recreate the array User has accepted Incomplete Array Caused by a missing NV Watermark Rebuild the disk array Rebuild Rebuild is started Rebuild is in progress Rebuild is completed No action is required Rebuild is paused Resume rebuild when ready Rebuild is resumed No action is required Rebuild is stopped If this action was not intentional check the logical drive s status Rebuild stopped internally Contact Tech Support Rebuild is aborted Reduce system load on the VTrak Rebuild is queued No action is required Auto rebuild cannot start Install a target physical drive of adequate capacity Redundancy Check Redundancy Check is started Redundancy Check is completed No action is required Redundancy Check is paused Resume Redundancy Check when ready Redundancy Check is resumed Redundancy Check is stopped No action is required Redundancy C
329. nabled on the disk array Media Patrol has three status conditions e Running Normal You can access your logical drives at any time e Yield Temporary pause while a read write operation takes place e Paused Temporary pause while another background runs Or a pause initiated by the user See Running Media Patrol on a Disk Array on page 158 PDM Predictive Data Migration PDM is the migration of data from the suspect phyical drive to a spare drive similar to rebuilding a logical drive But unlike Rebuilding 331 VTrak E Class Product Manual PDM constantly monitors your physical drives and automatically copies your data to a spare drive before the physical drive fails and your logical drive goes Critical The following actions trigger PDM e Aphyical drive with unhealthy status see below e Media Patrol finds a critical error e You initiate PDM manually PDM also counts the number of media errors reported by Media Patrol A disk drive becomes unhealthy when e A SMART error is reported e The bad sector remapping table fills to the specified level Because data would be lost if written to a bad sector when a bad sector is detected the physical drive creates a map around it These maps are saved in the bad sector remapping table which has a capacity of 512 reassigned blocks and 2048 error blocks See Making PDM Settings on page 121 or Making Background Activity Settings on page
330. ncing for Failover Policy on page 460 Changing Load Balance Policy Settings To change load balance policy settings 1 Do one of the following actions From the Operations menu choose Change Load Balance Policy e In Tree View highlight a LUN 1 and click the Change Load Balance Policy Y icon e In Tree View right click a a LUN and choose Change Load Balance Policy from the popup menu The Change Load Policy dialog box appears with the Load Balance Policy tab displayed Click the option button for one of the Load Policies e Failover Policy e Round Robin Policy e Round Robin with Subset Policy e Least Queue Depth Policy 461 VTrak E Class Product Manual 3 Click the Next button The Path Selection tab displays 4 Take the action appropriate for your policy selection e For Round Robin and Least Queue Depth no action is required Skip to step 5 e For Failover move the path you want to be active to the Primary Path Selected pane Move all other paths to the Path Available pane e For Round Robin with Subset move the paths you want to be active to the Primary Path Selected pane Move the paths you want as standby to the Path Available pane You can have all paths in the Subset 5 Click the Next button The Summary tab displays the current and selected new policy 6 Click the Finish button to apply your settings The new settings take effect immediately See also Round Robin Cou
331. nd the GbE network switch If you have multiple VTrak subsystems host PCs or servers repeat steps 1 through 3 as required Note Only one iSCSI data cable is required between each RAID controller and the GbE network switch However you can attach multiple cables to create redundant data paths or trunking Figure 18 iSCSI SAN data connections Host PCs or servers iSCSI HBA cards GbE switch hth hes BAR Pelee iSCSI port on iSCSI port on controller 1 eee ee controller 2 VTrak RAID subsystem 35 VTrak E Class Product Manual Management Path Each VTrak RAID controller has one 1 Ethernet RJ45 management port connector See page 34 Figure 17 To establish the management path 1 Connect Ethernet cables between the network connector on both host PCs or servers and the standard network switch See Figure 19 2 Connect Ethernet cables between the Management port on both RAID controllers to the standard network switch If you have multiple VTrak subsystems repeat steps 1 and 2 as required Figure 19 iSCSI SAN management connections Host PCs or servers a N gag etwork connector M motherboard or HBA _ Network switch Es Shine See 22999929999999999 MARR eee E E Management port Management port on RAID controller 1 on
332. nd your data is unavailable until the subsystem is powered and booted again See Replacing a Power Supply on page 323 for more information 393 VTrak E Class Product Manual Batteries The RAID controllers in the VTrak subsystem use a battery for backup power to protect data in the cache Should a power failure occur the battery enables the cache to hold data up to 72 hours The battery recharges during normal subsystem operation In most cases installing a replacement battery corrects a marginal or failed condition The battery is located inside the RAID controller housing You can remove and replace the battery without removing the RAID controller The battery is hot swappable No tools are required for the procedure See Replacing a Cache Backup Battery on page 324 Also see Reconditioning a Battery on page 90 or page 223 394 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting RAID Controller Problems RAID controller problems include e Maintenance Mode page 395 Finding and Correcting the Cause of the Problem page 395 e Taking a RAID Controller out of Maintenance Mode page 396 e Unsaved Data in the Controller Cache page 398 Controller problems occur when one of the controllers goes into maintenance mode Maintenance Mode For VTraks with two RAID controllers one of them enters maintenance mode in the event of e Adifference of some kind between the two controllers described below e An
333. nect all cables that were attached to the RAID controller e Fibre Channel cables Management port cables e iSCSI cables e Serial cable SAS expansion cables e UPS control cable Turn on the power supply switches 328 Chapter 6 Maintenance The VTrak restarts For more information about VTrak s start up behavior see Connecting the Power on page 41 Log into the VTrak For more information see Logging into WebPAM PROe on page 69 or Initial Connection on page 206 329 VTrak E Class Product Manual Resetting the Default Password This feature resets the Administrator s password to the default factory setting password Use this feature when you have forgotten Administrator s password or a new Administrator has been appointed The reset applies to the Administrator s login for WebPAM PROe the CLI and the CLU No other user passwords are affected To reset the Administrator s default password 1 Verify that the VTrak has fully booted See page 41 or page 377 for more information 2 For one of the RAID controllers locate the password reset switch See Figure 5 3 Insert a pin or a straightened paper clip into the opening and momentarily depress password reset switch You only need to press the reset switch on one RAID controller Figure 5 FC RAID controller password reset Password reset switch Mgmt 10101 SAS EXP 115200 BNT
334. nese Traditional Chinese Simplified Chinese and Korean 5 Click the Login button Figure 1 WebPAM PROe log in screen After login the WebPAM PROe opening screen appears Choosing the Display Language WebPAM PROe displays in multiple languages You choose the display language when you log in 70 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe If you are already logged in and you want to change the display language 1 Click Logout at the top right corner of the screen The Login screen appears N Click the Language dropdown menu and highlight the language you prefer WEBPAM ROe w Reenter your user name and password Click the Login button WebPAM PROe opens in the language you chose gt A 71 VTrak E Class Product Manual Perusing the Interface The WebPAM PROe interface consists of a header and four tabs each with specific functions Header Top left corner of the window Name of logged in user e IP address Virtual IP address of the RAID subsystem Top right corner of the window e Save Service Report Saves a detailed report to your Host PC e Help Accesses the Help Welcome screen Contact Us Technical support contact information e About Information about WebPAM PROe e Logout Exits WebPAM PROe Discovery tab e Displays other RAID systems on your network Enables direct login to other RAID systems Dashboard tab e RAID subsystem model and
335. net connection How do make the Internet connection work This condition is not related to VTrak but is due to your firewall and network connection protocol Contact your MIS Administrator Why can a RAID 1 logical drive on VTrak consist of only two disk drives RAID 1 logical drives work in mirrored physical drive pairs You could create up to eight RAID 1 logical drives Or you can create a single RAID 1E or RAID 10 logical drive with data mirroring and up to 16 physical drives See Installing Disk Drives on page 15 and RAID Levels on page 333 for more information on the number of physical drives you can use for each RAID level Are logical drives on VTrak limited to 2 TB No But verify that your operating system supports logical drives over 2 TB Also for the operating system to recognize the full capacity of logical drives over 2 TB you must specify a sector size of 1 KB or larger when you create the logical drive See Sector Size on page 353 for more information How can I be sure everything is working OK on the VTrak Locally The VTrak enclosure has LEDs on the front to monitor the status of power field replaceable units FRUs and logical drives When these are green VTrak is functioning normally See Front Panel LEDs on page 377 Remotely Check the Dashboard tab in WebPAM PROe See WebPAM PROe Reports a Problem on page 385 If there are no yellow or red X warning icons displayed
336. nformation includes 1 2 3 4 In progress SMART Support Yes or no depends on the drive SMART Log Enabled Enabled or disabled see Note below SMART Health status OK is normal SCT Status Version SCT Version SCT Support Level Device State Current Temperature Power Cycle Min Temperature Power Cycle Max Temperature Lifetime Min Temperature Lifetime Max Temperature Under Temperature Limit Count Over Temperature Limit Count If the SMART Log is disabled see Making Controller Settings on page 86 Saving the Physical Drive SMART Log To save the physical drive SMART Log Click the Device tab Click the Physical Drive icon Click the physical drive you want then click the View button Click the SMART Log tab 1 2 3 4 145 VTrak E Class Product Manual 5 Click the Save Advanced SMART Log button Your browser saves a text file containing the SMART Log to its designated download folder Locating a Physical Drive This feature causes the drive carrier LEDs to blink for one minute to assist you in locating the physical drive and is supported by RAID subsystems and JBOD expansion units To locate a physical drive 1 Click the Device tab 2 Click the Physical Drive icon 3 Click the physical drive you want then click the Locate button The drive carrier status LED flashes for one minute Figure 4 Drive carrier status LED Green LED flashes Forcing a Physical Dri
337. ng LDAP Settings page 291 Testing LDAP Settings page 293 Viewing a List of Role Maps page 293 Adding a Role Map page 293 Making Role Map Settings page 294 Deleting a Role Map page 294 Viewing LDAP Information To view LDAP information 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight LDAP Management and press Enter The LDAP Settings screen appears Highlight LDAP Auth and press Enter The LDAP Authorization screen appears LDAP must be enabled to see the settings LDAP settings include LDAP Enable and disables LDAP e EmailNotificationForEvent Enables email subscription for the LDAP authenticated user Timeout Maximum time to allowed for communication with LDAP server e BaseDN Search domain limit of LDAP query Server Hostname or IP address of LDAP server e Port Network port of LDAP server e BindDN Authenticates communication between subsystem and LDAP server Bindpw Password for BindDN When email notification is enabled these items appear e Object Class person is the default value e UIDAttribute Setting depends on Server Type e FullNameAttribute Store user s full name in LDAP server e EmailAddrAttribute Store user s email address in LDAP server 290 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Server Type Windows Active Directory Mac Open directory or Unspe
338. ng iSCSI Portals To delete an iSCSI portal 1 O1 GO Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Portal tab Click the portal you want then click the Delete button In the Confirmation box type the word confirm in the field provided and click the Confirm button The portal is removed from the list Viewing a List of iSCSI Ports An iSCSI port is the physical iSCSI connection on the VTrak There are four iSCSI ports on each RAID controller for a total of eight per subsystem To view a list of ports 1 2 3 Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Port tab Port information includes Port ID ID number of the port e Controller ID 1 or 2 e Link Status Up or down active or Inactive e Port Status Enabled or disabled 195 VTrak E Class Product Manual Jumbo Frames Enabled or disabled e Current Speed In Mb s e Assigned Portals Portals to which this port is assigned Items marked with an asterisk are adjustable under Making iSCSI Port Settings on page 196 Viewing iSCSI Port Information To view information about a port 1 2 3 4 Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Port tab Click the port you want then click the View button Port information includes e Controller ID ID of the RAID controller where the port is located e Status Enabled or disabled
339. ng systems supported 8 operational status disk array 149 234 orphan watermark 215 P parity error reported events 420 password CLI CLU 44 CLU 288 reset Administrator to factory default 330 WebPAM PROe 60 70 Pause On Error 246 PDM enable 235 reported events 420 running 159 237 settings 121 triggers 274 506 Index physical drive alias 227 capacity coercion 87 configuration status 226 DMA mode 225 force offline 146 227 global settings 225 information 141 226 list 225 locate 228 medium error threshold 225 operational status 226 reported events 420 422 settings 227 stale and PFA condition 227 statistics 226 physical ports default IP addresses 45 ping iSCSI network 202 270 port Fibre Channel information 184 252 settings 185 253 statistics 186 254 portal iSCSI add 264 assign to target 260 delete 265 settings 265 unassign from target 261 portals iSCSI add 194 assign to targets 192 delete 195 information 193 263 list 192 263 settings 194 unassign from targets 192 ports iSCSI information 196 262 list 195 261 settings 196 262 power connection 41 LED 41 377 power cycle the subsystem 409 power management enable 157 235 power saving 87 217 364 power supply locate 219 221 replace 323 reported events 422 423 status 94 219 220 power supply fan reported events 423 power activity LED 43 378 preferred controller ID explained 353 privil
340. ning product for repair 442 revertible spare drive 172 239 355 RFI statements 12 RJ11 to DB9 cable 15 40 206 role maps add 111 293 delete 113 294 list 111 293 settings 112 294 runtime event log 135 275 382 S SAS connection problems 407 disconnected expansion cable 395 SAS to SATA adapter 447 SATA and SAS drives mixing 231 SCSI reported events 425 SEP reported events 425 serial cable 405 508 Index serial connection cable 40 problems 405 setting up 44 206 UPS 40 service report save 79 sessions iSCSI delete 200 266 information 199 267 list 198 266 settings 200 266 setting the lock 77 212 settings background activities 114 273 buzzer 91 313 cache 86 216 363 capacity coercion 216 CIM 131 299 controller 86 216 disk array 157 233 email 124 295 enclosure 93 220 Fibre Channel port 185 Fibre Channel ports 253 initialization 119 274 iSCSI global 189 258 LDAP 291 logical drive 166 245 maintenance mode 50 57 101 251 Media Patrol 118 migration 121 Netsend 132 301 NTP 213 PDM 121 physical drive 227 physical drives 225 power saving 87 217 rebuild 120 Redundancy Check 118 restore default 78 306 settings cont SLP 125 296 SNMP 129 130 298 spare drive 174 240 SSH 128 297 subsystem 77 211 synchronization 122 Telnet 127 297 temperature 93 220 transition 122 UPS units 97 284 user 287 288 virtual management port 47 56 100 250 VTrak Monitor 494 We
341. niona annta erana ee Ped ade 445 Adding a Second RAID Controller 2220 000 00s 445 Installing a Second RAID Controller 00 446 V VTrak E Class Product Manual Appendix B Multipathing on Windows 2 2008 449 Before You Begin 2 00 a ERA eee 449 Installing PerfectPath 2 0 c cece eee 450 Verifying Installation 0 0 auaa anaana anaa 451 Running Perfect Path View 00 e eee eee 453 Monitoring Your LUNs and Paths 0 0 0 0 eau 454 Features and Settings 0 cc cece 460 THOUDIGSMOOTING erriarena ist Raga A ARENA donde 467 Updating PerfectPath asss syaa sertie aaa E aaa 468 Repairing PerfectPath 200 eee eee eee 469 Removing PerfectPath 0 cee eee 470 Appendix C Multipathing on Linux 200200 eee eee 471 Before You Begin near eee 471 Task 1 Meeting Package Requirements 473 Task 2 Preparing the Configuration File 476 Task 3 Making Initial Host Settings 00 55 478 Task 4 Create and Configure Devices 200 5 480 Task 5 Setting up ALUA 20 00 00 c eee eee 481 RPM Packages and Documents for Linux MPIO 486 Linux MPIO Known Issues 00000 0c eee eee eee 488 Sample multipath conf File 00 00 eee 489 Appendix D VTrak Monitor 0 200 e eee eee eee 491 Down
342. ns 1 Open a terminal window 474 Task 1 Meeting Package Requirements Type the following command and press Enter rpm qa grep device mapper If the required package is present the system returns the following line SLES 10 SP2 device mapper 1 02 13 6 14 SLES 10 SP3 device mapper 1 02 13 6 14 SLES 11 device mapper 1 02 27 8 6 SLES 11 SP1 device mapper 1 02 27 8 17 20 Note that the actual version number might be different depending on your configuration Type the following command and press Enter rpm qga grep multipath tools If the required package is present the system returns the following line SLES 10 SP2 ultipath tools 0 4 7 34 38 SLES 10 SP3 ultipath tools 0 4 7 34 50 10 SLES 11 ultipath tools 0 4 8 40 1 SLES 11 SP1 ultipath tools 0 4 8 40 21 1 Note that the actual version number might be different depending on your configuration 475 VTrak E Class Product Manual Task 2 Preparing the Configuration File To setup multipathing with VTrak or any other subsystem you must provide the required device attributes in a configuration file The multipath configuration file is named multipath conf The functional version of the file is saved in the etc directory RedHat Systems For RedHat systems there is a default etc multipath conf file However the default file does not have the required device attribu
343. nstallation procedure should mount and install the VTrak unit e Be sure all switches are OFF before installing the VTrak unit or exchanging components e Mount the rails to the rack using the appropriate screws and flange nuts fully tightened at each end of the rail e Do not load the rails unless they are installed with screws as instructed e The rails that ship with the PROMISE VTrak unit are designed to safely support that PROMISE VTrak unit when properly installed Additional loading on the rails is at the customer s risk PROMISE Technology Inc cannot guarantee that the mounting rails will support your PROMISE VTrak unit unless you install them as instructed e Verify that the maximum ambient temperature in the rack system is less than the VTrak s maximum environment temperature See page 10 e Verify that there is ample airflow around the VTrak unit Install all of your devices in the rack with their weight spread as evenly as possible e Determine the maximum amperage draw of all devices in the rack and verify that it is less than the maximum amperage for the rack s power circuit See page 10 e Verify that all devices in the rack are properly grounded especially any devices attached to power strips Note To lighten the VTrak enclosure remove the power supplies If your VTrak shipped with physical drives installed remove all of the drive carriers also 17 VTrak E Class Product
344. nstalling Physical Drives on page 21 Rebuilding a Disk Array When you rebuild a disk array you are actually rebuilding the data on one physical drive If there is no spare drive of adequate capacity and the Auto Rebuild function is DISABLED you must replace the failed drive with an unconfigured physical drive then perform a Manual Rebuild See Making Rebuild Settings on page 120 Important If your replacement disk drive was formerly part of a different disk array or logical drive you must clear the configuration data on the replacement drive before you use it See Clearing a Stale or a PFA Condition on page 147 Performing a Manual Rebuild To perform a manual rebuild 1 2 Click the Administration tab Click the Background Activities icon The list of background activities appears Mouse over Rebuild and click the Start button From the Source Physical Drive dropdown menu choose a Source disk array and physical drive Arrays have an ID No Physical drives have a Seq No sequence number 160 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe From the Target Physical Drive dropdown menu choose a Target physical drive Click the Confirm button When the disk array is rebuilding e The disk array shows a green check icon and Rebuilding status e Logical drives under the disk array continue to show a yellow icon and Critical status Stopping Pausing or Resuming a Rebuild To stop paus
345. nt on page 464 Refreshing the Objects on page 465 Path Verification Path verification monitors any failed paths and automatically verifies them if they become available again There are two Path Verification Settings Enable disable Verification period in seconds Changing Path Verification Settings To make path verification settings 1 Do one of the following actions a e Click the Advanced Settings icon e From the Operations menu choose Advanced Settings The Advanced Settings dialog box appears with the MPIO Parameters tab displayed Check the Enable Path Verification box to enable path verification Uncheck to disable 462 Features and Settings 3 Click the arrows or type a new value in the Path Verification Period field to change the interval 30 seconds is the default value 4 Click the Apply button 5 Click the OK button in the confirmation box The new setting takes effect immediately See also Load Balance Policy on page 461 PDO Removal on page 463 Refreshing the Objects on page 465 PDO Removal PDO removal refers to the action of deleting a multipath input output MPIO disk from the Windows Device Manager after all paths to a physical device object PDO have failed PDO removal interval refers to the period of time in seconds between the moment all paths to a PDO are disconnected and the MPIO disk disappears from the Device Manager Changing PD
346. nts page 276 The Event Viewer displays log of subsystem events Events are classified as Runtime Events A list of and information about the 1023 most recent runtime events recorded since the subsystem was started NVRAM Events A list of and information about the most important events over multiple subsystem startups NVRAM events are stored in non volatile memory Event Severity Levels Level Description Fatal Non recoverable error or failure has occurred Critical Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are serious Major Action is needed now Minor Action is needed but the condition is not a serious at this time Warning User can decide whether or not action is required Information Information only no action is required Viewing Runtime Events To display Runtime Events 1 From the Main Menu highlight Event Viewer and press Enter The log of Runtime Events appears Events are added to the top of the list Each item includes e Sequence number Begins with 0 at system startup e Device Disk Array Logical Drive Physical Drive by its ID number e Severity See the table above e Timestamp Date and time the event happened e Description A description of the event in plain language Press the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the log 275 VTrak E Class Product Manual Clearing Runtime Events To clear the Runtime Event
347. number and slot number Alias If assigned Physical Capacity Total capacity in GB Configurable Capacity Usable capacity in GB Used Capacity Capacity actually used in GB Block Size Typically 512 Bytes Operational Status OK is normal Stale PFA Dead Configuration Array number and sequence number spare number Model Make and model of the drive Drive Interface SATA 1 5Gb s or 3Gb s SAS 3Gb s or 6Gb s Serial Number Serial number of the drive Firmware Version Firmware version on the drive Protocol Version ATA ATAPI protocol version Visible To Controllers that can access this physical drive Advanced information for SATA physical drives includes Write Cache Enabled or disabled Read Look Ahead Cache Enabled or disabled Read Cache Support Yes or No SMART Feature Set Yes or No SMART Self Test Yes or No SMART Error Logging Yes or No Command Queuing Support TCQ or NCQ Command Queuing Enabled or disabled Queue Depth Number of commands Maximum Multiple DMA Mode Supported Maximum Ultra DMA Mode Supported DMA Mode Power Saving Level Enabled or disabled ARM Support Standby or Active Medium Error Threshold Drive Temperature 142 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe e Drive Reference Temperature Advanced information for SAS physical drives includes e Read Cache Enabled or disabled e Read Cache Support Yes or No e
348. o confirm the reset 306 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Shutting Down the Subsystem There are two methods for shutting down the subsystem Choose one of the following procedures e Shutting down the VTrak Telnet Connection page 307 Shutting down the VTrak SSH Connection page 307 e Shutting down the VTrak Serial Connection page 308 Shutting down the VTrak Telnet Connection This function shuts down the VTrak subsystem on a Telnet connection Additional action is required as described below Important If you have a JBOD Expansion always power off the RAID subsystem first Then power off the JBOD subsystems To shutdown the RAID subsystem 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter 2 Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter 3 Highlight Option and press the spacebar to display Shutdown 4 Highlight Submit and press Enter A warning message appears 5 Press Y to continue The screen goes blank 6 Wait for no less than two minutes 7 Manually turn off the power supply switches on the back of the subsystem Shutting down the VTrak SSH Connection This function shuts down the VTrak subsystem on a SSH connection Additional action is required as described below Important If you have a JBOD Expansion always power off the RAID subsystem first Then power off the JBOD subsystems 307 VTrak E Class Product Manual To shutd
349. o create a disk array 1 2 3 4 Click the Storage tab Click the Disk Array icon Click the Create Disk Array button Accept the defaults or make changes e Enter an alias in the Alias field Maximum of 32 characters letters numbers space between characters and underline e Media Patrol Uncheck to disable on this array For more information see Media Patrol on page 331 e PDM Uncheck to disable on this array For more information see PDM on page 331 e Power Management Uncheck to disable on this array e Choose a media type Hard disk drive HDD or solid state drive SSD You cannot mix drive types in the same array In the Select Physical Drives diagram click the drives to add them to your array Look for drives with a green LED dark a blue LED lit and no crosshatching over the carrier gt Green LED dark Blue LED lit The ID numbers of the chosen drives appear in the field below the diagram When you have finished your settings and choices click the Submit button The new array appears in the list If you are done creating disk arrays click the Finish button To create additional disk arrays click the Create More button After you create a disk array create a logical drive on it See Creating a Logical Drive Manually on page 165 150 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Creating a Disk Array with the Wizard The Wizard creates disk ar
350. o create a disk array with different characteristics highlight Create New Array and press Enter Repeat the steps above specifying different parameters Or choose the Advanced option 231 VTrak E Class Product Manual Creating a Disk Array Advanced For more information on the choices below see Chapter 7 Technology Background on page 331 To create a disk array using the Advanced feature 1 From the Main Menu highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter 2 Highlight Create New Array and press Enter 3 Highlight Configuration Method and press the spacebar to toggle to Advanced Step 1 Disk Array Creation 1 If you want to specify an alias to the disk array highlight Alias and type a name Maximum of 32 characters Use letters numbers space between words and underscore Choose whether to enable Media Patrol PDM and Power Management Choose a Media Type HDD or SSD Highlight Save Settings and Continue and press Enter Highlight a physical drive you want to add to your array and press the spacebar to choose it AE OS Repeat this action until you have selected all the physical drives for your array 6 Highlight Save Settings and Continue and press Enter Step 2 Logical Drive Creation 1 If you want to specify an alias to the logical drive highlight Alias and type a name Maximum of 32 characters Use letters numbers space between words and underscore 2 Highlight RAID Level and press
351. o to the Summary screen and tap the Manage icon For more information see Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe on page 69 When you are done using the WebPAM PROe tap the Done button in the top left corner of the screen You return to the Summary screen Troubleshooting If a subsystem is shut down or its network connection is lost the subsystem appears on the Home screen with e No status icon e A Not Connected message e A Login button See Figure 5 Figure 5 Subsystem not connected VTrak Monitor 192 168 10 143 No status icon Not Connected Login message button Tap the Login button to reconnect If you cannot reconnect verify that the subsystem is running and connected to your Wi Fi network 499 VTrak E Class Product Manual 500 Index A about this manual 1 adaptive writeback cache explained 363 setting 87 217 alarm patterns 375 alias controller 86 216 disk array 157 234 logical drive 166 245 physical drive 144 227 Auto Fix 168 246 auto rebuild enable 120 273 B background activities current 114 273 background activity management 114 273 battery information 89 reconditioning 90 123 223 replace 324 reported events 411 view information 222 BBU reported events 411 blade server reported events 411 boot the subsystem 84 309 browser does not connect 408 browsers supported 10 buzzer settings 91 313 sound patterns 375 C cable Ethernet
352. ocessing data requests in parallel since the same data resides on two different drives Recommended Applications for RAID 1 Accounting Payroll Financial Any application requiring very high availability 336 Chapter 7 Technology Background RAID 1E Enhanced Mirror RAID 1E offers the security of mirrored data provided by RAID 1 plus the added capacity of more than two physical drives It also offers overall increased read write performance plus the flexibility of using an odd number of physical drives With RAID 1E each data stripe is mirrored onto two physical drives If one drive fails or has errors the other drives continue to function providing fault tolerance Figure 3 RAID 1E can mirror data over an odd number of drives Enhanced Data Mirrors aa Physical Drives The advantage of RAID 1E is the ability to use an odd number of physical drives unlike RAID 1 and RAID 10 You can also create a RAID 1E Logical Drive with an even number of physical drives However with an even number of drives you obtain somewhat greater security with comparable performance using RAID 10 RAID 1E logical drives consist of three or more physical drives You can create an array with just two physical drives and specify RAID 1E But the resulting array is actually a RAID 1 Advantages Disadvantages e Implemented as a mirrored disk Very high disk overhead uses array whose segments are RAID only 50 o
353. odule SAS port is accumulating link errors Browser Does Not Connect to WebPAM PROe If you successfully setup and connected to WebPAM PROe then suddenly you can no longer connect it might be the result of the following three conditions e DHCP is enabled on your VTrak s virtual management port e The DHCP server does not have a dedicated IP address for the VTrak e The VTrak restarted and your DHCP server assigned a new IP address You must obtain the new IP Address for the virtual management port in order to direct your browser to the VTrak and start WebPAM PROe To access the new IP address 1 Start your PC s terminal VT100 or ANSI emulation program Press Enter once to launch the CLI At the Login prompt type administrator and press Enter At the Password prompt type password and press Enter af on Type net and press Enter administrator cli gt net Virtual Mgmt 192 168 10 85 255 255 255 0 192 168 10 1 Up The new virtual management port IP address and other network settings display 6 Enter the new IP address into your browser to log into WebPAM PROe For more information see Making Serial Cable Connections on page 40 and Logging into WebPAM PROe on page 60 408 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Power Cycling the Subsystem To power cycle a RAID subsystem means to Shut down Turn off the power Turn on the power Restart Power cycling is sometimes required as a remedial action but only when pro
354. of the foregoing remedy and regardless of whether PROMISE has been advised of the possibility of such damages PROMISE is not an insurer If you desire insurance against such damage you must obtain insurance from another party Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages for consumer products so the above limitation may not apply to you This warranty gives specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state This limited warranty is governed by the State of California Your Responsibilities You are responsible for determining whether the product is appropriate for your use and will interface with your equipment without malfunction or damage You are also responsible for backing up your data before installing any product and for regularly backing up your data after installing the product PROMISE is not liable for any damage to equipment or data loss resulting from the use of any product 441 VTrak E Class Product Manual Returning the Product For Repair If you suspect a product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product contact our Technical Support staff and be ready to provide the following information Product model and serial number required Return shipping address Daytime phone number Description of the problem Copy of the original purchase invoice The technician helps you determine whether the pro
355. olFamily IPv6 Disabled DHCP Disabled IP 2001 1 PMask ffff MAC 00 01 55 61 18 65 DNS Gateway Accessing the MAC Address in the CLU To access the MAC address in the CLU 1 Atthe CLI command prompt type menu and press Enter The CLU screen appears 2 Highlight Network Management and press Enter 3 Highlight Pv4 and press Enter The following information displays Active Controller Id 1 Port Id Max Supported Speed 1000Mbps Link Status Up Protocol Family Pv4 Status Enabled MAC Address 00 01 55 61 18 65 DHCP Disabled IP Address 10 0 0 1 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 DNS Server IP Address 0 0 0 0 46 Chapter 3 Setup Seitting up VTrak with the CLI Setting up the VTrak in the CLI includes these actions e Making Subsystem Date and Time Settings page 47 e Virtual Management Port Settings page 47 e Making Virtual Management Port Settings Automatically page 47 e Making Virtual Management Port Settings Manually under IPv4 page 48 e Making Virtual Management Port Settings Manually under IPv6 page 49 e Maintenance Mode Settings page 50 e Making Maintenance Mode Settings Automatically page 50 e Making Maintenance Mode Settings Manually under IPv4 page 51 e Making Maintenance Mode Settings Manually under IPv6 page 53 Making Subsystem Date and Time Settings To set the subsystem date and time 1 Type date a
356. omplete array dialog box 2 Doone of the following e Delete the array This action deletes all logical drives on the array e Replace the missing physical drive 404 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Connection Problems Connection problems include e Serial Connections page 405 e Network Connections page 406 e Fibre Channel Connections page 406 e SAS Connections page 407 e Browser Does Not Connect to WebPAM PROe page 408 Connection problems cause a majority of failures in almost any electrical system While the installation of the cables and components was correct they don t function properly or at all because e A connector is dirty or corroded e A connector is loose or damaged e A cable looks OK outside but has an open circuit inside e The wrong cable was used VTraks ship with a full set of new cables as required for each specific model Be sure to use these components because 1 They are the proper ones for your RAID subsystem 2 They are in brand new condition and 3 You paid for them with the purchase of your subsystem Serial Connections VTrak uses a serial connection for the command line interface CLI and the command line utility CLU After you set the IP address you can access the CLI and CLU through a network connection also Normally users prefer WebPAM PROe because of its graphic user interface But the CLI and CLU can do the same jobs And they work when your network connection
357. on PDM migrates data from the suspect physical drive to a spare drive before the physical drive fails Power Management parks the heads spins down and stops rotation after a set period of time to reduce power consumption Media Patrol PDM and Power Management are enabled by default Enabled is the recommended setting for both features To enable Media Patrol PDM and Power Management on a disk array 1 From the Main Menu highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter 2 Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter 235 VTrak E Class Product Manual 6 Highlight Media Patrol and press the spacebar to toggle between Enable and Disable Highlight PDM and press the spacebar to toggle between Enable and Disable Highlight Power Management and press the spacebar to toggle between Enable and Disable Press Control A to save your settings See Running PDM on a Disk Array on page 237 and Making Background Activity Settings on page 273 For Power Management settings see Making Controller Settings on page 216 Preparing the Disk Array for Transport To run the Transport function on a disk array 1 2 3 4 From the Main Menu highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter Highlight Transport and press Enter Press Y to confirm Rebuilding a Disk Array Before you can rebuild you must have a replacement or target physical drive
358. on Settings To make Synchronization settings 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Background Activities icon The list of background activities appears 3 Click the Settings button 4 Click the Synchronization Rate dropdown menu and choose a rate e Low Fewer system resources to Synchronization more to data read write operations Medium Balances system resources between Synchronization and data read write operations e High More system resources to Synchronization fewer to data read write operations 5 Click the Confirm button Battery Reconditioning Batteries maintain power to the controller cache in the event of a power failure thus protecting any data that has not been written to a physical drive Reconditioning is the action of discharging and recharging a battery to preserve its capacity and performance By default each battery is reconditioned every two months When the recondition is completed the battery s cycle count increments by one Caution Disabling or deleting the battery recondition schedule is NOT recommended See Reconditioning a Battery on page 90 Spare Check Spare Check verifies the status of your spare drives Because spare drives are not currently handling data there are no settings for Soare Check See Running Spare Check on page 175 123 VTrak E Class Product Manual Managing Storage Services Storage service management includes e Vi
359. on disables the buzzer for all events To silence the buzzer follow the procedure above for disabling the buzzer 313 VTrak E Class Product Manual 314 Chapter 6 Maintenance This chapter covers the following topics Updating the Subsystem Firmware below Updating Physical Drive Firmware page 321 Replacing a Power Supply page 323 Replacing a Cache Backup Battery page 324 Replacing a RAID Controller Dual Controllers page 326 Replacing a RAID Controller Single Controller page 327 Resetting the Default Password page 330 Updating the Subsystem Firmware This procedure applies to VTrak RAID subsystems and VTrak JBOD expansion units managed by a VTrak RAID subsystem There are three methods WebPAM PROe page 315 CLU page 317 USB Support page 319 Updating with WebPAM PROe Download the latest firmware image file from PROMISE support http www promise com support and save it to your Host PC or TFTP server Important Verify that no background activities are running on the RAID subsystem To update the firmware on the RAID subsystem and JBOD expansion units 1 2 3 Click the Administration tab Click the Firmware Update icon Click the Controller Firmware Update tab The Controller Firmware Update screen appears showing the current Image Version Number and Build Date Choose a download option e Local File through HTTP Click the Browse button locate the
360. on is normally done to logical drives after they are created from a disk array Warning When you initialize a logical drive all the data on the logical drive is lost Backup any important data before you initialize a logical drive 167 VTrak E Class Product Manual To initialize a logical drive 1 2 6 Click the Administration tab Click the Background Activities icon The list of background activities appears Mouse over Initialization and click the Start button Check the box to the left of the logical drive you want to initialize Choose the initialization option you want e Quick Initialization Check the box and enter a value in the Quick Initialization Size field This value is the size of the initialization blocks in MB Full Initialization Do not check the box Enter a hexadecimal value in the Initialization Pattern in Hex field or use the default 00000000 value Click the Confirm button Stopping Pausing or Resuming an Initialization To stop pause or resume Initialization i 2 3 Click the Administration tab Click the Background Activities icon The list of background activities appears Mouse over Initialization and click the Stop Pause or Resume button Redundancy Check on a Logical Drive Redundancy Check is a routine maintenance procedure for fault tolerant disk arrays those with redundancy that ensures all the data matches exactly Redundancy Check can also c
361. onse to the event A list of event categories is shown below e Battery page 411 e BBU page 411 Blade Server page 411 Cache page 411 Controller page 412 CRC page 414 e Disk Array page 414 Drive Interface page 414 e Enclosure page 415 Event Log page 415 Fibre Channel page 415 Firmware Update page 416 e Host Interface page 416 e Initiator page 417 JBOD page 418 e Logical Drive page 418 e Media Patrol page 419 e Online Capacity Expansion page 419 e Parity page 420 e PDM page 420 Physical Disk Physical Drive page 420 PSU Power Supply Units page 422 PSU Fans page 423 RAID Level Migration page 423 Rebuild page 424 Redundancy Check page 424 Resource page 425 SCSI page 425 SEP page 425 Spare Check page 425 Spare Drives page 425 SMART page 425 Stripe Level Migration page 426 Synchronization page 426 Subsystem VTrak page 426 Transition page 427 Unknown page 427 Zoning page 427 410 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Reported Event Corrective Action Battery Battery is inserted No action is required Battery charging has failed Replace the battery Battery reconditioning has started No action is required Battery reconditioning has been terminated Replace the battery The write policy of writeback logical drive switched from writeback to write
362. or becomes missing during e RAID level migration e Disk array transport Migration Normally if a physical drive or the controller fails during migration the disk array goes critical and you can rebuild it Transport Transport is the action of moving the physical drives of a disk array e To different slots in the same enclosure From one enclosure to another If a physical drive fails during a transport or you do not move all of the physical drives to their new locations WebPAM PROe displays an incomplete array When WebPAM PROe discovers an incomplete array it displays a dialog box asking you to e Click the OK button to accept the incomplete array e Click the Cancel button to reject the incomplete array Accepting an Incomplete Array Before you accept the incomplete array be sure all of the physical drives are present and that their drive carriers are properly installed into the enclosure See Installing Physical Drives on page 21 If you choose to accept the incomplete array 1 Click OK in the incomplete array dialog box 403 VTrak E Class Product Manual 2 Check the operational status of the logical drives in the array e Ifthe logical drives are Critical proceed with a rebuild e Ifthe logical drives are Offline contact Technical Support See page 435 3 Restore your data from a backup source If you choose NOT to accept the incomplete array 1 Click Cancel in the inc
363. or more unconfigured physical drives are available If you do NOT accept these parameters use the Express below or Advanced page 64 option to create your disk array If you accept these parameters click the Submit button and then click the Finish button The new disk array appears in the Disk Array List on the Storage tab Disk Array option Express When you choose the Express option a set of characteristics and options appears on the screen 1 Check the boxes to choose any one or a combination of e Redundancy The array remains available if a physical drive fails e Capacity The greatest possible amount of data capacity e Performance The highest possible read write speed Spare Drive A hot spare drive is created when you choose Redundancy Spare Drive and five or more unconfigured physical drives are available 63 VTrak E Class Product Manual Mixing SATA SAS Drive Check this box if you want to use both SATA and SAS drives in the same disk array If the box is unchecked and you have both SATA and SAS drives different arrays are created for each type of drive In the Number of Logical Drives field enter the number of logical drives you want to make from this disk array VTrak supports up to 32 logical drives per disk array From the Application Type menu choose an application that best describes your intended use for this disk array e File Server e Transaction Data Other e Video St
364. ork switch and the Management ports on both RAID controllers VTrak E Class Product Manual Figure 20 iSCSI DAS data and management connections Host PC or server Network switch C J rT TT TT AAAA A X ED beh GEL ebei pd N A Network J cable Management port Network connector iSCSI HBA card iSCSI data port iSCSI data cables VTrak RAID subsystem 38 Chapter 2 Installation iSCSI with JBOD Expansion JBOD expansion requires at least one SFF 8088 4X to SFF 8088 4X external SAS cable for each JBOD unit To add JBOD units 1 Connect the SAS expansion port on the left controller of the RAID subsystem to the SAS data IN port on the left I O module of the first JBOD unit See Figure 14 Connect the SAS expansion port on the right controller of the RAID subsystem to the SAS data IN port on the right I O module of the first JBOD unit Connect the SAS data OUT port on left I O module of the first JBOD unit to the SAS data IN port on the left I O module of the second JBOD unit Connect the SAS data OUT port on right I O module of the first JBOD unit to the SAS data IN port on the right I O module of the second JBOD unit Connect the remaining JBOD units in the same manner e Keep your data paths organized to ensure redundancy e JBOD expansion support
365. orrect inconsistencies To run Redundancy Check on a logical drive 1 2 Click the Administration tab Click the Background Activities icon The list of background activities appears Mouse over Redundancy Check and click the Start button Check the boxes to the left of the logical drives you want to run Check the options you want e Auto Fix Attempts to repair the problem when it finds an error e Pause on Error The process stops when it finds a non repairable error Click the Confirm button 168 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Stopping Pausing or Resuming a Redundancy Check To stop pause or resume Redundancy Check 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Background Activities icon The list of background activities appears 3 Mouse over Redundancy Check and click the Stop Pause or Resume button Migrating a Logical Drive s RAID Level The term Migration means either or both of the following e Change the RAID level of a logical drive Expand the storage capacity of a logical drive Before you begin a migration examine your current disk array to determine whether e The physical drives in your array can support the target RAID level e There is sufficient capacity to accommodate the target logical drive size If you need to add physical drives to your array be sure there are unassigned physical drives are installed in your RAID system before you begin migration See
366. ort Viewing Controller Statistics To view controller statistics 1 2 3 4 Click the Device tab Click the Component List icon Click the controller you want then click the View button Click the Statistics tab 87 VTrak E Class Product Manual Controller statistics include Data Transferred e 10 Requests Read Data Transferred e Non Read Write Requests e Write Data Transferred e Read IO Requests Errors e Write IO Requests e Non Read Write Errors e Statistics Start date and time e Read Errors e Statistics Collection date and e Write Errors time Note To clear controller statistics see Clearing Statistics on page 79 Locating a Controller This feature causes the controller LEDs to blink for one minute to assist you in locating the controller on a RAID subsystem or JBOD expansion unit To locate a controller 1 Click the Device tab 2 Click the Component List icon 3 Click the controller you want then click the Locate button The controller LEDs blink for one minute Figure 3 FC RAID controller LEDs Dirty Cache LED Controller Status LED Mgmt lolol S SAS EXP 1 on D 20 o o o 40 o o O o 80 kt Ok m o o Viewing the Flash Image Information To view the flash image information for the RAID subsystem enclosure 1 Click the Administration tab
367. ort promise com Web site http www promise com apple 439 VTrak E Class Product Manual Limited Warranty PROMISE Technology Inc PROMISE warrants that this product from the time of the delivery of the product to the original end user all components except the cache backup battery for a period of three 3 years the cache backup battery for a period of one 1 year will conform to PROMISE s specifications will be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service This warranty d applies only to products which are new and in cartons on the date of purchase is not transferable is valid only when accompanied by a copy of the original purchase invoice Is not valid on spare parts This warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance or unauthorized modification s performed by the end user operation outside the environmental specifications for the product accident misuse negligence misapplication abuse natural or personal disaster or maintenance by anyone other than a PROMISE or a PROMISE authorized service center Disclaimer of other warranties This warranty covers only parts and labor and excludes coverage on software items as expressly set above Except as expressly set forth above PROMISE DISCLAIMS any warranties expressed or implied by statute or otherwise regarding the product including without
368. ose an End On option e No end date or perpetual End after a specific number of activity actions 115 VTrak E Class Product Manual e Until date from the dropdown menus 12 For Redundancy Check choose e Auto Fix option Attempts to repair the problem when it finds an error Check to enable e Pause on Error option The process stops when it finds a non repairable error Check to enable Select LD Check the boxes for the logical drives to run Redundancy Check Check at least one logical drive 13 Click the Save button Changing a Background Activity Schedule Caution Disabling the battery recondition schedule is NOT recommended To change an existing scheduled background activity 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Background Activities icon The list of background appears 3 Click the Scheduler button The list of currently scheduled background act it viti es appears 4 Click the background activity and click the Settings button 5 Make settings changes as required Choose a Start Time from the dropdown menus The menus have a 24 hour clock e Choose a Recurrence Pattern option daily weekly or monthly e For the Daily option enter an interval in the Every field For the Weekly option enter an interval in the Every field and choose one or more days of the week e For the Monthly option choose the Day of the Month option or the day of the week option and
369. our VTrak has only one controller Power down the VTrak before removing it 327 VTrak E Class Product Manual Important Do not replace the RAID controller based on LED colors alone Only replace the RAID controller when directed to do so by PROMISE Technical Support See page 435 Important The firmware on the replacement RAID controller must be the same version as the original RAID controller or a later version The amount of SDRAM in the replacement RAID controller must be the same as the original RAID controller or greater To obtain firmware and SDRAM information for the currently installed RAID controller click the Administration button then click the Image Version icon Removing the Old Controller To remove the RAID controller 1 5 Shutdown the VTrak See Shutting Down the Subsystem on page 83 WebPAM PROe or page 307 CLU Switch off the power Disconnect all attached cables from the RAID controller e Fibre Channel cables Management port cables iSCSI cables e Serial cable SAS expansion cables e UPS control cable On the controller handle squeeze the release tab and pull the handle outward See page 327 Figure 4 Pull the RAID controller out of the subsystem enclosure Installing the New Controller To install the new RAID controller 1 2 3 Carefully slide the RAID controller into the enclosure Gently swing the handle in and press the handle until it locks Recon
370. own the RAID subsystem 1 gt A CON or gi From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter Highlight Option and press the spacebar to display Shutdown Highlight Submit and press Enter A warning message appears Press Y to continue Close your SSH session Wait for no less than two minutes Manually turn off the power supply switches on the back of the subsystem Shutting down the VTrak Serial Connection This function shuts down the VTrak subsystem on a serial connection Additional action is required as described below Important If you have a JBOD Expansion always power off the RAID subsystem first Then power off the JBOD subsystems To shutdown the RAID subsystem 1 a Pon From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter Highlight Option and press the spacebar to display Shutdown Highlight Submit and press Enter A warning message appears Press Y to continue Turn off the power supply switches when you see the following message Shutdown complete It is now safe to power off the subsystem 308 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Starting Up After Shutdown There are two methods for shutting down the subsystem Choose one of the following procedures Starting up the VTrak
371. page 400 for more information The Locator feature is triggered from WebPAM PROe or the CLU It causes the LEDs to blink on and off for one minute That action helps you find the physical component Drive Carrier LEDs The VTrak spins up the disk drives sequentially to equalize power draw during start up After a few moments e The Power Activity LED displays blue when a physical drive is present e The Drive Status LED displays green when the physical drive is configured as a member of a disk array or as a spare When the physical drive is unconfigured the LED is dark See the diagram and table on the next page 378 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Figure 2 Drive carrier LEDs Drive Status Power Activity Drive Carrier LEDs State Power Activity Drive Status Dark No drive in carrier Drive is unconfigured Steady Blue Drive is present Flashing Blue Activity on drive Steady green Drive is configured Blinking green Locator feature Amber Drive is rebuilding Red Drive error or failure See Physical Drive Problems on page 399 for a discussion of rebuilding and failed physical drives for more information The Locator feature is triggered from WebPAM PROe or the CLU It causes the LEDs to blink on and off for one minute That action helps you find the specific drive Back Panel LEDs When the FRU Status LED on VTrak s front panel shows amber or red chec
372. page 489 PROMISE has fully tested VTrak multipathing on RedHat RHEL 5 3 5 4 and 5 5 and SuSE SLES 10 SP2 10 SP3 11 and 11 SP1 Coverage in this Product Manual is limited to those OSes Multipathing is possible on other Linux OSes PROMISE has not tested every possible combination and therefore does not attempt to cover them here For a list of supported OSes download the latest compatibility list from PROMISE support http www promise com support Before You Begin Before you can set up multipathing on your Linux Host PC you must Install your Fibre Channel or SAS HBA card into the Host PC Install the HBA card drivers onto the Host PC Setup your VTrak install your physical drives and create your logical drives Attach your Fibre Channel or SAS cables from the HBA card to the VTrak RAID subsystem Install RHEL 5 x with the linux mpath option For ALUA refer to the PROMISE Linux support packages See page 486 Refer to the Linux Administration Manual your HBA documentation and this Appendix as needed for more information 471 VTrak E Class Product Manual Check Initial Setup To check your initial setup verify that you can view the logical drives on your VTrak from your Linux desktop or terminal window Refer to the Linux Administration Manual for the procedure on your system e Ifyou can see your logical drives the system is properly configured Go to Task 1 Meeting Package Requirements on pa
373. port settings Management network settings Physical drive settings Subsystem settings Click the Submit button In the Confirmation box type the word confirm in the field provided and click the Confirm button Clearing Statistics This function clears statistical data on the RAID controllers Fibre Channel ports physical drives and logical drives To clear subsystem statistics Click the Administration tab 1 ON Ber GOS Click the Subsystem Information icon Click the Clear Statistics button Type the word confirm in the field provided Click the Confirm button Saving a Service Report A Service Report is a detailed report covering the configuration and status of all components in your RAID system A support technician or field engineer might request a service report for the purpose of diagnosis and troubleshooting To save a system configuration file 1 Click Save Service Report in the Header Software Factory Default Settings BGA scheduler settings Service settings Webserver settings SNMP settings Telnet settings SSH settings Email settings Netsend settings CIM settings NTP settings User settings UPS settings LDAP settings 79 VTrak E Class Product Manual Information for the report is gathered and compiled This action takes up to a few minutes depending on the size of your RAID system 2 Click the Save File option then click the Save button The report saves to your
374. ppears Step 2 Logical Drive Creation 1 Enter your information and choose your options Enter a logical drive alias in the field provided e Choose a RAID level from the dropdown menu The choice of RAID levels depends on the number of physical drives in your array e Note the Max capacity value Then enter a capacity value the field provided and choose a unit of measure from the dropdown menu e Choose a stripe size from the dropdown menu The choices are 64 KB 128 KB 256 KB 512 KB and 1 MB e Choose a sector size from the dropdown menu The choices are 512 B 1 KB 2 KB and 4 KB e Choose the Read Cache Policy from the dropdown menu The choices are Read Cache Read Ahead cache and None e Choose the Write Cache Policy from the dropdown menu The choices are WriteThru write through and WriteBack Write back requires a Read Cache or Read Ahead Read Cache Policy Click the Add button to continue The logical drive you just created appears in the New Logical Drives list Click the Next button to continue The Create Spare Drive screen appears Step 3 Spare Drive Creation Creating a spare drive is optional but highly recommended 1 Enter your information and choose your options e Check the Revertible box if you want this spare drive to be revertible For more information see the VTrak E Class Product Manual e Choose the option for the type spare drive you want Global Replaces a failed drive
375. ppears indicating that your setting was successful administrator cli gt At the command prompt type net a mod f ipv6 s followed by e primaryip and the IP address e primaryipmask and the subnet mask e primarydns and the DNS server IP address e gateway and the Gateway server IP address and press Enter Example administrator cli gt net a mod f ipv6 s primaryip 2001 0db8 85a3 0000 0000 8a2e 0370 7334 primaryipmask 2001 0db8 fedc ba98 7654 3210 0246 8acf primarydns 2001 0db8 85a3 0000 0000 8a2e 0370 7001 gateway 2001 0db8 85a3 0000 0000 8a2e 0370 7002 After a moment the comand prompt reappears indicating that your setting was successful administrator cli gt To verify the settings at the command prompt type net a list v and press Enter 49 VTrak E Class Product Manual The following information displays administrator cli gt net a list v ActiveCtrlld 1 Port 1 MaxSupportedSpeed 1000Mbps LinkStatus Up ProtocolFamily Pv4 Enabled DHCP Disabled IP 192 168 10 85 IPMask 255 255 255 0 MAC 00 01 55 61 18 65 DNS 192 168 10 11 Gateway 192 168 10 1 ProtocolFamily Pv6 Enabled DHCP Disabled IP 2001 0db8 85a3 0000 0000 8a2e 0370 7334 PMask 2001 0db8 fedc ba98 7654 3210 0246 8acf MAC 00 01 55 61 18 65 DNS 2001 0db8 85a3 0000 0000 8a2e 0370 7001 Gateway 2001 0db8 85a3 0000 0000 8a2e 0370 7002 Maintenance Mode Settings For information on mainten
376. pper and multipath tool if they are missing Example To add the multipath tool for RHEL 5 x do the following actions 1 Open a terminal window 473 VTrak E Class Product Manual 2 Type the following command and press Enter rpm ivh device mapper multipath 0 4 7 8 e15 i386 rpm The system returns the following lines Preparing Heteeeeeee eee aaa teee 100 Lidevice mapper multipath ttttteeeeeee ete e es 100 or a similar message Important Where possible obtain the device mapper and multipath tool from the original installation CDs to ensure full compatibility with your existing OS Refer to your OS documentation for more information Verifying Packages RedHat To verify that the required packages are installed on the host do the following actions 1 Open a terminal window 2 Type the following command and press Enter rpm qa grep device mapper If the required packages are present the system returns the following lines RHEL 5 3 device mapper 1 02 28 2 e15 device mapper multipath 0 4 7 23 el5 RHEL 5 4 device mapper 1 02 32 1 e15 device mapper multipath 0 4 7 30 el5 RHEL 5 5 device mapper 1 02 39 1 e15 device mapper multipath 0 4 7 34 el5 Note that the actual version number might be different depending on your configuration Verifying Packages SuSE To verify that the required packages are installed on the host do the following actio
377. provided Cache settings are made on the RAID controller See Making Controller Settings on page 86 WebPAM PROe or page 216 CLU Read Cache Policy e Read Cache The read cache is enabled but no pre fetch action e Read Ahead The read cache and predictive pre fetch feature are enabled Read ahead anticipates the next read and performs it before the request is made Can increase read performance Forced Read Ahead The read cache and aggressive pre fetch feature are enabled See Forced Read Ahead Cache below No Cache The read cache is disabled Write Cache Policy e Write Back Data is written first to the cache then to the logical drive Better performance VTrak has a cache backup battery to protect data in the cache from a sudden power failure Adaptive Writeback See Adaptive Writeback Cache below e Write Thru Also Write Through Data is written to the cache and the logical drive at the same time Safer If your write cache policy is set to Write Back the write policy automatically changes to Write Thru when all of the following conditions occur e The logical drive write policy is set to Write Back e The Adaptive Writeback Cache feature is enabled e The cache backup battery goes offline When the battery comes back online the write policy automatically changes back to Write Back Also see Viewing Battery Information on page 89 or page 222 Forced Read
378. rals connected to this UPS unit e Add more UPS units or use a higher capacity UPS unit to protect your RAID systems 285 VTrak E Class Product Manual Managing Users User Management includes the following functions Viewing User Information page 286 Creating a User page 286 Changing Another User s Settings page 287 Changing Your Own User Settings page 288 Changing Another User s Password page 288 Changing Your Own Password page 288 Deleting a User page 289 Viewing User Information Each user types their user name and password to log into the CLI To view a list of current user accounts 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight User Management and press Enter A list of the current users appears Creating a User To create a new user account 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight User Management and press Enter Highlight Create New User and press Enter Highlight each field and type in the appropriate information e User name Maximum 31 characters Use letters numbers and underscore No spaces e Password Optional Maximum 31 characters Use letters numbers and underscore e Display name Optional e User s email address Highlight Privilege and press the space bar to toggle though the options See the Table on the next page Press Control A to save the user
379. ray Management and press Enter 2 Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter 3 Highlight Background Activities and press Enter 4 Highlight Predictive Data Migration and press Enter Default source and target drives are shown with possible alternative choices 5 To choose different drive highlight the drive press the backspace key to remove the current number then type a new number 6 Highlight Start and press Enter See Enabling Media Patrol PDM and Power Management on a Disk Array on page 235 For PDM rate see Making Background Activity Settings on page 273 Running Transition on a Disk Array Transition is the process of replacing a revertible spare drive that is currently part of a disk array with an unconfigured physical drive or a non revertible spare drive For more information see Transition on page 356 In order to run Transition e The spare drive must be Revertible e You must have an unconfigured physical drive of the same or larger capacity to replace the spare drive To run Transition on a disk array 1 From the Main Menu highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter 2 Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter 3 Highlight Background Activities and press Enter 4 Highlight Transition and press Enter 237 VTrak E Class Product Manual Default source and target drives are shown with possible alternative choices 5 To choose different drive highlight
380. ray can migrate to RAID 1 Other RAID Levels use too many drives to migrate e You cannot migrate a disk array when it is Critical or performing activities such as Synchronizing Rebuilding and PDM e For RAID 6 or RAID 60 you can only migrate between these two RAID levels Destination RAID 60 axles can have up to 16 physical drives Other limitations might apply Source and Target RAID Levels The tables on the following pages show the migration options for each source logical drive by its RAID level The available target RAID levels are shown with their requirements 347 VTrak E Class Product Manual RAID 0 A RAID 0 source logical drive can migrate to the following target logical drives Target Requirements RAID 0 Add physical drives RAID 1 2 physical drives only Only a single drive RAID 0 can migrate to RAID 1 by adding 1 physical drive RAID 1E 3 or more physical drives If existing physical drives have no unused space add 1 or more physical drives RAID 5 3 physical drives minimum 32 maximum RAID 0 must have less than 16 physical drives If existing physical drives have no unused space add 1 or more physical drives RAID 6 4 physical drives minimum 32 maximum If existing physical drives have no unused space add 1 or more physical drives RAID 10 4 physical drives minimum Even number of physical drives If existing physical drives have no unused space add 1 or more physi
381. rays and logical drives automatically It has four options Optimal Configurations You choose a script designed to set up your disk arrays logical drives and spare drives for a specific target application Each script requires a specific model of RAID subsystem And most scripts require a specific model and number of JBOD expansion units You cannot cannot modify these scripts Automatic Creates a new disk array following a default set of parameters Creates a hot spare drive for all RAID levels except RAID 0 when five or more unconfigured physical drives are available You can accept or reject the proposed arrangement but you cannot modify it Express You choose the parameters for a new disk array by specifying the characteristics you want You can create multiple logical drives at the same time however they are all identical Creates a hot spare drive for all RAID levels except RAID 0 Advanced Enables you to specify all parameters for a new disk array logical drives and spare drives 151 VTrak E Class Product Manual Wizard Optimal Configurations Important Know how your RAID system is configured so you can choose an appropriate script If a script cannot run on the RAID system it displays an error message This action requires Super User or Power User privileges To use the Optimal Configurations Wizard ON Peo IO Click the Storage tab Click the Wizard icon Click the Optimal Con
382. re drive 1 2 3 4 Click the Storage tab Click the Spare Drive icon Click the Create Spare Drive button For each of the following items accept the default or change the settings as required e Check the Revertible box if you want a revertible spare drive A revertible spare drive returns to its spare drive assignment after you replace the failed physical drive in the disk array and run the Transition function e Global Can be used by any disk array e Dedicated to newly created disk array The disk array you are now creating In the Select Physical Drives diagram click a drive to choose it for your spare The ID number for chosen drive appears in the field below the diagram Click the Submit button If you are done creating spare drives click the Finish button To create another spare drive click the Create More button 173 VTrak E Class Product Manual Deleting a Spare Drive This action requires Administrator or a Super User privileges To delete a spare drive 1 2 3 4 Click the Storage tab Click the Spare Drive icon Click the spare drive you want then click the Delete button In the Confirmation box type the word confirm in the field provided and click the Confirm button Making Spare Drive Settings For more information on settings options see Spare Drives on page 355 To make spare drive settings 1 2 3 4 5 Click the Storage tab
383. re has been deleted No action is required SMART SMART error is received If this message appears repeatedly replace the physical drive 425 VTrak E Class Product Manual Reported Event Corrective Action Stripe Level Migration Stripe Level migration is started Stripe Level migration is completed No action is required Stripe Level migration is paused Resume SLM when ready Stripe Level migration is resumed No action is required Stripe Level migration is stopped If this action was not intentional check the logical drive s status Stripe Level migration has encountered a physical disk error Check the physical drive check table after OCE is finished Stripe Level migration is aborted due to an internal error Reduce system load on the VTrak Stripe Level migration is queued No action is required Synchronization Synchronization is started No action is required Synchronization is completed No action is required Synchronization is paused Resume synchronization when ready Synchronization is resumed Synchronization is stopped No action is required Synchronization is aborted due to an internal error Reduce system load on the VTrak Synchronization is queued Synchronization is stopped internally No action is required Subsystem VTrak The Subsystem is started
384. re update Updates with this option take a longer period of time to complete Only VTrak x30 models support this feature Highlight Start and press Enter Warning Do NOT power off the RAID subsystem during the update Do NOT move to any other screen until the firmware update operation is completed e If you chose the Disruptive Flash Method the RAID subsystem and JBOD expansion units automatically restart e If you chose the Non Disruptive Flash Method the system automatically flashes and restarts the RAID controllers one at a time 317 VTrak E Class Product Manual Automatic Restart If you chose the Disruptive Flash Method the RAID subsystem and JBOD expansion units automatically restart That action temporarily disrupts I O operations and drops your CLU connection After the screen goes blank wait about two minutes then re establish your Telnet connection to the CLU If you cannot re establish a connection wait 30 seconds and try again 318 Chapter 6 Maintenance Updating with USB Support USB support uses the disruptive flash method only Both RAID controllers and all JBOD O modules are updated at the same time and momentarily go offline when the RAID subsystem and JBOD unit reboot This procedure requires a USB flash device e Formatted to FAT 32 Atleast 50 MB of free space Download the latest OPAS_xxxxx sbb firmware image file from PROMISE support http www promise com
385. ream e Transaction Log Click the Next button to continue The Summary screen appears with information on disk arrays logical drives and spare drives you are about to create If you accept these parameters proceed to the next step If you do NOT accept these parameters review and modify your selections in the previous steps When you are done click the Submit button and then click the Finish button The new disk array appears in the Disk Array List on the Storage tab Disk Array option Advanced Note For an explanation of the parameters under the Advanced option see Chapter 7 Technology Background on page 331 When you choose the Advanced option the Create Disk Array screen appears Step 1 Disk Array Creation 1 Enter your information and choose your options e Enter a disk array alias in the field provided e Check the box to enable Media Patrol e Check the box to enable Predictive Data Migration PDM Check the box to enable Power Management e Choose a media type Hard disk drive HDD or solid state drive SSD Click the enclosure graphic to view information about physical drives 64 Chapter 3 Setup Look for drives with a green LED dark a blue LED lit and no crosshatching over the carrier Click a physical drive to select it for your array The physical drive s ID number is added to the Selected list Click the Next button to continue The Create Logical Drive screen a
386. rent VLAN for a maximum of 32 VLANs If you plan to associate the new portal with a trunk create the trunk first See Adding iSCSI Trunks on page 271 For more information about iSCSI VLANs see iSCSI on a VLAN on page 368 To add an iSCSI portal 1 2 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI Portals and press Enter The list of iSCSI Portals displays Highlight Create New Portal and press Enter Highlight AssociatedType and press the Spacebar to toggle through PHY VLAN and Trunk If you chose PHY Choose a Controller ID 1 or 2 and a Port ID 1 to 4 e VLAN Choose a Controller ID 1 or 2 a Port ID 1 to 4 anda VLANTag 0 to 4094 e Trunk Choose a Trunk ID 1 to 8 To change an ID number highlight the item press Backspace to delete the current ID and type a new ID Highlight DHCP and press the Spacebar to toggle between Enable and Disable Note that DHCP is currently supported only for IPv4 If you chose DHCP Disable e Choose a Protocol Family IPv4 or IPv6 e Enter a Primary IP address e Enter a Primary IP mask or subnet mask 264 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU To change a value highlight the item press Backspace to delete the current value and type a new value Highlight Save Settings and press Enter The new Portal is added to the list Making iSCSI Portal Settings To make portal settings 1 2 CO MND
387. require a SAS to SATA adapter available from PROMISE External I O Ports per Controller E830f and E630f Four 8 Gb s Fibre Channel ports compatible with 4 Gb s and 2 Gb s E830i and E630i Four 1 Gb s iSCSI ports All models One external SAS port with an SFF 8088 SAS connector supports up to 7 cascading JBOD expansion units Features Data Cache e 2 GB data cache per controller A portion of the data cache is shared with the controller firmware e Protected with hot swappable battery backup unit BBU Operational Features RAID Level Support e 0 1 1E 5 6 10 50 and 60 RAID Stripe Size Support 64K 128K 256K 512K and 1MB Hot Spare Drives e Global e Dedicated e Revertible option Maximum LUNs Supported e LUNs 1024 e Array 32 Advanced Storage Features e Advanced Cache Mirroring over PCle Gen2 e Simple drag and drop LUN Masking and Mapping e Asymmetric LUN Unit Access ALUA e Volume Copy e PerfectFlash Non Disruptive Software Update e I O performance amp power monitoring tools e Guaranteed Latency Technology an advanced OEM feature e USB Service Log e LDAP Support for central user management Background Activities e Media Patrol e Background Synchronization e Foreground Initialization e Rebuild e Redundancy Check VTrak E Class Product Manual e Disk SMART Polling e Online Capacity Expansion OCE e RAID Level Migration RLM e UPS Monitoring e F
388. ript Click the Administration tab Click the Import Export icon Click the Import option Choose Configuration Script from the Type dropdown menu Click the Browse button and navigate to the configuration script and click the OK button 6 Click the Next button The system verifies that the file is a valid configuration script and displays any errors or warnings 7 Click the Submit button to continue 8 Inthe Confirmation box type the word confirm in the field provided and click the Confirm button Ol oe w Ni The configuration script is imported and applied automatically Exporting a Configuration Script You can save the configuration from one VTrak RAID subsystem export it and then import it to automatically configure your other VTrak RAID subsystems To export a configuration script 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Import Export icon 3 Click the Export option 4 Choose Configuration Script from the Type dropdown menu 82 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Da Click the Submit button In the Open dialog box click the Save File option then click the OK button The file is saved to your PC as Configscript txt Caution Do NOT attempt to write or modify a configuration script until you receive guidance from Technical Support See page 435 Restarting the Subsystem This function shuts down the subsystem and then restarts it Important Do NOT turn off t
389. rive to a specified pattern such as all zeros The action is useful because there may be residual data on the logical drives left behind from earlier configurations For this reason Initialization is recommended for all new logical drives See Initializing a Logical Drive on page 167 or page 245 Caution When you initialize a logical drive all the data on the logical drive is lost Backup any important data before you initialize a logical drive Partition and Format Like any other type of fixed disk media in your system a RAID logical drive must also be partitioned and formatted before use Use the same method of partitioning and formatting on an logical drive as you would any other fixed disk Depending on the operating system you use there may or may not be various capacity limitations applicable for the different types of partitions 354 Chapter 7 Technology Background Spare Drives Spare drive technology includes e Definition page 355 e Options page 355 e Requirements page 355 e Transition page 356 Definition A spare drive is a physical drive that you designate to automatically replace the failed physical drive in a disk array See Creating a Spare Drive Manually on page 173 The general recommendation is to e Provide at least one spare drive for every 16 physical drives in the RAID system e Configure the spares as global revertible spare drives Options There are s
390. roduct Manual Managing Background Activities Background activity management includes e Viewing Current Background Activities page 114 e Viewing Scheduled Background Activities page 114 e Adding a Scheduled Background Activity page 115 e Changing a Background Activity Schedule page 116 e Enabling or Disabling a Scheduled Background Activity page 117 e Deleting a Scheduled Background Activity page 117 e Media Patrol page 118 e Redundancy Check page 118 e Initialization page 119 e Rebuild page 120 e Migration page 120 e PDM page 121 e Transition page 122 e Synchronization page 122 e Battery Reconditioning page 123 e Spare Check page 123 Background activities perform a variety of preventive and remedial functions on your physical drives disk arrays logical drives and other components You can run a background activity immediately or schedule it to run at a later time Scheduling options are described below Setting options for each activity are listed after the scheduling options These settings determine how the background activity affects I O performance Viewing Current Background Activities To view a list of current background activities 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Background Activities icon The list of background appears Currently running activities show a progress bar Viewing Scheduled Background Activities To view a list of scheduled backgroun
391. ror rebuild the disk array See Rebuilding a Disk Array on page 236 After rebuilding the drive shows Stale Run Clear Stale then run Clear PFA If the physical drive with a PFA error is a spare you must delete the drive as a spare then Clear PFA is available After you clear a PFA error watch for another PFA error to appear If it does replace the physical drive Forcing a Physical Drive Offline This function enables you to force an online physical drive to go Offline The Force Offline function appears only for physical drives that are assigned to disk arrays Caution Forcing a physical drive offline is likely to cause data loss Back up your data before you proceed Use this function only when required 227 VTrak E Class Product Manual Important Forcing a physical drive offline causes your logical drives to become degraded If Auto Rebuild is enabled and a spare drive is available the disk array begins rebuilding itself automatically To force a physical drive offline 1 Gi ee Oo 1 From the Main Menu highlight Physical Drive Management and press Enter Highlight Global Physical Drives Settings and press Enter Highlight the physical drive you want and press Enter Highlight Force Offline and press Enter Press Y to confirm Locating a Physical Drive This feature helps you identify a physical drive within the VTrak enclosure you are working with through the CLU To locate a ph
392. rors See the VTrak Jx10s or Jx30s Product Manual for more information Link errors can be caused by e Debris blocking the SAS cable connector e A faulty SAS cable e A faulty controller or I O module SAS connector Blocked Cable Connectors To check for debris blocking the SAS cable connector 1 Power down the RAID subsystem and JBOD units 2 Remove the SAS cable and check all SAS connectors for debris 3 Clean the connectors as required and reconnect the SAS cable 4 Power up the subsystems and monitor the link port counter for changes in the rate of link error accumulation Faulty Cable To check for a faulty SAS cable 1 Power down the RAID subsystem and JBOD units 2 Replace the SAS cable with a new one 3 Power up the subsystems and monitor the link port counter for changes in the rate of link error accumulation Faulty Controller or I O Module Connector To check for a bad controller or I O module SAS connector 1 With the subsystems online and I Os running access the CLI via serial or Telnet See Initial Connection on page 206 2 At the command prompt type the following command and press Enter 407 VTrak E Class Product Manual administrator cli gt sasdiag a errorlog expander e 1 i 1 3 At the command prompt type the following command and press Enter administrator cli gt sasdiag a errorlog c2cport By interpreting the two error logs you can verify which controller or I O m
393. rray ID ID number of the disk array where this logical drive was created 162 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Viewing Logical Drive Information To view logical drive information Click the Storage tab Click the Logical Drive icon The list of logical drives appears 1 2 Click the logical drive you want then click the View button Logical Drive information displays including ID LDO LD1 LD2 etc Alias If assigned Array ID ID number of the disk array where this logical drive was created RAID Level Set when the logical drive was created Operational Status OK means normal Capacity Data capacity of the logical drive Number of Axles For RAID 10 2 axles For RAID 50 and 60 2 or more axles Physical Capacity Data capacity of the physical drives Number of Physical Drives The number of physical drives in the disk array Stripe size Set at logical drive creation Read Policy Adjustable Sector size Set at logical drive creation Write Policy Adjustable Preferred Controller ID For RAID subsystems with dual controllers Tolerable Number of Dead Drives Number of physical drives that can fail without the logical drive going offline Synchronized A new logical drive shows No until synchronizing is completed See Synchronization on page 122 Parity Pace Pertains to some RAID levels WWN Worldwide Number a unique ident
394. rray to be RAID 10 you must specify RAID 10 under RAID level Creating a LUN Clone A LUN clone is an exact copy of the original LUN or logical drive including all the data it contains at one point in time Use a LUN clone as a backup or to migrate a LUN from one system to another Important The action of creating a LUN momentarily takes the original LUN or logical drive offline meaning nobody can read or write to it ALUN clone has the same capacity stripe size read and write policies as the orignal LUN However the LUN clone can be a different RAID level The choice of RAID levels depends on the disk array And if you have multiple disk arrays you can create the LUN clone on a different disk array than the original LUN This action requires Super User or Power User privileges To create a LUN clone of a logical drive 1 Click the Storage tab 2 Click the Logical Drive icon The Logical Drive list appears 3 Click the logical drive you want then click the LUN Clone button 4 Make settings as required 170 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe From the Choose a RAID level dropdown menu choose the RAID level of the LUN clone e From the Number of Copies dropdown menu choose the number of LUN clones you want to create You can make up to 8 clones of a LUN at a time e Check the box to the left of the Disk Array on which you want to create the LUN clone Click the Next button and review your choi
395. rror block threshold range is 1 to 2048 blocks 5 Click the Confirm button Transition Transition is the process of replacing a revertible spare drive that is currently part of a disk array with an unconfigured physical drive or a non revertible spare drive See Running a Transition on a Spare Drive on page 175 and Transition on page 356 Making Transition Settings To make Transition settings 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Background Activities icon The list of background activities appears 3 Click the Settings button 4 Click the Transition Rate dropdown menu and choose a rate e Low Fewer system resources to Transition more to data read write operations Medium Balances system resources between Transition and data read write operations High More system resources to Transition fewer to data read write operations 5 Click the Confirm button Synchronization Synchronization is automatically applied to logical drives when they are created Synchronization recalculates the redundancy data to ensure that the working data on the physical drives is properly in sync Mouse over on the logical drive click the View button and look under Logical Drive Information beside the line that says Synchronized A Yes means the logical drive was synchronized See Viewing Logical Drive Information on page 163 122 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Making Synchronizati
396. rt e Slave ports The remaining available iSCSI ports Session A session is a group of TCP connections that link an iSCSI initiator with a target Each RAID controller supports a maximum of 1024 sessions or 2048 per subsystem Session has one option Keep Alive sometimes written Keepalive Keep alive is an HTTP protocol for maintaining an active connection between teh iSCSI client and server The client sends a keepalive signal is sent over the network at predefined intervals e When the server replies the client knows that the link is up the connection between client and server works e Ifthere is no reply the client assumes the link is down and routes future data over another path until the original link is up again The keep alive feature on VTrak tells the RAID controller to reply to keep alive signals informing the client that its link to VTrak is up You can enable Keep Alive on individual sessions or as a global setting for all sessions iSNS Internet Storage Name Service iSNS is a protocol that facilitates automated discovery management and configuration of iSCSI devices on a TCP IP network iSNS service runs on an iSNS server on your network You can enable iSNS on the VTrak and specify the IP address and port number of the iSNS server CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP is an authentication mechanism used to authenticate iSCSI sessions between initiators and target
397. rt your PC Alternate Method 1 This procedure uses the Windows uninstaller To remove the PerfectPath software 1 2 3 4 In the Start menu choose Control Panel then choose Programs and Features Right click Perfect Path and choose Uninstall from the popup menu In the Confirmation box click the Yes button In the Restart message box click the Yes button to restart your PC Alternate Method 2 To use this procedure the PerfectPath exe installer file must be the same version number as the PerfectPath software installed on your PC To remove the PerfectPath software 1 2 3 Double click the PerfectPath exe file to start the installer In the Welcome screen click the Next button In the Program Maintenance screen choose the Remove option then click the Next button In the Remove the Program screen click the Remove button In the Completed screen click the Finish button In the Restart message box click the Yes button to restart your PC 470 Appendix C Multipathing on Linux The appendix covers the following topics Before You Begin below Task 1 Meeting Package Requirements page 473 Task 2 Preparing the Configuration File page 476 Task 3 Making Initial Host Settings page 478 Task 4 Create and Configure Devices page 480 Task 5 Setting up ALUA page 481 RPM Packages and Documents for Linux MPIO page 486 Linux MPIO Known Issues page 488 Sample multipath conf File
398. rtal See iSCSI Storage Area Network SAN on page 34 6 Add your iSCSI intiators to the VTrak s initiator list 366 Chapter 7 Technology Background See Adding an iSCSI Initiator on page 178 or page 278 For more information see e Managing iSCSI Connections on page 188 or page 257 e iSCSI Management on page 366 e Visit the Promise Knowledgebase at hitp kb promise com and access topic 10188 Setting up Microsoft iSCSI Initiator With the VTrak Figure 9 iSCSI component map t To iSCSI HBA To iSCSI HBA To iSCSI HBA or switch or switch or switch l l Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet a a a e Bound to Bound to Bound to Bound to Portal 1 Portal 2 Portal 3 Portal 4 Accessed Accessed Accessed using using using Target 1 Target 2 Exposes Exposes Exposes Exposes Logical Logical Logical Logical Drive 1 Drive 2 Drive 3 Drive 4 367 VTrak E Class Product Manual iSCSI on a VLAN VTrak supports up to 32 iSCSI portals per iSCSI port Each iSCSI portal can belong to a different VLAN for a maximum of 32 VLANs See the diagram on page 335 Figure 2 To set up the VTrak subsystem for a VLAN 1 Add a new portal with a VLAN association See Adding iSCSI Portals on page 194 or page 264 Note which iSCSI port you chose for the portal Add a new target See Adding iS
399. s 372 Chapter 7 Technology Background A uni directional or peer CHAP authenticates from the target VTrak to the initiator host PC or server A bi directional or local CHAP authenticates target to initiator and initiator to target Ping Ping is a computer network administration utility that tests whether a device is accessable over the IP network Ping sends echo request packets to the target node such as your host PC or server and waits for a response It measures the time from transmission to reception and records any packet loss VTrak can ping through its virtual management port and each of its iSCSI data ports You must input the IP address of the target client Internet Protocols VTrak supports the IPv4 and IPv6 protocols Protocol Addresses Example IPv4 32 bits 4 3 x 109 192 168 10 85 2001 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 e2a8 4337 IPv6 128 bits 3 4 x 10 8 Abbreviated 2001 0 0 0 0 0 e2a8 4337 373 VTrak E Class Product Manual 374 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting This chapter contains the following topics e VTrak is Beeping below e LEDs Display Amber or Red page 377 e CLU Reports a Problem page 382 WebPAM PROe Reports a Problem page 385 e USB Support Reports a Problem page 390 e Enclosure Problems page 391 RAID Controller Problems page 395 e Disk Array and Logical Drive Problems page 400 e Physical Drive Problems page 399
400. s e Up to 8 individual logical drives 5 Under Physical Drive choose the metric you want to see from the Measurement dropdown menu e Bandwidth in MB s e Maximum latency in ms e Average latency in ms e Minimum latency in ms e I Os per second 138 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Click the Select Physical Drives button and check the boxes for the physical drives you want to see e Total of all physical drives e Up to 8 individual physical drives Under Port choose the metric you want to see from the Measurement dropdown menu e Bandwidth in MB s e Maximum latency in ms e Average latency in ms e Minimum latency in ms e I Os per second Click the Select Ports button and check the boxes for the ports you want to see e Total of all ports e Up to 8 individual ports Since the Performance Monitor is a real time display it does not accumulate information and there is no clear or save function To save performance statistics for analysis or troubleshooting save a Service Report open the report and look under Statistic Info See Saving a Service Report on page 79 Monitoring PSU Wattage The PSU Wattage Monitor displays real time performance statistics for logical drives the input power of all enclosures and the input power of an individual The vertical scale adjusts dynamically to accommodate the statistical data Because it reports performance in real time to see data in
401. s enabled To delete a LUN map 1 2 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight LUN Mapping and press Enter 281 VTrak E Class Product Manual 3 5 Do one of the following actions e Highlight LUN Mapping Initiators and press Enter Then highlight an initiator and press Enter e Highlight LUN Mapping Ports and press Enter Then highlight a port and press Enter e Highlight LUN Mapping Targets and press Enter Then highlight a target and press Enter A list of logical drives displays A list of logical drives displays In the LUN field press the backspace key to erase the current value Leave the field blank Press Control A to save the initiator port or target without a LUN map Changing the Active LUN Mapping Type For FC systems you can set up an Initiator or Port type LUN map For iSCSI systems you can set up an Initiator or Target tyoe LUN map You can set up both LUN map types on the same subsystem but only one LUN map type can be active at a time To change the active LUN map type 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight LUN Mapping and press Enter Highlight Active LUN Mapping Type and press the Spacebar to toggle between choices e FC subsystems choose the Initiator or Port option iSCSI subsystems choose the Initiator or Target option Press Control A to save your set
402. s required Host interface link is down Check connections Host interface controller has encountered an unknown error Host interface controller has encountered a system error If this message appears repeatedly contact Tech Support Host interface controller has encountered a fatal error Restart the VTrak If this message appears repeatedly contact Tech Support Host interface controller settings have changed No action is required Host interface controller has received a WARM reset command Host interface controller has received a COLD reset command Host Interface controller MU handshake failed Host Interface controller HMU has stopped Host Interface controller FMU has unloaded If this message appears repeatedly contact Tech Support Initiator Initiator sent message for detecting an error If this message appears repeatedly contact Tech Support 417 VTrak E Class Product Manual Reported Event Corrective Action JBOD JBOD system connected No action is required JBOD system either is removed or malfunctioned Check Expander firmware and SAS connections Logical Drive Logical drive initialization has started Logical drive Initialization is in progress Logical drive initialization has completed No action is required Logical drive initialization has paused Resume the
403. s up to nine 9 JBOD units Figure 21 iSCSI JBOD expansion connections SAS expansion port RAID controller p lt SAS cable Y srs IN port SAS OUT port SAS IN port VTrak JBOD unit 39 VTrak E Class Product Manual Making Serial Cable Connections Serial communication enables the terminal emulation application on your host PC or server to access the VTrak s Command Line Interface CLI to set up a network connection The VTrak package includes one RJ11 to DB9 serial data cable for each controller Figure 22 UPS and Serial connectors Mini D9UPS RJ11 serial Mini D9UPS RJ11 serial connector connector connector connector 06 0 VTrak FC RAID subsystem VTrak iSCSI RAID subsystem To set up a serial cable connection 1 Attach the RJ11 end of the serial data cable to the RJ11 serial connector on one of the RAID controllers 2 Attach the DB9 end of the serial data cable to a serial port on the host PC or server Optional UPS Serial Connection If your deployment plan calls for one or more UPS units and management via serial communication connect a UPS control cable to the Mini D9 UPS conn
404. se the attaching screws and flange nuts that came with the VTrak 19 VTrak E Class Product Manual Figure 4 Placing the VTrak subsystem onto the rack rails Screws and flange nuts attach the VTrak to the rack post 20 Chapter 2 Installation Installing Physical Drives If your VTrak subsystem shipped with the drives installed at the factory you can skip this section and go to Making Management and Data Connections on page 25 The VTrak Ex30 RAID subsystems and JBOD expansion units support e SAS and SATA physical drives e 2 5 inch and 3 5 inch physical drives e Hard disk drives HDD and solid state drives SSD For a list of supported physical drives download the latest compatibility list from PROMISE support http www promise com support Number of Drives Required The table below shows the number of drives required for each RAID level Level Number of Drives Level Number of Drives RAID 0 1 or more RAID 6 4 to 32 RAID 1 2 only RAID 10 4 or more RAID 1E 2 or more RAID 50 6 or more RAID 5 3 to 32 RAID 60 8 or more Must be an even number of drives Drive Slot Numbering You can install any suitable disk drive into any slot in the enclosure The diagram below shows how VTrak s drive slots are numbered Slot numbering is reflected in the WebPAM PROe and CLU user interfaces 21 VTrak E Class Product Manual Figure 5 VTrak E830f i
405. se undesired operation GOST R Npeaynpexgenve QaHHbi npogykT OTHOCHTCA K Knaccy A B AomawHnx YCNOBNAX OH MOXET ObITb MpNYNHO BO3HUKHOBeEHNA pagvonomex B TOM cnyyae Nonb30BaTento BO3MOXKHO NOTPebyeTCA NPUHATb COOTBETCTBYIOLLINe Mepbl KCC vccl COREG WHLBRESERRESAERMAHBMS VCCI OR BSC VFIAZAGARAKECT CORB RE CHATS CBR MBER TFCEPHVETF COMBI EAAPBOICHRERT SBEDPRBRKENSCEPHVETF Safety and Environmental Environmental Standards RoHS GreenPC WEEE Warnings and Cautions Warnings and Cautions are placed in this Product Manual beside the user actions to which they apply You can find these warnings and cautions under Unpacking the VTrak on page 15 Mounting VTrak in a Rack on page 17 Installing Your Drives on page 22 Logging onto a Subsystem on page 75 Restoring Factory Default Settings on page 78 and page 306 Importing a Configuration Script on page 82 Exporting a Configuration Script on page 82 Reconditioning a Battery on page 90 and page 223 Silencing the Buzzer on page 91 page 313 and page 376 Making Virtual Management Port Settings on page 100 and page 250 Importing a User Database on page 106 Changing a Background Activity Schedule on page 116 and Enabling or Disabling a Scheduled Background Activity on page 117 Battery Reconditioning on page 123 and page 223 Forcing a Physical Drive Offline on page 146 an
406. set your path Load Balance Policy to Round Robin the I Os follow all active paths changing paths at the specified I O count You can set the I O count in the General tab of the Advanced Settings dialog box Changing the Round Robin Count To change Round Robin Count settings 1 Do one of the following actions e Click the Advanced Settings icon From the Operations menu choose Settings icon The Advanced Settings dialog box appears with the MPIO Parameters tab displayed Click the General tab Under Round Robin Count click the arrows or type a new value in the I Os per Path field to change the count 464 Features and Settings 10 I Os is the default value 4 Click the Apply button The new setting takes effect immediately See also e Load Balance Policy on page 461 e Viewing LUN Performance Statistics on page 456 e Viewing Path Performance Statistics on page 457 Refreshing the Objects Use this function after making an addition or deletion to your LUNs or paths To refresh the objects do one of the following actions From the Operations menu choose Refresh Click the Refresh f icon PerfectPath automatically displays all reported changes However some actions are not reported The Refresh action enables you to see the latest information See also e Automatic Load Balancing for Failover Policy on page 460 e Load Balance Policy on page 461 e Path Verifica
407. settings Important If a user is logged in when his account is disabled the user is immediately logged out 287 VTrak E Class Product Manual Changing Your Own User Settings Each user can change their display name and email address To change your user settings 1 5 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight User Management and press Enter Highlight your name and press Enter Highlight the items you want and press the backspace key to erase the current value then type the new value e User name e Email address Press Control A to save the settings Changing Another User s Password The Administrator or a Super User can change other users passwords To change a password 1 anoe w N D From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight User Management and press Enter Highlight the User whose password you want to change and press Enter Highlight Change Password and press Enter Highlight New Password and type a new password Maximum 31 characters Use letters numbers and underscore Highlight Retype Password and type the new password again to verify Press Control A to save the new password Note To reset the Administrator s password to the factory default see Resetting the Default Password on page 330 Changing Your Own Password Each user can change their own password
408. sions between initiators and targets 268 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU To view a list of iSCSI CHAPs 1 2 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI CHAPs and press Enter A list of the current CHAPs appears Information includes e ID ID number Numbering starts at 0 e Type Peer is one way Local is bi directional e Name Same as an alias Adding iSCSI CHAPs Verify that CHAP authentication is enabled under Making iSCSI Target Settings on page 260 To add an iSCSI CHAP 1 aoe wO N From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI CHAPs and press Enter Highlight Create New CHAP Entry and press Enter Highlight Name and type a name for the CHAP Highlight Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Peer and Local Peer is one way Local is bi directional Highlight Secret and type a secret of 12 to 99 characters Highlight Retype Secret and type the secret again to verify Highlight Save CHAP Record and press Enter The new CHAP is added to the list Making iSCSI CHAP Settings When you change CHAP settings you must change the secret You cannot change the type peer or local To make iSCSI CHAP settings 1 2 3 4 From the Main Menu highlight iSCSI Management and press Enter Highlight iSCSI CHAPs and press Enter Highlight the CHAP you want to edit and press Enter Make changes as needed
409. sk array has been created Disk array has been deleted Disk array has been added Disk array has been removed Disk array settings have been changed No action is required Disk array is transport ready Remove physical drives in disk array and insert them into a different subsystem To cancel Transport Ready Status remove and reinsert the drives in their original slots Drive Interface Drive interface controller is found No action is required Drive interface controller is NOT found Restart the VTrak If this message appears repeatedly contact Tech Support 414 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Reported Event Corrective Action Drive interface diagnostics has passed No action is required Drive interface diagnostics has failed Restart the VTrak If this message appears repeatedly contact Tech Support Drive interface controller has generated a general parity error Drive interface controller has generated a data parity error If this message appears repeatedly contact Tech Support Enclosure Enclosure temperature is above the threshold Check blowers and fans Enclosure temperature is above the warning threshold Enclosure temperature is above the critical threshold Check airflow around the VTrak Check blowers and fans Enclosure temperature is within the normal range No action is required Shut down PS
410. sk is no longer assigned as a global spare Physical disk assigned as dedicated spare Dedicated Spare has been deleted Physical Disk is no longer assigned as a dedicated spare Physical disk has been inserted No action is required Physical disk has been removed Insert the physical drive back into the system Command on physical disk has been re tried If this message appears repeatedly replace the physical drive Physical disk ECC error is detected Physical disk CRC error is detected Replace the physical drive Bad sector is found on physical disk Error is detected in remap sectors Command times out on physical drive Physical disk negotiation speed is decreased If this message appears repeatedly replace the physical drive Previously configured disk is no longer found Insert the physical drive back into the system A physical disk has encountered an unknown non ECC media error If this message appears repeatedly replace the physical drive A physical disk has encountered PFA condition Clear the PFA condition If this message appears repeatedly replace the physical drive A configured dead physical drive has been inserted Replace the physical drive 421 VTrak E Class Product Manual Reported Event Corrective Action A physical drive page 0 settings have been changed A physical drive page 1 set
411. ss Product Manual Figure 2 VTrak E630f i front view Drive Carrier LEDs Drive Carriers Power and Status LEDs Figure 3 VTrak E830f back view RAID Controller 1 RAID Controller 2 Power Supply 1 Power Supply 2 Architectural Description Figure 4 VTrak E630f back view RAID Controller 1 RAID Controller 2 Power Supply 1 Power Supply 2 Figure 5 VTrak E830i back view RAID Controller 1 RAID Controller 2 Power Supply 1 Power Supply 2 VTrak E Class Product Manual Figure 6 VTrak E630i back view RAID Controller 1 RAID Controller 2 Power Supply 1 Power Supply 2 Features Controller Module Features Drive Support 3 5 inch and 2 5 inch form factor Hard disk drives HDDs and Solid State drives SSDs SAS 6 Gb s and 3 Gb s SATA 6 Gb s and 3 Gb s Supports any mix of SAS and SATA drives simultaneously in the same enclosure For a list of supported drives go to PROMISE support http Awww promise com support SATA physical drives
412. ss the spacebar to toggle between Enable and Disable 216 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU 6 e Highlight SMART Poll Interval and press the backspace key to erase the current value Type a new interval value 1 to 1440 minutes e Highlight Poll Interval and press the backspace key to erase the current value Type a new interval value 15 to 255 seconds e Highlight Adaptive Writeback Cache and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and Disabled For more information see Adaptive Writeback Cache on page 363 e Highlight Forced Read Ahead Cache and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and Disabled For more information see Forced Read Ahead Cache on page 362 e Highlight HDD Power Saving and the spacebar to choose a time period After an HDD has been idle for a set period of time Power Saving Idle Time Parks the read write heads Power Saving Standby Time Lowers disk rotation speed Power Saving Stopped Time Spins down the disk stops rotation You must also enable Power Management on the disk array See Creating a Disk Array Advanced on page 232 and Enabling Media Patrol PDM and Power Management on a Disk Array on page 235 Press Control A to save your settings Notes e Power Management must be enabled on the disk array for the HDD Power Saving settings to be effective See Making Disk Array Settings on page 233 e Power management is limited to t
413. started The following icons report the severity of each event Green check icon Information e Yellow icon Warning e Red X icon Major or Critical See the table on the next page 497 VTrak E Class Product Manual Event Severity Levels Level Description Critical Action is needed now and the implications of the condition are serious Major Action is needed now Warning User can decide whether or not action is required Information Information only no action is required Notes e The default setting displays only Major or Critical events To view Information and Warning events see Changing VTrak Monitor Settings on page 494 VTrak Monitor has fewer event severity levels than WebPAM PROe For more information on events see page 382 Support To view support information 1 Tap the Support icon 2 Tap the location you want Location information includes e Pre sales toll free phone number Tap to call the number iPhone only Support toll free phone number Tap to call the number iPhone only e Fax number For information only e Sales email address Tap to send a message Tech Support email address Tap to send a message e Website Tap to open the browser and visit the website 498 Managing the VTrak with WebPAM PROe Managing the VTrak with WebPAM PROe To launch WebPAM PROe through your iPad or iPhone g
414. support and save it the root folder of the USB flash device Important Verify that no background activities are running on the RAID subsystem To update the subsystem firmware using VTrak s USB Support feature 1 Insert the USB flash device into one of the USB ports on one of the RAID controllers Figure 1 FC RAID controller LEDs USB ports Controller Status LED Mgmt lolol Cars SAS EXP LJ o GD ae o o o nan 40 o O o o E ee E The controller status LED blinks green in half second intervals 2 Wait until the controller activity LED stops blinking green and starts blinking amber Warning Do NOT power off the RAID subsystem during the update Do NOT remove your USB flash device until the LED changes color 3 Within 30 seconds remove the USB flash device then insert the USB flash device back into the same RAID controller The remove and insert action confirms that you want to update the firmware 319 VTrak E Class Product Manual You can insert the USB flash device back into either USB port but it must be the same RAID controller as step 1 4 Wait until the controller activity LED displays steady green 5 Remove the USB flash device Automatic Restart After you remove the USB flash device from the RAID controller the RAID subsystem and any JBOD expansion units automa
415. t mask gateway IP address and DNS server IP address into the fields provided Click the Submit button 101 VTrak E Class Product Manual Managing Users User management includes e Viewing User Information below e Creating a User page 102 Setting User Event Subscriptions page 103 e Changing User Passwords page 105 e Deleting a User page 106 e Importing a User Database page 106 e Exporting a User Database page 107 The Administrator or a Super User can perform these tasks Viewing User Information To view user information 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the User Management icon The list of users displays User information includes e User name e Status e Privilege level e Display name e Email address e User Type local or LDAP user Creating a User This action requires Administrator or Super User privileges To create a user 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the User Management icon 3 Click the Add User button 4 Inthe Add User dialog box enter the information in the fields provided e Name This is the user s login name e Display Name e Password e Retype Password e User Email Required for event notification 102 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe 5 Choose a privilege level from the dropdown menu See the table below 6 Optional Uncheck the Enable box to disable this User account 7 Click the Save button The user is adde
416. t 80 110V gt 20 load gt 80 240V gt 20 load Operating Environment Temperature Range e Operational 5 to 35 C 41 to 95 F e Non Operational 40 to 60 C 40 to 140 F General Specifications Humidity Range e Operational 10 to 90 Non Condensing e Non Operational 5 to 95 Non Condensing Noise Shock and Vibration Acoustic Noise Levels e Typical 55 dB e Maximum 65 dB Shock e Operational 5G 11 ms duration e Non Operational 10G 11ms duration Vibration e Operational 0 3G 5 to 500 Hz e Non Operational 1G 5 to 500 Hz Dimensions Height Width Depth 4U 24 Bay 17 4 x 44 7 x 50 7 cm 6 9 x 17 6 x 19 96 in 3U 16 Bay 13 1 x 44 7 x 50 7 cm 5 2 x 17 6 x 19 96 in Weight e 40 24 Bay 27 kg 60 Ibs w o drives e 30 16 Bay 25 kg 56 lbs w o drives VTrak E Class Product Manual Safety and Environmental EMI RFI Statements BSMI SABA Be RMA AA dh TEE CEA Heh Oe AIS OT BE S a ae A FH CRAM HAS ARERR E ANR e CE Warning This is a class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures FCC This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cau
417. t Media Patrol and press enter Highlight Start Stop Pause or Resume and press Enter If you chose Stop press Y to confirm 211 VTrak E Class Product Manual Locking or Unlocking the Subsystem The lock prevents other sessions including sessions with the same user from making a configuration change to the controller until the lock expires or a forced unlock is done When the user who locked the controller logs out the lock is automatically released Setting the Lock To set the lock 1 From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter 2 Highlight Lock Management and press Enter 3 Inthe Lock Time field type a lock time in minutes 1440 minutes 24 hours 4 Highlight Lock and press Enter Resetting the Lock To reset the lock with a new time 1 From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter 2 Highlight Lock Management and press Enter 3 In the Lock Time field type a lock time in minutes 1 to 1440 minutes 24 hours 4 Highlight Renew and press Enter Releasing the Lock 1 From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter 2 Highlight Lock Management and press Enter 3 Highlight Unlock and press Enter Releasing a Lock set by another user To release somebody else s lock 1 From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter 2 Highlight Lock Management and press Enter 3 Highlight Force Unlock and press the Spacebar to change to
418. t have multiple data path connections to the VTrak subsystem e The VTrak must be fully booted e The VTrak must have at least one logical drive See Making Management and Data Connections on page 19 for information about making data connections See Creating a Disk Array Manually on page 150 or Creating a Disk Array on page 229 for information about creating RAID arrays and logical drives You can verify Perfect Path installation on the Host PC in one of three ways Start Menu e Services List e Device Manager Start Menu To verify PerfectPath installation in the Start menu From the Start menu choose All Programs gt PerfectPath gt PerfectPath View The PerfectPath View software starts Services List To verify PerfectPath installation in the Services list 1 From the Start menu right click the Computer icon and choose Manage from the popup menu 2 Inthe Server Management tree click the icon beside Configuration 3 Click the Services icon 4 Inthe Services window look for the PerfectPath Events Service If the PerfectPath Events Service is present PerfectPath has been installed The Service should be Started and set to Automatic on the Local System Device Manager To verify PerfectPath installation in the Device Manager 1 From the Windows desktop right click the Computer icon and choose Manage from the dropdown menu 2 Inthe Server Management tree click the icon beside Diagnosti
419. t to detect data corruption in the header portion of each iSCSI packet A data digest adds a 32 bit CRC digest to detect data corruption in the data portion of each iSCSI packet If a data packet arrives with an invalid CRC digest the data packet is rejected Header and data digests work best with initiators equipped with a TOE Refer to your iSCSI HBA For more information see your iSCSI HBA user documentation 370 Chapter 7 Technology Background CHAPs Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol CHAP is an authentication mechanism used to authenticate iSCSI sessions between initiators and targets A uni directional or peer CHAP authenticates from the target VTrak to the initiator host PC or server A bi directional or local CHAP authenticates target to initiator and initiator to target Portal A portal is the logical point of connection between the VTrak and the iSCSI network Portals use an IP address and a TCP port number to identify an IP storage resource VTrak supports up to 32 iSCSI portals per iSCSI port VTrak uses TCP port 3260 VTrak supports both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses See Internet Protocols on page 373 Portals on VTrak support three types of port associations PHY A simple connection through one port e VLAN Virtual Local Area Network The portal is part of a virtual network Used when a dedicated network is not available for iSCSI Trunk An aggregation of two or more
420. tPath page 450 e Verifying Installation page 451 e Running Perfect Path View page 453 e Monitoring Your LUNs and Paths page 454 e Features and Settings page 460 e Troubleshooting page 467 e Updating PerfectPath page 468 e Repairing PerfectPath page 469 e Removing PerfectPath page 470 PerfectPath is a multipathing software designed for use with PROMISE VTrak E Class RAID subsystem products and includes e GUI Graphic user interface PerfectPath View for easy monitoring and settings e DSM Device Specific Module driver e Events Service Notification service posts events to the application log PerfectPath supports Fibre Channel and Serial Attached SCSI SAS technologies PerfectPath runs on Windows Server 2008 and 2008 R2 operating systems on both x86 and x64 platforms For a list of supported OSes download the latest compatibility list from PROMISE support http www promise com support Before You Begin Before you install PerfectPath on your Windows Host PC you must e Install your Fibre Channel or SAS HBA cards and their device drivers e Close all computer and storage management applications including Computer Management Device Manager Disk Management and the Registry Editor 449 VTrak E Class Product Manual Note If you have a complex configuration such as multiple HBAs connected with multiple LUNs and paths to your PC installation can take a
421. tabase servers e General fileserver 341 VTrak E Class Product Manual RAID 50 Striping of Distributed Parity RAID 50 combines both RAID 5 and RAID 0 features Data is striped across physical drives as in RAID 0 and it uses distributed parity as in RAID 5 RAID 50 provides data reliability good overall performance and supports larger volume sizes Figure 7 RAID 50 is a combination of RAID 5 and RAID 0 Distributed Parity F 8 F 6 B Disk Drives Data Stripes The data capacity RAID 50 logical drive equals the capacity of the smallest physical drive times the number of physical drives minus two RAID 50 also provides very high reliability because data is still available even if multiple physical drives fail one in each axle The greater the number of axles the greater the number of physical drives that can fail without the RAID 50 logical drive going offline Component Minimum Maximum Number of Axles 2 16 Physical Drives per Axle 3 32 Physical Drives per Logical Drive 6 256 RAID 50 Axles When you create a RAID 50 you must specify the number of axles An axle refers to a single RAID 5 logical drive that is striped with other RAID 5 logical drives to make RAID 50 An axle can have from 3 to 32 physical drives depending on the number of physical drives in the logical drive 342 Chapter 7 Technology Background The chart below shows RAID 50 logical drives wi
422. tals on page 195 To delete an iSCSI trunk 1 OV OPN Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Trunk tab Click the trunk you want then click the Delete button In the Confirmation box type the word confirm in the field provided and click the Confirm button The trunk is removed from the list Viewing a List of iSCSI Sessions To view a list of iSCSI sessions 1 2 3 Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Session tab iSCSI session information includes ID ID number of the session e Target Name Alias of the target initiator Name Part of the IQN Portal ID ID number of the portal e Status Active or inactive 198 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Viewing iSCSI Session Information To view a list of iSCSI sessions Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Session tab Click the iSCSI session you want and click the View button Information includes 1 2 3 4 Session ID ID number of the session Status Active or inactive Target Alias Initiator Name iSCSI qualified name iqn Portal IP IP address of the portal Device Type Initiator or target Target Portal Group ID number TSIH Target session identifying handle Execution Throttle Max number of outstanding commands on any one port Max Outstanding R2T Number of PDUs ready to tr
423. tatistics To clear logical drive statistics see Clearing Statistics on page 305 Viewing the Logical Drive Check Table To view logical drive information 1 From the Main Menu highlight Logical Drive Management and press Enter 2 Highlight the logical drive you want and press Enter 3 Highlight Check Table and press Enter 4 Highlight one of the following options and press Enter e Show All Records e Read Check Table e Write Check Table e Inconsistent Check Table 244 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Making Logical Drive Settings To make Logical Drive settings From the Main Menu highlight Logical Drive Management and press Enter 1 4 Highlight the logical drive you want and press Enter For the following items accept the existing setting choose a new one Highlight Alias and type an alias into the field provided Maximum of 32 characters Use letters numbers space between words and underscore An alias is optional Highlight WritePolicy and press the spacebar to toggle between WriteBack and WriteThru write though Highlight ReadPolicy and press the spacebar to toggle though ReadCache ReadAhead and None Highlight Preferred Controller ID and press the spacebar to toggle between 1 and 2 Press Control A to save your settings Initializing a Logical Drive This function sets all data bits in the logical drive to zero Warning When you initialize a logical drive all the dat
424. te dropdown menu and choose a rate e Low Fewer system resources to Migration more to data read write operations Medium Balances system resources between Migration and data read write operations e High More system resources to Migration fewer to data read write operations 5 Click the Confirm button PDM Predictive Data Migration PDM is the migration of data from the suspect physical drive to a spare drive similar to rebuilding a logical drive But unlike Rebuilding PDM constantly monitors your physical drives and automatically copies your data to a spare drive before the physical drive fails and your logical drive goes Critical See Running PDM on a Disk Array on page 159 and PDM on page 331 Making PDM Settings To make PDM settings 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Background Activities icon The list of background activities appears 3 Click the Settings button 4 Make the following settings are required e Click the PDM Rate dropdown menu and choose a rate e Low Fewer system resources to PDM more to data read write operations e Medium Balances system resources between PDM and data read write operations 121 VTrak E Class Product Manual e High More system resources to PDM fewer to data read write operations e Highlight the current values in the block threshold fields and input new values Reassigned block threshold range is 1 to 512 blocks E
425. tem 2 Wait about two minutes 3 Establish a serial connection to the VTrak See Making a Serial Connection on page 206 When the Login prompt appears the start up is finished 4 Type menu and press Enter to open the CLU 310 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Restarting the Subsystem There are two methods for restarting the subsystem Choose one of the following procedures Restarting the Subsystem page 311 Restarting VTrak SSH Connection page 311 Restarting VTrak Serial Connection page 312 Note If you have a JBOD Expansion you are not required to restart the JBOD subsystems when you restart the RAID subsystem Restarting VTrak Telnet Connection To restart the RAID subsystem 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter Highlight Option and press the spacebar to display Restart Highlight Submit and press Enter A warning message appears Press Y to continue The screen goes blank Wait about two minutes Re establish your Telnet connection to the VTrak CLU See Making a Telnet Connection on page 207 If you cannot re establish a connection wait 30 seconds and try again Restarting VTrak SSH Connection To restart the RAID subsystem 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight Shutdown or Restart and press Enter Highlight
426. ter Highlight the controller you want and press Enter Highlight Controller Settings and press Enter Make the following settings as required 1 OV BON Type an alias into the Alias field Maximum of 48 characters Use letters numbers space between words and underscore An alias is optional Highlight LUN Affinity and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and Disabled RAID controllers must be set to Active Active See Making Subsystem Settings on page 211 and LUN Affinity on page 361 Highlight Coercion and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and Disabled For more information see Capacity Coercion on page 364 Highlight Coercion Method and press the spacebar to toggle through GB Truncate Reduces the capacity to the nearest 1 GB boundary 10 GB Truncate Reduces the capacity to the nearest 10 GB boundary Grp group Rounding Uses an algorithm to determine truncation Results in the maximum amount of usable drive capacity Table Rounding Applies a predefined table to determine truncation Highlight Host Cache Flushing and press the spacebar to toggle between Enable and Disable For more information see Host Cache Flushing on page 363 Highlight Cache Flush Interval and press the backspace key to erase the current value Type a new interval value The range is 1 to 12 seconds For more information see Cache Policy on page 362 Highlight SMART and pre
427. ter Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter Highlight Power Supplies and press Enter Highlight Locate Power Supply and press Enter The LED on the selected power supply blinks for one minute Viewing Cooling Unit Status To view the status of the power supply fans 1 2 3 4 From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter Highlight Cooling Units and press Enter The screen displays the status and speed of VTrak s cooling units which are the power supply fans If fan speed is below the Healthy Threshold there is a malfunction See Power Supplies on page 393 Viewing Temperature Sensor Status To view the status of the temperature sensors 1 2 3 4 From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter Highlight Temperature Sensors and press Enter If any temperature exceeds the Healthy Threshold value there is an overheat condition in the enclosure See Making Enclosure Settings on page 220 and See Diagnosing an Enclosure Problem on page 391 221 VTrak E Class Product Manual Viewing Voltage Sensor Status To view the status of the voltage sensors 1 From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem
428. tes to work with VTrak There are also sample configuration files in the usr share doc device mapper multipath version directory e multipath conf annotated multipath device attributes listed and defined e multipath conf synthetic multipath device attributes listed only SuSE Systems For SuSE systems there is no default etc multipath conf file There are sample multipath configuration files in the usr share doc packages multipath tools directory e multipath conf annotated multipath device attributes listed and defined e multipath conf synthetic multipath device attributes listed only Editing a Configuration File You must provide a configuration file with required device attributes to work with VTrak See the sample configuration file on page 489 Take the following actions to prepare a configuration file 1 Choose an existing multipath conf file and open the file in a text editor 2 Save a working copy of the file under another name 3 Edit the file to include the following line under defaults defaults user friendly names yes 476 Task 2 Preparing the Configuration File 4 Edit the file to include the following lines under devices devices device vendor Promise product VTrak path grouping policy ul ti bus getuid callout sbin scsi_id g u s block n path checker eadsector0 path selector round robin 0 hardware handler Q fail back immed
429. th 6 to 32 physical drives the available number of axles and the resulting distribution of physical drives on each axle RAID 50 Logical Drive No of No of Drives No of No of Drives Drives Axles per Axle Drives Axles per Axle 6 2 3 3 14 2 7 7 7 2 3 4 3 4 5 5 8 2 4 4 4 3 3 4 4 9 2 4 5 15 2 7 8 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 10 2 5 5 4 3 4 4 4 3 3 3 4 5 3 3 3 3 3 11 2 5 6 16 2 8 8 3 3 4 4 3 5 5 6 12 2 6 6 4 4 4 4 4 3 4 4 4 5 3 3 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 3 13 2 6 7 3 4 4 5 4 3 3 3 4 Advantages Disadvantages e High Read data transaction rate Higher disk overhead than Medium Write data transaction RAID 5 rate Good aggregate transfer rate e High reliability e Supports large volume sizes 343 VTrak E Class Product Manual Recommended Applications for RAID 50 e File and Application servers e Transaction processing e Office application with many users accessing small files 344 Chapter 7 Technology Background RAID 60 Striping of Double Parity RAID 60 combines both RAID 6 and RAID 0 features Data is striped across disks as in RAID 0 and it uses double distributed parity as in RAID 6 RAID 60 provides data reliability good overall performance and supports larger volume sizes Figure 8 RAID 60 is a combination of RAID 6 and RAID 0 Double Distributed Parity Data Stripes Disk Drives The total capa
430. the Storage tab Click the LUN Mapping amp Masking icon The list of LUN maps appears Click the LUN map you want then click the Delete button In the Confirmation box type the word confirm in the field provided and click the Confirm button Changing the Active LUN Map Type For FC systems you can set up an Initiator or Port type LUN map For iSCSI systems you can set up an Initiator or Target tyoe LUN map You can set up both LUN map types on the same subsystem but only one LUN map type can be active at a time 182 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe To change the active LUN mapping type 1 2 4 Click the Storage tab Click the LUN Mapping amp Masking icon The list of LUN maps appears Beside Active LUN Mapping Type e FC subsystems choose the Initiator or Port option iSCSI subsystems choose the Initiator or Target option When you change the LUN map type a popup message appears In the popup message type confirm and click the Confirm button Enabling and Disabling LUN Masking LUN masking must be enabled in order to assign map your LUNs to your initiators and to use your existing LUN maps Disabling LUN masking allows all initiators to access all LUNs in your data storage However disabling LUN masking does not delete existing LUN maps These actions require Administrator or Super User privileges To enable or disable LUN masking 1 2 3 Click the Storage tab
431. the drive press the backspace key to remove the current number then type a new number 6 Highlight Start and press Enter For transition rate see Making Background Activity Settings on page 273 Locating a Disk Array This feature helps you identify the physical drives assigned to the disk array you are working with in the CLU To locate a disk array 1 From the Main Menu highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter 2 Highlight the disk array you want and press Enter 3 Highlight Locate Disk Array and press Enter The drive carrier status LEDs flash for one minute Figure 6 Drive carrier status LED Green LED flashes 238 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Managing Spare Drives Spare Drive Management includes the following functions Viewing a list of Spare Drives page 239 Creating a Spare Drive page 239 Making Spare Drive Settings page 240 Running Spare Check page 240 Deleting a Spare Drive page 241 Viewing a list of Spare Drives To view a list of spare drives From the Main Menu highlight Spare Drive Management and press Enter A list of the current spare drives appears including the following parameters ID number e Operational Status Physical Drive ID number e Configured Capacity e Revertible The spare drive returns to spare status after you replace the failed drive in the disk array See Transition on page 356 for more information e Type Global
432. the monitor there must be I O data activity taking place between the VTrak subsystem and the Host To monitor performance and power use 1 2 3 Click the Administration tab Click the PSU Wattage Monitor icon Under Logical Drive choose the metric you want to see from the Measurement dropdown menu Bandwidth in MB s e Cache usage by e Dirty cache usage by e Maximum latency in ms 139 VTrak E Class Product Manual e Average latency in ms e Minimum latency in ms e I Os per second 4 Click the Select Logical Drives button and check the boxes for the logical drives you want to see e Total of all logical drives Up to 8 individual logical drives 5 Under Input Power of an individual Enclosure click the Select Enclosures button and check the boxes for the enclosures you want to see Since the PSU Wattage Monitor is a real time display it does not accumulate information and there is no clear or save function To save performance and power statistics for analysis or troubleshooting save a Service Report open the report and look under PSU Wattage Info See Saving a Service Report on page 79 140 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Managing Physical Drives Physical drive management includes Viewing a List of Physical Drives below Viewing Physical Drive Information page 141 Making Global Physical Drive Settings page 143 Making Individual Physical Drive Se
433. the next page Figure 2 Drive carrier LEDs Drive Status Power Activity Drive Carrier LEDs State Power Activity Drive Status Dark No drive in carrier Drive is unconfigured Steady Blue Drive is present Flashing Blue Activity on drive Steady green Drive is configured Blinking green Locator feature Amber Drive is rebuilding Red Drive error or failure Configured means the physical drive either belongs to an array or it is assigned as a spare drive For more information on LEDs see Chapter 8 Troubleshooting on page 375 43 VTrak E Class Product Manual Seitting up the Serial Connection The initial connection accesses the VTrak s serial port using the serial cable connection you made See Making Serial Cable Connections on page 40 Use your PC s terminal emulation program such as Microsoft HyperTerminal to access the VTrak s Command Line Interface CLI You can also use the serial connection to manage the VTrak through the Command Line Utility CLU To make the initial serial connection 1 Change your terminal emulation application settings to match the following specifications e Bits per second 115200 e Data bits 8 e Parity None e Stop bits 1 e Flow control none Start your PC s terminal VT100 or ANSI emulation program Press Enter once to launch the CLI At the Login prompt type administrator and press
434. the spacebar to toggle though a list of available RAID levels 3 If you want to create multiple logical drives highlight Capacity press the backspace key to remove the current value then type a new smaller value 4 RAID 50 and 60 only Highlight Number of Axles and press the spacebar to choose the number of axles See RAID 50 Axles on page 342 or RAID 60 Axles on page 345 5 For the following items accept the default value or highlight and press the spacebar to choose a new value e Highlight Stripe and press the spacebar to toggle through stripe sizes and choose 64 KB 128 KB 256 KB 512 KB or 1 MB 232 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU 6 e Highlight Sector and press the spacebar to toggle through sector sizes and choose 512 B 1 KB 2 KB or 4 KB e Highlight Write Policy and press the spacebar to toggle write cache policy between WriteBack and WriteThru write though e Highlight Read Policy and press the spacebar to toggle read cache policy though ReadCache ReadAhead and NoCache e Highlight Preferred Controller ID and press the spacebar to toggle among 1 2 or Automatic Applies to dual controller capable Fibre Channel models only Highlight Save Logical Drive and press Enter Step 3 Summary Review logical drives you are about to create for your new array Then do one of the following actions If you agree with the logical drives as specified highlight Complete Disk Array Creation and
435. the steps above specifying different parameters but choose the Express or Advanced option 230 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Creating a Disk Array Express To create a disk array using the Express feature 1 2 3 From the Main Menu highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter Highlight Create New Array and press Enter Highlight Configuration Method and press the spacebar to toggle to Express Highlight the following options and press to spacebar to choose Yes or No e Redundancy e Capacity e Performance e Spare Drive e Mixing SATA SAS Drive If you choose No and you have both SATA and SAS drives a separate array is created for each type of drive Highlight Number of Logical Drives and press the backspace key to erase the current value then enter the number of logical drives you want Highlight Application Type and press the spacebar to toggle though the applications and choose the best one for your disk array e File Server e Video Stream e Transaction Data e Transaction Log e Other Press Control A to save your settings and move to the next screen Review the proposed configuration of disk array and logical drives To accept the proposed configuration and create the disk array and logical drives highlight Save Configuration and press Enter To reject the proposed configuration highlight Cancel Array Configuration and press Enter You return to the Disk Arrays Summary screen T
436. thru Check the event log to see whether battery is re conditioning The write policy of writeback logical drive switched from writethru to writeback No action is required Battery is charging in high temperature Monitor the condition Contact Tech Support if the problem persists Battery cannot function with the enclosure or with the attached battery board Wrong battery installed Contact Tech Support for assistance Logical drive writeback cache maybe enabled without battery support Battery is fully charged No action required Battery is not present Install a battery or verify that the battery is properly connected Battery is not accessible Connect the battery properly or replace the battery BBU BBU flushing has started BBU flushing has ended No action is required BBU flushing has failed Contact Tech Support if the condition persists Blade Server Blade Server Inserted Blade Server Removed No action is required Cache Not available Contact Tech Support 411 VTrak E Class Product Manual Reported Event Corrective Action Controller The controller parameter s are changed by user No action is required The controller is reset by Watch Dog timer Result of a firmware update If the condition persists replace the controller The controller has new crash information Conta
437. tically restart That action temporarily disrupts I O operations and drops your WebPAM PROe or CLU connection To reestablish your WebPAM PROe connection 1 Wait no less than two minutes 2 Click Logout in the WebPAM PROe Header then log in again If you cannot log in wait 30 seconds and try again To reestablish your CLU connection After the screen goes blank wait about two minutes then re establish your Telnet connection to the CLU If you cannot re establish a connection wait 30 seconds and try again If you have a serial connection to the RAID subsystem the connection remains during the shut down and restart No reconnect is required Failed Update If the firmware update fails the controller status LED displays red See page 319 Figure 1 1 Remove the USB flash device 2 Insert the USB flash device into a USB port on your PC 3 Go to the OPAX_xxxxxx folder to obtain the report and log Possible causes for an update failure include e Less than 50 MB free space on the USB flash device e The SBB firmware image is invalid e A background activity is running See Contacting Technical Support on page 435 320 Chapter 6 Maintenance Updating Physical Drive Firmware This feature applies only to PROMISE supported physical drives For a list of supported drives go to PROMISE support http www promise com support If you have physical drives in your RAID system that are not PROMISE supported fol
438. ting 282 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Managing UPS Units Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS Management includes the following functions e Viewing a List of UPS Units below e Making UPS Settings page 284 e Viewing UPS Information page 285 Viewing a List of UPS Units To view a list of UPS units supporting the VTrak 1 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter 2 Highlight UPS Management and press Enter Information in the UPS List includes Operational Status OK means Normal On AC means the UPS is connected to a viable external AC power source On Battery means the external AC power source is offline and the UPS is running on battery power e Capacity Backup capacity expressed as a percentage e Remaining Minutes Number of minutes the UPS is expected to power your system in the event of a power failure e Loading Actual output of UPS as a percentage of the rated output See the Note below Note The maximum recommended Loading Ratio varies among models of UPS units The general range is 60 to 80 If the reported Loading Ratio exceeds the recommended value for your UPS unit e Have fewer subsystems or peripherals connected to this UPS unit Add more UPS units or use a higher capacity UPS unit to protect your RAID systems 283 VTrak E Class Product Manual Making UPS Settings These settings control how the VTrak subsystem detec
439. tings changes are required e Alias Enable Header Digest Enable Data Digest e Enable Uni directional CHAP Authentication e Enable Bi directional CHAP Authentication Click the Submit button Deleting an iSCSI Target You cannot delete the default target To delete a target 1 Click the Device tab 191 VTrak E Class Product Manual OF E N Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Target tab Click the target you want then click the Delete button In the Confirmation box type the word confirm in the field provided and click the Confirm button The target is removed from the list Assigning a Portal to an iSCSI Target Before you can assign a portal to a target you must create the portal See Adding iSCSI Portals on page 194 To assign a portal to an iSCSI target 1 a Fon 6 7 Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Target tab Click the target you want then click the Assign Portal to Target button In the Portal list click the portal you want assign then click the lt button Choose additional portals as needed When you are done choosing portals click the Next button Click the Submit button Un assigning a Portal from an iSCSI Target To un assign a portal from an iSCSI target 1 SUS Po 6 7 Click the Device tab Click the iSCSI Management icon Click the Target tab Click the target you want then click the
440. tings have been changed SATA drives A physical drive page 3 settings have been changed SAS drives No action is required Physical disk is marked as DEAD due to removal Physical disk is marked as DEAD due to failure of reassign sectors command Physical disk is marked as DEAD due to PFA condition Physical disk is marked as DEAD due to forced offline state Replace the physical drive Physical disk seen by partner controller not seen here Check and correct SAS connections Verify that SAS to SATA adapters are installed on all SATA drives Single ported physical disk seen by Partner controller not seen here Install an SAS to SATA adapter on the SATA drive Physical disk reported not ready Replace the physical drive PSU Power Supply Units PSU is not inserted Reinstall the power supply unit PSU is off Turn on the power supply or plug in the power cable PSU is on PSU is installed and turned on PSU is functional and turned on No action is required PSU is installed and turned off PSU is functional and turned off Turn on the power supply or plug in the power cable PSU is malfunctioning and turned on PSU is malfunctioning and turned off PSU has been removed PSU 12V 5V 3 3V power is out of the threshold range Replace the power supply unit 422 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting Reported Event
441. tion on page 462 e PDO Removal on page 463 Viewing System Information To view System information and settings do one of the following actions e From the System menu choose System Information e Click the System Information Ee icon The System Information dialog box displays 465 VTrak E Class Product Manual System information supplies information about the Host PC or Server including Host Name e MPIO Version Operating System MPDEV File OS Version MPDEV Version OS Manufacturer MPSPFLTR File IP Address e MPSPFLTR Version Storport File e DSM File Storport Version e DSM Version MPIO File Note File information includes the file name and location of the installed file in the server s file system Saving System Information To save the current System information and settings data to a text file 1 Do one of the following actions e From the System menu choose System Information e Click the System Information E icon The System Information dialog box displays From the System Information dialog box click the Save button In the Save As dialog box navigate to the folder where you want to save the file Type a file name into the File name field Append the file name with a txt suffix Click the Save button Click the OK button in the confirmation box Your information and settings data are saved to a text file in the folder you designated 466 Troubleshooting
442. tion PD SMART Info Physical drive ID model type and SMART status PSU Wattage Info Enclosure power consumption power supply input and output and power on time SWMGT Info Software management The Service Report includes the following topics continued Service Setting CIM Service Setting Email Service Setting Netsend Service Setting NTP Service Setting SLP Service Setting SNMP Service Setting SSH Service Setting Telnet Service Setting Webserver Sessions Info Spare Info Basic spare drive information Spare Dump Info Diagnostic information Spare Verbose Info Full spare drive information Statistic Info Subsystem info UPS Info User Info 81 VTrak E Class Product Manual Importing a Configuration Script You can write a CLI configuration script to automatically configure your VTrak subsystem The script must be a plain non encrypted text file From there you can import the script from the Host PC and perform the configuration automatically Cautions e Do NOT attempt to write or modify a configuration script until you receive guidance from Technical Support See page 435 Importing a configuration script overwrites the current settings on your VTrak subsystem Or you can save the configuration from one VTrak RAID subsystem export it and then import it to automatically configure your other VTrak RAID subsystems To import a configuration sc
443. tipathd 3 Reboot the VTrak 4 Check the multipath configuration Multipath 11 multipath v4 Fibre Channel HBA to VTrak If you plan to use connect a Fibre Channel HBA card to VTrak RAID subsystem you must change the remote port rport configuration 1 Change the dev_loss_tmo value as large as possible Example Ox7fffffff 2 Change the fast_io_fail_tmo value as 30 485 VTrak E Class Product Manual RPM Packages and Documents for Linux MPIO PROMISE provides RPM packages and multipath conf files for Linux on the support http www promise com support A PROMISE Linux package contains e package folder RPM packages for the Linux OS e multipath conf folder e ALUA folder Configuration file and instructions for ALUA if supported normal folder Configuration file for general multipathing Important Please read the How to Configure document in the ALUA folder for the latest information before beginning your setup The table below lists the content of each PROMISE Linux package Package Folder Contents SLES10 SP2 normal multipath conf vtrak normal sles10 sp2 SLES10 SP3 package multipath tools 0 4 7 34 50 10 ass fix i586 rpm multipath tools 0 4 7 34 50 10 ass fix x86_64 rpm ALUA multipath conf vtrak alua sles10 sp3 How to Configure MPIO SLES10 SP3 doc normal multipath conf vtrak normal sles10 sp3 SLES11 packages multipath promise suse11 0 4 8 i1586 rpm multipat
444. ts the UPS unit and responds to data reported by the UPS unit To make UPS settings From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight UPS Management and press Enter Highlight UPS Settings and press Enter Perform the following actions as required 1 Verify the Current UPS Communication method See Note 1 e SNMP Network connection e Serial Serial connection Unknown No connection Choose a Detection Setting from the dropdown menu e Automatic Default If a UPS is detected when the subsystem boots the settings changes to Enable Enable Monitors UPS Settings changes reports warnings and logs events e Disable Monitors UPS only Type values into the Threshold fields See Note 2 e Running Time Remaining Threshold Actual time below this value resets adaptive writeback cache to writethrough e Warning Temperature Threshold Actual temperature above this value triggers a warning and logs an event e Loading Ratio Threshold Actual loading ratio percentage above this threshold triggers a warning and logs an event See Note 3 e Battery Charge Remaining Threshold Reserve capacity below this percentage triggers a warning and logs an event For UPS units with network cards type the IP addresses or DNS names in fields UPS 1 and UPS 2 See Note 4 Press Control A to save your settings Note 1 VTrak supports multiple UPS units using n
445. ttings page 144 Viewing Physical Drive Statistics page 144 Viewing Physical Drive SMART Log Information page 145 Saving the Physical Drive SMART Log page 145 Locating a Physical Drive page 146 Forcing a Physical Drive Offline page 146 Clearing a Stale or a PFA Condition page 147 Clearing a Stale or a PFA Condition page 147 Updating Firmware on a Physical Drive page 147 Managing Physical Drive Problems see Physical Drive Problems on page 399 Viewing a List of Physical Drives To view a list of physical drives in the RAID system 1 2 Click the Device tab Click the Physical Drive icon The list of enclosures and the physical drives inside them displays Physical drive information includes ID ID number of the physical drive Status Green check yellow and red X icons e Model Make and model of the drive Type SAS or SATA HDD or SSD e Location Enclosure number and slot number Configuration Array number and sequence number spare number unconfigured or stale configuration Capacity In GB Viewing Physical Drive Information To view physical drive information 1 Click the Device tab 141 VTrak E Class Product Manual 2 Click the Physical Drive icon 3 Click the physical drive you want then click the View button Physical drive information includes Physical Drive ID ID number of the physical drive Location Enclosure
446. type in a User name and Password in the fields provided The following items are optional but recommended Highlight and press the backspace key to erase the current value then type the new value Sender s email address Subject Line for the email message Press Control A to save your settings 295 VTrak E Class Product Manual To start stop or restart the Email service highlight Start Stop or Restart and press Enter Making SLP Settings By default SLP service is set to Automatic and its normal status is Started To make SLP service settings 1 5 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight Software Management and press Enter Highlight SLP and press Enter Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic and Manual Press Control A to save your settings To start stop or restart the SLP service highlight Start Stop or Restart and press Enter Making Web Server Settings By default Web Server service is set to Automatic and its normal status is Started To make Web Server service settings 1 8 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight Software Management and press Enter Highlight and press Enter Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic and Manual Highlight the following and press the backspace key to erase the current val
447. ually under IPv4 page 57 e Making Virtual Management Port Settings Manually under IPv6 page 57 Maintenance Mode Settings page 57 e Making Maintenance Mode Settings Automatically page 57 e Making Maintenance Mode Settings Manually under IPv4 page 58 e Making Maintenance Mode Settings Manually under IPv6 page 58 Exiting the CLU page 59 Accessing the CLU Quick Setup Menu To access the Quick Setup menu in the command line utility 1 At the administrator cli gt prompt type menu and press Enter The CLU main menu appears See Figure 3 Figure 3 CLU main menu ME 192 168 10 85 Purl LU Main Menu ARROWS TAB Navigate ENTER Select CTRL X rn CTRL E Help 55 VTrak E Class Product Manual 2 Highlight Quick Setup and press Enter The first Quick Setup screen enables you to make Date and Time settings Making Subsystem Date and Time Settings To set the subsystem date and time 1 Press the arrow keys to highlight System Date Press the backspace key to erase the current date Type the new date Follow the same procedure to set the System Time OVP Qe Press Control A to save these settings and move to the Management Port settings screen Virtual Management Port Settings Making Virtual Management Port Settings Automatically Automatic settings require a DHCP server on your network DHCP is currently supported on IPv4 only Under Quick Setup the Managem
448. ue Type a new interval value in degrees C Press Control A to save your settings O90 OY OSB OON Viewing FRU VPD Information FRU VPD refers to Vital Product Data VPD information about Field Replaceable Units FRU in the enclosure The number and type of FRU depends on the subsystem model To view FRU VPD information 1 From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter 2 Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter 3 Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter 4 Highlight FRU VPD Information and press Enter Use this information when communicating with Technical Support and when ordering replacement units For contact information see Contacting Technical Support on page 435 Viewing Power Supply Status To view the status of the power supplies 1 From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press Enter 2 Highlight Enclosure Management and press Enter 220 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Highlight the enclosure you want and press Enter Highlight Power Supplies and press Enter The screen displays the operational and fan status of VTrak s two power supplies If any status differs from normal or the fan speed is below the Healthy Threshold value there is a fan power supply malfunction See Replacing a Power Supply on page 323 Locating a Power Supply To locate a power supply 1 CR Oe From the Main Menu highlight Subsystem Management and press En
449. ue then type the new value e HTTP Port 80 is the default e Session Time Out 24 minutes is the default 1440 minutes 24 hours Highlight SSL and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Highlight HTTPS Port and press the backspace key to erase the current value then type the new value 443 is the default Press Control A to save your settings To start stop or restart the service highlight Start Stop or Restart and press Enter 296 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Making Telnet Settings By default Telnet service is set to Automatic and its normal status is Started To make Telnet service settings 1 6 From the Main Menu highlight Additional Info and Management and press Enter Highlight Software Management and press Enter Highlight Telnet and press Enter Highlight Startup Type and press the spacebar to toggle between Automatic and Manual Highlight the following and press the backspace key to erase the current value then type the new value e Port number 2300 is the default e Session Time Out 24 minutes is the default 1440 minutes 24 hours e Maximum number of connections 4 is the default Press Control A to save your settings To start stop or restart the Telnet service highlight Start Stop or Restart and press Enter Making SSH Settings By default Secure Shell SSH service is set to Automatic and its normal status is Started To make S
450. urchase date or 30 days whichever is longer PROMISE pays for standard return shipping charges only You must pay for any additional shipping options such as express shipping 443 VTrak E Class Product Manual 444 Appendix A Useful Information The appendix covers the following topics SNMP MIB Files below e Adding a Second RAID Controller page 445 e Installing a Second RAID Controller page 446 SNMP MIB Files PROMISE supplies two MIB files to integrate the VTrak E830f E630f or E330f subsystem into your SNMP system These files are in the SNMP folder on the Software CD The MIB files are e FCMGMT MIB mib e raidv4 mib For help loading the MIB files see the instructions that came with your MIB browser Adding a Second RAID Controller If your VTrak E Class subsystem shipped with one RAID controller you can add a second RAID controller The second controller must have e The same firmware version as the currently installed controller e The same amount of SDRAM as the currently installed controller To obtain information for the currently installed RAID controller Click the Device tab Click the Component List icon Click the Controller and click the View button On the Information tab note the Firmware Version Click the Advanced information tab Note the Slot 1 and Slot 2 Memory Size Contact contact PROMISE Technical Support to order your second RAID controller Be OU O
451. user name and password in order to log in again 74 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Viewing the Storage Network To view the other subsystems on your Storage Network click the Discovery tab at the left edge of the WebPAM PROe window Logging onto a Subsystem To log onto a subsystem in the list double click the subsystem Caution The new subsystem displays in the same browser tab Click your browser s back button to return to the original subsystem Filtering the Subsystem List To filter the list so it shows only specific subsystems enter a characteristic into the Filter By field and press Enter Refreshing the List To refresh the list click the Refresh link 75 VTrak E Class Product Manual Managing Subsystems Subsystem management includes Viewing Subsystem Information below Making Subsystem Settings page 77 Locking or Unlocking the Subsystem page 77 Restoring Factory Default Settings page 78 Clearing Statistics page 79 Saving a Service Report page 79 Importing a Configuration Script page 82 Exporting a Configuration Script page 82 Restarting the Subsystem page 83 Shutting Down the Subsystem page 83 Restarting the Subsystem after a Shutdown page 84 Viewing Subsystem Information To view subsystem information click the Administration tab The list of subsystems and host controllers displays Subsystem information includes Alias if assigned Vendor
452. utomatic 132 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Starting Netsend Service To restart the Netsend service 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the Netsend service and click the Start button Stopping Netsend To stop the Netsend service 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the Netsend service and click the Stop button 4 Click the Confirm button Restarting Netsend Service To start the Netsend service after stopping it 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the Netsend service and click the Start button Making Netsend Settings To change Netsend service settings 1 Click the Administration tab 2 Click the Services icon 3 Click the Netsend service and click the Settings button 4 Choose a startup type e Automatic Starts and runs with the subsystem e Manual default You start the service when you need it 5 Click the Save button 6 Click the Confirm button Adding Netsend Server Accounts To add a Netsend server account 1 Click the Administration tab Click the Services icon Click the Netsend service and click the Settings button Enter the recipient server IP address in the field provided Oh COL Choose a recipient filter event severity level See the table on the next page 133 VTrak E Class Product Manual 6 Click the Add button The recipient server is added
453. utton Click the Restart button Type the word confirm in the field provided Click the Confirm button When the controller shuts down your WebPAM PROe connection is lost Wait no less than two minutes In your browser click Logout in the WebPAM PROe Header then log in again If you cannot log in immediately wait 30 seconds and try again 322 Chapter 6 Maintenance Replacing a Power Supply The power supply and its fans are replaced as one unit There are no individually serviceable parts No tools are required for this procedure Removing the Old Power Supply To remove the power supply 1 2 3 4 5 Verify that the status LED is amber or red See Figure 2 Switch off the power Unplug the power cord Turn the two set screws counter clockwise to loosen them The screws are retained on the power supply housing Grasp the handle and pull the power supply out of the enclosure Figure 2 Power supply for VTrak E830f and E630f Set screw SAS EXP Status LED On Off Switch Handle Installing a New Power Supply To install the power supply 1 oP Oh Carefully slide the power supply into the enclosure Turn the two set screws clockwise to tighten them Plug in the power cord Switch on the power supply Verify that the new power supply LED is green See Figure 2 323 VTrak E Class Product Manual Replacing a C
454. ve e Physical Drive ID ID number of the physical drive chosen for this spare e Revertible Yes or No e Spare Type Global or Dedicated e Dedicated to Array ID number of the disk array to which the spare is dedicated Viewing Spare Drive Information To view spare drive information 1 2 Click the Storage tab Click the Spare Drive icon The list of spare drives appears Click the spare drive you want then click the View button Spare Drive information displays including Spare Drive ID Spare0 Spare etc 172 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe e Physical Drive ID ID number of the physical drive chosen for this spare e Operational Status OK means normal Spare Type Global or Dedicated e Physical Capacity Total data capacity of the spare drive e Revertible Yes or No e Configurable Capacity Usable capacity of the spare drive e Spare Check Status Not Checked or Healthy Media Patrol Enabled or Not Enabled e Dedicated to Array ID number of the disk array to which the spare is dedicated For more information see Spare Drives on page 355 Creating a Spare Drive Manually This feature creates a spare drive only You can also use the Wizard to create a disk array with logical drives and spare drives at the same time See Spare Drives for more information This action requires Super User or Power User privileges To create a spa
455. ve Offline This feature applies only to physical drives assigned to disk arrays Caution Forcing a physical drive offline is likely to cause data loss Back up your data before you proceed Use this function only when required Important Forcing a physical drive offline causes your logical drives to become degraded If Auto Rebuild is enabled and a spare drive is available the disk array begins rebuilding itself automatically To force a physical drive offline 1 Click the Device tab 2 Click the Physical Drive icon 3 Click the down arrow button to list the physical drives in the enclosure 146 Chapter 4 Management with WebPAM PROe Mouse over the physical drive you want to force offline 5 Click the Force Offline button 6 Inthe Confirmation box type the word confirm in the field provided and click the Confirm button Clearing a Stale or a PFA Condition Stale The physical drive contains obsolete disk array information PFA The physical drive has errors resulting in a prediction of failure Be sure you have corrected the condition by a physical drive replacement rebuild operation etc first Then clear the condition To clear a Stale or a PFA condition 1 Click the Device tab 2 Click the Physical Drive icon 3 Click the physical drive you want then click the Clear PFA Stale button If the physical drive has both a Stale condition and a PFA condition the first click removes the Stal
456. ve the scroll bar or expand the window to see all of the reported statistics The Performance tab reports the following data for each path Path ID State Active or not Read Requests Write Requests Bytes Read Bytes Written Non IO Requests Queue Depth Retries Count Failure Count An Active state indicates this path is available to handle I O requests If Active does not appear the path is designated as Standby Active and Standby states are determined by Load Balance Policy See also Viewing Path Performance Statistics on page 457 Load Balance Policy on page 461 458 Monitoring Your LUNs and Paths Viewing Events Click the Events tab to view MPIO related events The data includes Type Error Warning or Information Server Time Message Date Move the scroll bar or expand the window to see all of the reported information Use this information to verify that settings changes took place and diagnose problems See also e Automatic Load Balancing for Failover Policy on page 460 e Load Balance Policy on page 461 e Path Verification on page 462 e PDO Removal on page 463 e Refreshing the Objects on page 465 Clearing Path Statistics You can Clear Path Statistics for all paths as needed for monitoring and diagnostic purposes To clear the statistics for ALL paths do one of the following actions e From the Operations menu choose Clear Path Stat
457. w smaller value See the comments on the next page e Highlight DMA Mode and press the spacebar to toggle through UDMA 0 to 6 and MDMA 0 to 2 225 VTrak E Class Product Manual For SAS drives e Highlight Write Cache and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and Disabled e Highlight Read Look Ahead Cache and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and Disabled e Highlight CmdQueuing and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and Disabled e Highlight MediumErrorThreshold and press the backspace key to remove the current value then type a new smaller value See the comments below e Highlight Read Cache and press the spacebar to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Press Control A to save your settings See Viewing Physical Drive Information below to determine which functions your physical drives support Medium Error Threshold is the number of bad blocks tolerated before the controller marks the drive as Dead The default setting is 64 blocks A setting of zero disables the function When disabled no drives are marked offline even when errors are detected Viewing Physical Drive Information To view information about a physical drive 1 From the Main Menu highlight Physical Drive Management and press Enter Highlight the physical drive you want and press Enter Basic information displays Highlight Advanced Information and press Enter Advanced information displays
458. wing the Storage Network page 75 Managing Subsystems page 76 Managing RAID Controllers page 85 Managing Enclosures page 92 Managing UPS Units page 96 Managing Network Connections page 100 Managing Users page 102 Managing LDAP page 108 Managing Background Activities page 114 Managing Storage Services page 124 Monitoring Performance page 138 Managing Physical Drives page 141 Managing Disk Arrays page 148 Managing Logical Drives page 162 Managing Spare Drives page 172 Managing Initiators page 177 Managing LUNs page 180 Managing Fibre Channel Connections page 184 Managing iSCSI Connections page 188 Logging into WebPAM PROe 1 2 Launch your browser In the browser address field type in the virtual management port IP address of the VTrak subsystem Use the IP address you set in the CLI page 47 or CLU page 55 Example e WebPAM PROe uses a secure HTTP connection https e Enter the IP address of the VTrak 192 168 10 85 69 VTrak E Class Product Manual Together your entry looks like this https 192 168 10 85 3 When the login screen appears e Type administrator in the User Name field Type password in the Password field e Click the Login button The User Name and Password are case sensitive 4 Optional Choose a display language from the dropdown menu WebPAM PROe displays in English German French Italian Spanish Russian Japa
459. y supported on IPv4 only To enable automatic management port settings From the Main Menu highlight Network Management and press Enter Highlight the protocol family IPv4 or IPv6 you want and press Enter Highlight Network Settings and press Enter Highlight DHCP and press the spacebar to toggle to Enabled Press Control A to save your settings gie g N gt Making Manual Settings 1 From the Main Menu highlight Network Management and press Enter 2 Highlight the protocol family IPv4 or IPv6 you want and press Enter 3 Highlight Network Settings and press Enter 4 Highlight DHCP and press the spacebar to toggle to Disabled DHCP is currently supported by and does not appear under IPv6 5 Highlight each of the following and press the backspace key to erase the current value then type the new value IP Address 250 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU e Subnet Mask e Default Gateway IP Address e DNS Server IP Address 6 Press Control A to save your settings Making Maintenance Mode Settings Each controller has its own IP addresses for access when the controller goes into maintenance mode For more information see Maintenance Mode on page 395 Before you change settings please see About IP Addresses on page 45 Making Automatic Settings 1 From the Main Menu highlight Network Management and press Enter 2 Highlight Maintenance Mode Network Configuration and press Enter 3 Highlight the
460. ysical drive 1 From the Main Menu highlight Physical Drive Management and press Enter Highlight Global Physical Drives Settings and press Enter Highlight the physical drive you want and press Enter Highlight Locate Physical Drive and press Enter The drive carrier status LED flashes for one minute Figure 5 Drive carrier status LED Green LED flashes 228 Chapter 5 Management with the CLU Managing Disk Arrays Disk Array Management includes the following functions Viewing a List of Disk Arrays page 229 Creating a Disk Array page 229 Deleting a Disk Array page 233 Making Disk Array Settings page 233 Viewing Disk Array Information page 234 Enabling Media Patrol PDM and Power Management on a Disk Array page 235 Preparing the Disk Array for Transport page 236 Rebuilding a Disk Array page 236 Running PDM on a Disk Array page 237 Running PDM on a Disk Array page 237 Running Transition on a Disk Array page 237 Locating a Disk Array page 238 Locating a Disk Array page 238 Viewing a List of Disk Arrays To view a list of disk arrays From the Main Menu highlight Disk Array Management and press Enter The list of disk arrays displays Creating a Disk Array The CLU provides three methods of creating a disk array Automatic Creates a new disk array following a default set of parameters Creates a hot spare drive for all RAID levels except RAID 0 when five or mor

Promise Technology VTrak E630FD

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents